Home

XSTREAM User Manual

1. Embeded Media 4ll Media is in One File Try to Locate External Files PreRendered iF Svailable Search Specific Folders For External Media Original Import Media Preview Media references the audio files from the omf this may cause slowdowns on large projects Note If the project is an MT project stuffing the fuffs will render all audio to the current project If the project is a DR2 project using the Localise command will place all the audio in a folder inside the project folder This brings all the audio used by the project into one place so that it can be easily backed up or copied Fully Import Media automatically places the audio from the omf in either your FUF or Media folder inside the folder of the current project Clip Naming Standard derives the names of clips from the omf Master Clip within the omf file Sub Composition OMF s created in AVID often derive clips from either the Master clip and the Sub Composition This option derives the names of clips from the Sub Composition Use this setting to give your clips more logical names if they are coming from an AVID and not displaying logical clip names Offset Entering a timecode offset moves the whole composition forwards on the timeline Entering a track offset moves the whole composition down in the track display Page 301 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Importing I
2. Each section has an independent IN OUT control All three may be active at the same time if required The transfer function of the dynamics is shown in the Mixer Screen channels the Xynergi Pad and the Dynamics Zoom screen Page 179 MIXING January 22 2013 Aux Sends Satellite AV provides 12 aux sends Each send from each channel has an independent Pre Post switch and In Out control Aux 2 send IN OUT Aux Sends Zoom Panels It is possible to see more detail when adjusting EQ Dynamics and Pan control using Zoom Panels In particular numeric values for all parameters are shown and update as they are changed To display a zoom panel do one of the following it will stay on the screen until removed e Double click a graph in the Xstream Mixer Screen screen Page 180 MIXING January 22 2013 NAME Mixer Screen Double click qualis er Dynamics Va e Double press the Path EQ Dyn Or Aux button in the XCS Panel FMC Right Clic e Double click a graph in the Xstream Mixer Screen screen To remove the current zoom panel from the screen do one of the following e Right click the Zoom Panel e Click the Close box in the upper right corner of the Zoom Panel e Double press the button from Path EQ Dyn or Aux whichever is being displayed in the XCS Panel Page 181 MIXING January 22 2013 Automatic Zoom Panel Display Zoom Panels can also be displayed automatically whe
3. M Enable Beeps W Show Streamer Handle E Fr Prerall 2 SEC Fostroll fo SEC Cue Delete All From Early In PreR oll Rehearse CYCLE STOP To Rec Playback Keep Playing Rec uk ADR Characters Your project may contain a list of characters and the cues assigned to different ones Creating characters Step 1 Click in the Character box which normally shows lt Show all gt Character lt Show all gt Step 2 Type the name of a new character Step 3 Click the Add button Filter by character To show only one character s lines use the Character drop down menu to select one character Page 65 ADR January 22 2013 Sort by character To sort the list by character click the Character tab at the top of the ADR list box Character Andrey Dialogue 00 00 09 2725 00 00 11 14 Tope you don t mind 00 00 10 11 O0 00 15 11 Sunrise and sunset Peter 00 00 11 15 O0 00 15 06 It s always been this way Peter John 00 00 13 01 00 00 15 2725 The long and the short W Enable Beeps Y Show Streamer Jw Loop Handle j Fr Prerall 2 SEC Fostroll fo SEC Ue Early In Rehearse CYCLE STOP Rec uk ReciPlayback Keep Playing 2 m In the same way you can sort by From time To time or dialog alphabetically Click any one of these a second time to reverse sort ADR Preferences Once you have entered all the cues that you want to use you may set up your preferences by
4. Common Edit Commands The Trim Fade and Nudge commands are used more than any others to fine tune audio clips Double Handed Commands with the Jog Wheel The Fade and Trim commands can use the Jog Wheel to speed up the process Fade Head For simple use just press and release the Fade Head button A e Choose the point where the Fade in should complete For simple use just press and release the Fade Head button A fade is created using the last used Fade Curve shown in the Smart Pane of the Edit Screen For double handed fades continue as follows e Press the Fade Head key e Turn the Jog Wheel to set the shape of the fade in the curve is shown on the Edit screen e Release the Fade Head key to execute the fade in Trim Head For simple use just press and release the Trim Head button at the point where your clip should start playing Double handed trims are great for extending the clip because you get to see the full extent before choosing the trim point Do the following e Press and hold the Trim button the clip s head is fully extended e Jog to the position where you want the clip to start e Release the Trim button the clip is trimmed or extended to that position Page 25 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Nudge Commands There are two sets of Nudge commands The simple commands move the selected clips by a single frame These keys are marked like this This shows the amount of nudge in subf
5. Detailed Description 83 THe CURSOP ensenen naNO AEN 83 CUCU ANC PAS Ue ss sis vasetasciavens nana 84 CODY rriena outa cd tenons teen adhlans a 89 ESS orere E e Ea a 89 Edit Soft Key COMMANAS s ssessessessssrsrrssrsnnns 89 Paste SPCClal onice diosa vines coves tana emtavenianteoss 91 T aa one 91 SDs ee auduaanerdiins 93 NU GOS sie csic ces herectc taney ete eae eels 93 Fade and Crossfade cccscsceesecsenteesenseneeeans 94 CID EVE E T E E E T 103 Clip Eg allsatioNn siine aa 104 Editing on Multiple Layers ccscecseseeseeeeees 107 The Track MenU ssessssssssssnesesnnsrsnnrrerrrnernns 108 The Move Menu ssssessssssssnsnnsnsnnnnsnurnnrrrnernne 109 Xstream s Quick Edit Layout s essssesssserssssn 110 Importing from Other Projects sesssssnnnen 114 Gating CHDS arterna aena ote a 115 Replacing Audio Media cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 117 UndrandREdO marrone 118 Mouse Based Editing cccccscseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 121 Moving Clips oniar tn ecdleueiat a 123 J POINCE QIU NO wicsetctawettawtciuetsg ide ticelets 124 TAS EdE FOOD Ar dirsirentnonn en 126 Display LAYELING ccscsceesecseseeesessentensneeneees 130 GPOUD CIIDS an a teuepdanareneueus 131 Mouse Edit Menus ccccsesseseersetseneenseneneess 132 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING 135 TATHOGUICH ON nera a a ar 135 Time Compression ExXpansiOn sscsceeeeeeees 135 Using VocAlign Processing cccsceceeeeeeeeeees 136 R
6. Mixer Requires Restart m Et Dn Busses MADI Channels 56 64 Step 2 Select the 3D Panner checkbox Page 184 MIXING January 22 2013 Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog The Video button toggles the Pan Theatre Having enabled it here open the Pyxis Window to use the Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below Ss P n ty E ili Fi P7 f P f This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick Page 185 MIXING January 22 2013 The Aux Panel Track 21 Processing Order the Path Order Menu Overview The Path Order Menu allows you to change the order of the Equaliser Dynamics and Insert Point in any Track or Live Feed To use this Step 1 Hold down the Mode button Step 2 Press the Path Order button It is also available in the Mixer Megamode Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press one of the soft keys to set the processing order The FMC2 screen changes to show the order Page 186 MIXING January 22 2013 Path Order I gt E gt D Path Order D gt E gt I Path Order D gt I gt E Path Copy Overview Path Copy allows you to copy all or part of the settings from one path to another It works by first copying the all the settings from a sou
7. Ox7X 0x20 Status Data sent from Xstream system to the Sony master device in response to the 0x61 0x20 Status sense commanad If Play Only is set the value of this bit is 1 only when Xstream is in Play or Record modes If Play and varispeed is set the value of this bit is 1 when Xstream is in Play Record or varispeed modes Some equipment e g DspMedia postation requires this parameter to be set to Play only to work correctly Some equipment e g SoundMaster requires this parameter to be set to Play and Varispeed to work correctly LTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that Xstream will chase Longitudinal Time Code entering the SMPTE In port on the SX 20 Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incoming timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Page 315 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Record Tracking As with Play Tracking but recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox is ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the ti
8. Using the panner Step 1 Call a signal path to the channel panel by pressing the cali button on any fader Step 2 Adjust the control to achieve the desired result The parameter values are displayed in the fat channel section at the bottom of the mixer display Boom Sending level to the Boom channel can be done pre or post fader Page 177 MIXING January 22 2013 Equalisation Lo Pass Filter or Low Shelf Hi Shelf Parametric EQ bandpass Lo Shelf Hi Pass Filter or High Shelf EQ Type Gain Compensation EQ IN OUT The channel mixer provides four bands of parametric equalization and two filters Each parametric section can be switched in or out independently The Hi and Lo Pass filter sections can be switched to shelves using the mouse wheel The parametric bands can be switched between Bell Lo Shelf Hi Shelf and notch using the mouse wheel Their frequency ranges can also be switched between Low Low mid High mid and High EQ Type Clicking the or buttons changes the EQ display to show different types of controls There are four types available each with its own sound Page 178 MIXING January 22 2013 Dynamics The Dream II Dynamics comprises three sections compressor limiter and expander or gate In Make up gain Sidechain In Out Linking for Buses and Link Groups Compressor IN OUT Limiter IN OUT Gate Expander IN OUT Dynamics Toggle Expander or Gate
9. 50 50 Iso The Editing screen displays fade information in the Smart Pane at the top of the monitor This is used to issue commands as well as illustrate fade shapes curves Using Picture Keys Fade Head One of the simplest fades can be achieved as follows Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the fade button if not already on Step 3 Press the fade head button This creates a fade from the start of the clip to the cursor position The shape of the fade can be seen above this will be described later but the Duration is not used Instead the duration is set by the cursor position If you are happy with your current fade shape using fade head is a fast and simple way to get a lot of work done NOTES e If you do not want to apply the Smart Panel shape shown above to the Head deselect the shape checkbox in the Smart Pane e If you ONLY want to apply the shape and not to change the length of the head fade deselect the length checkbox in the Smart Pane Fade Tail Same aS fade head but it fades from the cursor to the end of the clip Fade Clip Applies the numbers in the Head Duration and Tail Duration fields shown in the Smart Pane Page 94 EDITING January 22 2013 SO 60 70 80 30 dB 77 00 00 00 20 Duration Using Multiple Tracks If multiple tracks are selected the simple Fade Head and Fade Tail commands will apply to all clips touching the cursor o
10. Displaying Vid O csceeeereees 31 TRACK COOU acair a a 31 TAE CID iaraa a 32 Selecting Channels cccccccscseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Solo Mute and Arm On Tactile Controller 38 Solo Mute and Arm On Screen seses 39 ZOOMING ar a 40 Timescale display cccecsecseseetseecseateneuseneens 40 Audio SerolErS inenen aa 42 Jog COMMAN GS sesssssestescassrecrenstcansacsceureneuauy 44 SAULU G mesueses TaN 45 LOODIN Oea a O 45 Special Transport CommandS ssssesssssssessssnns 46 JUMPING eiaa 46 GOO aa cactacsrecnensiet aisea aistansen eee o caiaus sees 49 RECORDING csccssssscnssecnssennseenssesnnnes 53 ASICS ninaa aa accent a 53 Recording and Editing Multiple Takes 61 Background Recording ccscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 62 ADR oasian ieena 62 ADR uao ela eceatvecinewaa eee uatsieetauieadoek 63 TE OG UGH OM yiana aen a N ON 63 TREAD USE racerene enea Aa 63 Import Cue List from a Text File a so 63 Import from CSV File ccecceceeeeeeeeseereesenens 64 Adding Cues Manually ssssssssesesnnsnnsnsrnrnnnn 64 ADR Preferences ccccscscecsessestersesseneaeansuneeas 66 The ADR Display ccnssnan anna 67 Exporting the ADR LiSt ccccsecsestensesseneenees 69 EDITING isisisi aera T1 Basic Concepts the Audio Clip ssssessssessssens 7i Other Clip Types s ssessssesennenesnsnnrnennennrrrnernns 72 Editing Methods oireeni cruna 72 Editing WULOHOl orainen eee aieceiecees 72 Tactile Editing
11. Hear Mudge Clip Level Track Up Down Fade and Crossfade Overview In the fade menu we can place level ramps at the begining fade in and end fade out of each clip A fade in starts from silence and ends at the full level of the clip and a fade out does the opposite Crossfades between two clips are created by first layering one clip on top of another then putting a fade in the upper clip This induces a complementary fade in the lower clip For clarity while reading this Help item turn on Display Layering by clicking view gt Display Layering above the Edit Screen We can also control the fade profile i e its shape using the X Level and X Point parameters Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation Press the fade button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the fade head button The clip now fades from its beginning to the cursor position The shape or curve of the fade is that one shown above in the Smart Pane Current Head Fade 00 00 01 00 curve Page 75 EDITING January 22 2013 In the next section we will change this shape For now move the transport a little to the right
12. MIDI Keyboard Your MIDI keyboard must be installed before you run the Dream II software Normally this is done using a USB driver installer that comes with your MIDI keyboard Once you start the Dream II software click Setup Instruments Identify your keyboard and set it to play MIDI Channel 1 Patching The Sampler has a pair of stereo outputs which must be patched to Live Inputs or Track Inputs You should patch to Tracks if you wish to record the Sampler output otherwise to Lives To do this Step 1 Select the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Click Instrument Inputs in the lower left of the page Step 3 Select CMIGenerator 1 and CMIGenerator 2 in the upper left of the page Step 4 Select Track Inputs Of Live Inputs in the lower right of the page Step 5 Select any pair of the Track or Lives and click the Patch button Step 6 Exit the Page I O page by pressing the Patch button again or by right clicking anywhere in the Patch page on screen Page 281 SAMPLING January 22 2013 Step 7 If you chose Tracks as your destination make sure to arm them so you can hear the Sampler This can be done by pressing the corresponding Track buttons in the Record Megamode The SDS is accessed via the SDS picture key in the Editor MegaMode Accessing SDS SDS is accessed via the SDS picture key in the Editor MegaMode This will cause display of the SDS Menu in the Pad The rotary encoders will bec
13. Recording Basics Overview Xstream lets you record on multiple tracks at the same time using the standard Play Record transport buttons to punch in It will punch in from Play or Stop and can punch out with gapless monitoring of playback There are two recording modes New and Tape Mode The choice is made with a soft key in the Arm Menu In New Mode each time a track enters record a new clip is created on that track If there is already a clip present the new one goes on top of the previous one The upper clip is always heard on playback In Tape Mode existing audio can be destructively replaced See the section on Tape Mode below To record on a track it must be armed Before being armed a track must have a source or patched input Patching Inputs Before you can record on a track it needs an audio source called an Input This could be a physical input or an internal path in the system such as a Bus element or an insert send The next section Patch Inputs to Tracks explains patching in detail Here we will just get something patched and move on to recording Display the Patch I O screen by doing one of the following e Press Mode and then Patch e Click the Patch icon in the toolbar Patch Button 04 27 00 0 O5 _6122 e Select Mixer Patching The Mixer Screen shows a Patching dialog We are going to patch connect a physical input to the track where it will be recorded Page 53
14. Tail im e A Click to load a custom preset Capture i Click to type a new name for a Fj Shape custom preset then click Save To save a custom preset Step 1 Set up the fade shapes you want to save Step 2 Press the preset soft key Step 3 Press save preset Step 4 Type a name for the new custom preset and press the Enter key Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display as shown above Capturing Shapes To capture a fade means to extract all of its parameters making them available to apply to other clips Step 1 Click the capture button This will cause it to flash Step 2 Click the Clip Head Or Tail button to capture the fade length and shape from the current clip The current clip is the one currently touching the play head on the active track Having captured those values you can apply them to any other red clip by clicking the Clip button Untick shape or length if you don t want to apply it Cross Fades If a fade is placed on a clip and there is another clip layered underneath a cross fade between the two will automatically be induced Cross fade parameters can be modified with the soft key menu functions Induced crossfades are complementary that is to say the clip underneath is faded with exactly the opposite shape to the clip on top If the clip underneath already has its own fade overlapping the time of the upper clip s crossfade then no induced fade occurs In the fol
15. target field it will then look something like this C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Dream II exe 3D If you are using the Xstream X button to start the system you need to edit the file C Program Files Fairlight Xstream Layouts Dream _ II layout txt The first line should become APPLICATION app Fairlight Dream II Dream II exe 3D If you are using a Decklink card you will also need to add the PRO2 to the startup string Hiding and Showing the Video Track To hide or show the video track on the Edit Screen use the menu commands View Show Pyxis Track gt Show and View gt Show Pyxis Track Hide Page 259 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Video Track Display Offset When using a monitor with an inbuilt display such as an LCD or plasma screen the picture may be one or two frames late at play speed You can adjust for this using the General Preferences dialog To access this click Setup at the top of the Edit Screen then click General Preferences then Playback jene Preferences Scrolers Audiobase Playback Capture Display Options Display Mode Original aspect Ratio Display Mode Pysis Pro Original Size Use Two Monitors if Available E Bumt in Timecode 4 BITC Transparent Avid OMF View Both Fields Small View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Large View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Pyxis Pro PAL NTSC Jog 2 Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either
16. Other scroller preferences e Scrollers as outline you can display the scroller waveform in solid or outline format e Scrollers on full screen video you can choose to have the scroller display present when full screen video has been chosen This is useful for moving the timeline e Scrollers follows current track the scroller automatically chooses the most recently selected track for display Note the Video Scroller is described in the chapter called Pyxis Track Hold down Record to display special commands on the soft keys The Spacebar on the QWERTY keyboard can also be used to toggle the transport between Play and Stop while the Track Display is in focus click anywhere on the Track display to give it focus Jog Commands Jog is a mode where the transport moves as you turn the Jog Wheel Both video and audio move along in sync Page 44 CHANNELS January 22 2013 To enter Jog mode do any of the following e Press the Jog key e Click the Jog button above the Edit Screen _ 4 Holding the BLUE key while jogging increases the jog speed by five times Loop Jog Loop Jog is a unique transport mode where jogging becomes a playspeed loop which is moved backwards and forwards It s great for detecting pitch changes in music sibilance in speech or other changes in tone To toggle this on and off hold down the Jog key and press the Loop Jog soft key to choose Loop On or Off Other options in this menu
17. Step 1 Press the Auto Safe button Step 2 Use the In and out soft keys to set the timecode range that you wish to automate Step 3 Toggle the Safety Zone soft key on When the Safety Zone is on the mixer receives no timecode outside the selected range This means it cannot read or write automation But inside the selected range automation functions work normally Recording Mix Data Mix Events Mix data is recorded as discrete events Each event occurs at a specific timecode location and relates to a specific mix item When a new mix is started there are no events recorded and all controls will remain Static as the project is played Once mix data is recorded it is played back or read when the transport runs past the timecode at which the event is recorded If the transport is located to any point in the project the mixer state will reflect the result of all the events that have occurred from the start of the project to the current timecode The static snapshot recorded with every mix preserves the basic setup and balance of the mix Dynamic move events are added to this to create the final complete mix Entering Automation Record There are four ways to enter automation record e Press the auto key below any fader Enabled parameters on the channel are put into record Pressing the auto button on the XCS Panel puts the current channel into record e Use Touch mode and move any fader pot or switch on your Fader panel or the XCS Panel T
18. The names are shown at left as vca opto and mod Immediately after creation the names would be shown as 1 and3 hese ean be replaced with useful names here PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 BEGIN_ SEGMENT RANGE 0 6667 1 00000 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX mod POSTFIXONLY BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 saturation BEGIN _PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 air lt eeTFeFeFee BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 000000 1 000000 SCALE 10000 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX Toggle text map BEGIN _SEGMENT RANGE 0 000000 0 499900 Three control SCALE 1 000000 tales al OFFSET 0 000000 ividing the tota range 0 to 1 by 2 POSTFIX off POSTFIXONLY These can be BEGIN_SEGMENT T with ihe RANGE 0 500000 1 000000 useful names here though it is probably easier to do it in the Plug in Editor SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX on POS TFIXONLY Plug ins in the ILP To control plug ins in the ILP press the Plug in button The controls for the currently selected plug in will arrange themselves on the knobs as shown on the ILP screen In future versions there will be controls for building Plug in layouts in the ILP Clip based Plug ins Plug ins may be separately applied to individual clips The sound is written into new media on the hard disk and a new clip is placed on top of the original To do this Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Wave key Press
19. e Mutes Solos Track Arms Channel Selects note Channel Select will arm a track if the Arm or ADR menu is current e Channel names the first 4 characters to be displayed on the controller e Buttons on the controller can be mapped to Dream II functions Setup Install HUI device Your HUI device will come with its own installer cables and instructions Follow these and make sure the HUI device is working correctly INI File The file C Program Files Fairlight FMC FMC ini must contain the line HUI Where n is the number of faders on the HUI device default 8 Just doing this will result in faders mutes pans solos and selects from your HUI device working correctly on the Xstream system That is to say they will act and will also tally the changes MIDI Devices For HUI to work the Xstream system must know which MIDI devices to expect These are written into the file HUISetup txt which is normally found here C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data Open the HUISetup txt file It already contains the necessary setup for three HUI devices a Roland Edirol interface a MOTU Microlite 4 port MIDI interface and a Tranzport controller this is for wireless control of basic functions only If you want to make life easy for yourself buy an Edirol or a MOTU Microlite and just enable it by removing the hashes in front of the lines in HUISetup The following procedure assumes you have some other kind of HUI controller Your task
20. fs05 E See Sr des yr Auto Preview Preview Audition File name Cybernetic wav WAV waw MP3 mp3 AIF aif Page 144 GROUPING January 22 2013 Grouping Introduction Grouping is a fast and convenient method of controlling more than one signal path from a single fader or parameter control There are two types of groups Link Groups and Edit Groups Link groups are designed for controlling groups of feeds in multichannel formats Link groups simplify many tasks associated with working in surround formats and share many of the operational features of surround format buses Link groups can include up to eight members The simplest link group has two members and fulfils the function of a stereo channel Fader Groups are similar to other VCA or DCA grouping schemes and allow a master fader to control a group of signal paths Fader Groups can include any number of members Summary of Groups Type Member Type Master Fader Selection to Stem Structure Fold on Channel Panel Creation Link Group Live Feed or Link Group Select Master Yes Yes Track Feed Master level equal to first member Fader Group Live Feed or Fader Group Fader Group No No Track Feed Master menu key and soft Speaker Set key Link Groups Link groups allow the control of up to eight feeds with one fader They can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both Link groups can be created in any standard multichannel format or without a
21. Origin Time This is the timecode where the first bar starts To set it locate to the timecode of the first bar and click the button labeled Set 1 1 1 You may move the transport earlier than the first bar which is negative bar territory Note there is no zero bar the number goes from 1 straight to 1 Snap Snap editing is used when dragging clips with the mouse You may set the snap points to any musical interval in the bar To switch snapping on click Edit Snap Editing Note that several types of snap may operate at the same time e g clip and beat This can lead to conflicts if two snap points are in close proximity BPM from Range The system will calculate accurate tempos based on fitting to a range To do this mark the In and Out points of the range using the From and To keys Now enter the number of bars that should fit in the range and click the button labelled BPM from Range Audio Scrollers Audio Scrollers give you an optional close up waveform view of one or two tracks that can be useful for editing or mixing Page 42 CHANNELS January 22 2013 e m AN cati e ioe D i iie Le a a q aD i e dios JE o is Jime e a O e io h ee ae he w ihes Hi CE L dium a E re a a wm O E E C h ome dioe k z oO o a 8 8 8 8 8 ana Oo o em amme l o hanao Wii poi i di Taaa Uian ka OOO mne BHA a as a aaa DH e WH oa ia Haa m z
22. Repeated pressing toggles this display on and off Plug in Zoom By default the plug in graphic is shown at full size in the Pad This often means it is shrunk making it difficult to read values To zoom in ona particular section of the plug in graphic hold down the zoom button and make a marquee rectangle by clicking and dragging the mouse on the ORIGINAL graphic display in the Edit Screen not the one in the Pad A red dotted line shows on the graphic while you are making this marquee Alternatively hold down the ctrl and Zoom buttons while making your marquee This will cause the selected area to display in 1 1 zoom which sometimes makes it easier to read If the selected area is smaller than the Pad black is shown around it If larger than the Pad it is cropped at the bottom and right to fit To toggle between zoomed and full views of the plug in graphic press the upper 5th soft key next to Macro This is labeled Zoom if visible but this won t be the case when a graphic is shown in the Pad Zoomed views can be stored with each page of the plug in fleximap See Plug in Editor below for details Plug in Editor The Plug in Editor is used to place plug in parameters on the Pad controls set the control type and rename the controls if required To access the Plug in Editor Step 1 Load a plug in Step 2 Press the Plug in button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode At this point the Pad controls should display parameters f
23. The Clip When audio is recorded or imported into Xstream it is displayed as a clip The clip is a reference to the audio data stored on disk Clips can be cut copied or moved without affecting the original audio data Page 32 CHANNELS January 22 2013 When new clips are recorded or pasted above existing clips the clips become layered one above the other Normally only the top clip is seen and heard during play back DREAM II now allows all layers to be seen simultaneously Display Layering To do this e Hold Mode then double press the button e Click the button in the Toolbar Layering button Select gt from the Menu Bar While Display Layering is on you can drag clips from one layer to another using the mouse The left end of the clip is known as the head The right end is the tail Clips also contain information about the original timecode location of the audio data when recorded and the current timecode location of the displayed clip If a clip shows only a portion of the associated audio data on disk it may be trimmed to show more This picture combines a non layered view top and the same clips with layers shown below Page 33 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Each view has its advantages Add Clip You can create a new clip in a few ways e Recording into the system see the chapter Recording page 53 e Importing clips from other projects see page 114 e Directly adding a clip To directly a
24. The parameter is immediately assigned and you may test that the control works WARNING Don t touch any other controls or the parameter will be moved to them The name assigned to the control will be the same as the one shown on the tile Note these names are Supplied by the plug in manufacturer and do not always match what you see in the graphics display You can change the displayed name later as shown below Setting Control Type Once a parameter is assigned to a control you may choose the control type By default controls are assigned as Linear even if they have previously been assigned as Toggles or Multi Switches To set the control type click on one of the Control Type buttons below The Multi Switch buttons are labelled Switch 3 Switch 4 etc up to Switch 10 Dialog When you choose Toggle the system displays dialog where the toggle display names can be set By default these are shown as xx You may replace them by e Typing new names Page 235 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 e Clicking the Learn button to try automatically naming them e Clicking the Off On button to set the values to off and on What happens when you press the Learn button Xstream sends an off value to the plug in then an on value It waits to see if the plug in sends return messages If this happens the messages may contain useful toggle names but it is not mandatory in the VST specification for this to be provided and many manufactu
25. application are a good starting point Patching a Rewire Application Once your Rewire Application is launched it s time to patch Rewire inputs to track or live feeds Step 1 Open the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch I O key on the channel panel Step 2 Click on Instrument Inputs located on the left hand side of the Patch I O page You see inputs labeled according to the Rewire applications you have installed If you have installed more than one application click Page Down on the patch I O page until you find the input for your Rewire application Page 242 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Step 3 Select the desired instrument input e g If using Reason select the inputs labeled Mix L and Mix R for a stereo mix Step 4 Select Track Live or other patch destinations located on the lower right hand side of the Patch I O page Step 5 Select destinations to patch in the upper right and click the Patch button to complete the patch Click on Patch to complete Select instrument Select live inputs Tga MN ER a os hag GELEE i ephe mpri Hri neie You should now be able to hear a stereo signal generated by your Rewire application on Live feeds 1 and 2 Alternatively you can patch instrument inputs to track feeds but make sure the track is record enabled in order to hear your Rewire device see the chapter Recording on page 53 Page 243 MONITORS January 22 2013 M
26. faders Auto buttons Enter the Mix Menu Press the Preview Trim soft key The faders of the selected channels will snap to 10 dB Move the faders playing if desired to establish the amount of trim you want Press the Commit P Trim soft key To escape with no change press the Cancel P Trim soft key Live Preview This is a quick way of getting signal paths in and out of Preview status When Preview is toggled ON and this Live Preview is toggled ON selecting any signal path puts it into Preview Read to Preview Pressing this soft key while signal paths are in Preview status will load the current Read value of enabled parameters into the control fader or pot It can then be used to fill range glide range or as the basis for starting an automation pass Clipboard to Preview This is a way of copying automation data from any point to any other The clipboard is loaded in the Path Copy menu by pressing the copy soft key Then in the Preview menu pressing the Clipboard to Preview softkey loads the copied value of enabled parameters into their controls fader pot or switch for all signal paths in Preview status From there it can be used to fill range glide range or as the basis for starting an automation pass Flood range This command is also in the Path Copy menu and is connected to the above After copying a channel s parameters to the clipboard you can flood fill them directly into the automation range for anot
27. i E E q Ea 3 3 eee ae oe D re att ON 4 ty Ae Pears Se iie 11 The 1 is ae A bt ie eS eS Ae pnt O UYS Lf i E ae A j gt z _ bU a a aaa TA i it A aM IB Ly l rt ame Rate Tiles A Tile shows basic information about the Feed it represents Bus tiles show only fader information Track Feed and Live Feed tiles display more information and provide control for a group of functions as shown below Page 171 MIXING January 22 2013 Dynamics In indicator only appears Click here to el when any dynamics present cycle the display ae Solo ON OFF between Pan EQ and Dyn Mute ON OFF Fader Control Click here to add this channel to the Multi Insert IN OUT Trim group the number goes red EQ IN OUT Called Channel One channel can be controlled in detail It is the Called channel In the picture above itis Track 6 To call a channel from the mixer screen simply click on its tile or operate any of the controls inside it You can also call a channel using the CALL menu Track Feed and Live Feed Channel Tiles Each Track and Live Feed is represented with the track name and fader level plus indicators for EQ dynamics insert solo solo defeat and mute The parameter window within each channel tile provides a condensed display of the current settings of the Channel Panel for EQ dynamics or pan Click in the window to cycle
28. no defaults no feed parameters are modified Page 147 Link Group Display GROUPING January 22 2013 If composed of Track Feeds a Link Group is shown in the Editing Screen like this bz xbx 3k TTEA bz x N Mjj Track 9 Track 1b Track 11 Track 12 bzwzbx 3k3 bewx MMijj Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Double click here to collapse or expand the linked tracks You can collapse linked tracks down to the width of one track by double clicking any of the linked tracks close to its left side Do the same thing to expand them In Xstream Track Link Groups are displayed with lines through the buttons as follows Destroying a Link Group Link groups are destroyed from the Link Group menu Step 1 Press the Setup Megamode button Step 2 Press the Link Gp button Unselected Link Groups Selected Link Groups Link Group is Current Path The feeds that currently belong to link groups are shown in yellow or brown Feeds available for selection are shown in dark blue Page 148 GROUPING January 22 2013 Step 3 Press the feed selection key of a feed belonging to a group Step 4 Select the unlink soft key NOTE You can also create and destroy Link Groups from the Tracks Menu under Link Tracks and UnLink Tracks respectively Note that this method does not offer the same flexibility as using the control surface Suspending a Track Link Group Track Link groups can be tempo
29. you must edit the Events txt file in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data User Xstream_ For example to liberate CID SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN add a hash in front of the line CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN EQUAL 1 decrement_fader_set like this CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN EQUAL 1 decrement_fader_set Then you can use CID SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN in your remap file or trigger a different scripted macro Page 327
30. 2 There are a total of 24 special channels available for bus balancing Instantiation Inserting a Plug in on a Track Method 1 via Plug in Config Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Select the track Press the Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode You might need to press it twice Press the Config soft key Press the Add Plug soft key The Plugin List appears showing all the plug ins installed in your system At the same time the Pad screen displays the first in the list Using the jog wheel scroll through the list of plug ins Alternatively you may use the mouse to select any plug in When the desired plug in is selected press the Add soft key or click the on screen Add button After some time the plug in will be loaded This may take a minute or so if the plug in is dongled Page 229 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Dream Tf v1 11 3 0 New Project8 lt 48 tracks gt 4 4 si z s a 6 4 2 4 i a a _ a A o A S 4 A 4 a E 10 1 A 4 4 z 4 a S i 5 gt a a gt 4 ai E A e STE 4 A 1 2 a 4 4 t d 1 4 4 4 a A a 4 i 4 d A 4 i 4 lt a a A 3 e s A A a a A A i a A A A 2 A A a R A A a x A a A a i J A gt a A 1 eye 4 6 7 3 9 0 WW aa r 8 14 1 J Z 3 4 4 EIDOS Ja Wert x gt 7 z k z ery rp in Spee ecoroed Audic Agi IODR Secorged AuIGIO i L 30t Secordeq Audic f O Di ecorded Audi
31. 2A Press the Audition soft key or click the Audition button in the Smart Pane While Audition is lit the highlighted WAV file in the list will play as a clip on the current track while everything else is frozen if necessary take M1 off line to prevent the video moving You can also press the Jog button and move the clip with the Jog Wheel This allows you to find a sync point Step 3A Press the paste soft key to paste the auditioning clip at its current position on the current track This allows you to find a relevant sync point and paste the clip accordingly Page 139 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 Notes e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e During Audition you can use the Jog wheel when the transport is not in jog or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list To start auditioning the new clip toggle Audition off then on again e To hide the AudioBase3 results list simply enter another mode e g Cut e Setup your AudioBase3 Server in Setup General Preferences Example http 192 168 1 100 AudioBase MFX search d2 php Where 192 168 2 100 is the IP Address of your MediaLink2 Server Dream IT v0 04 Search For fear Clip Name T283 Categol Type lal o User 1 fC User Sample Rate lal tt User 3 User search Results 617 Preview Description Auto crash car approac f
32. 5 240 ROVING uci 250 eater al ate wea hak aoe eels 240 MONI OP SO tisseiicemecaiicetscstaveuscnsicaveusatecess 244 Toggle Main and ALT Speakers sses 244 Choose Speakers ccsecscseeteesecsenreuseneneeueans 244 Configure Monitor Speaker Sets ssssessssens 245 Choose Monitor Speaker Outputs 0c0e08 246 Change Monitor Listening Format 246 Configure Monitor SOUICES ececeeeeeeeeeneees 247 ALT SWITCHES ctaxteusseiviacsbeveratetadseetwasae tates 247 The Monitor Megamode cccceceeeeeeeeeeaeees 248 METER S rran E 250 TEE OGUGTION arrarir aeaa a 250 Master Screen Me ters ccccccseseserseseerereeeees 250 Meter Sets anaoa ENN 253 PEAKS meroon renina EATEN 255 Stereo Compound Meters scsceseesesesenenees 256 Parameter S Ctup csescsssscersrsesesensesnseserenses 257 PYXIS TRAC K ven cdeescacestivces ecteiadcessecapbent 258 IN EFOGUGUIOIN verra aa 258 Creating a Pyxis TraCK cccccceeeeseceeeeeeeaeees 258 Adding a Second Pyxis Track cssceceeeeneees 259 Hiding and Showing the Video Track 259 Loading Video into Pyxis Track sceceeeeees 261 Capturing Video into Pyxis Track sessen 263 ERICH YOU OM sredina a 265 The PyxiS WINCOW cccecscsesteeecsentenseneneeas 266 Watermain cevessossrveeseenocesnessdeauswesdeuanseanes 270 Editing the Video Track cscsceceesecseeneenenes 271 Using Pyxis Track as a Machine 271 The Pan Theatre ccccsesscsestse
33. ALIX Click here to display Meter Set P instead of meter sets Metering History The Master Screen Meters keep a history of the ten loudest peaks for each meter with the timecode where each peak occurred The peaks camn be displayed in order of loudness Overshoots of up to 8 6 dB are shown although the audio is actually clamped to 0 dB at the channel output To display history click in the Peak or RMS level display for a meter Page 252 METERS January 22 2013 Click here to delete Site Meee 100 100 history and start again Also clears 100 100 100 peaks and displayed maximum values Click any one of these fields to Ta display or hide Peak or RMS history Peak History Main R O00 09 02 14 gt 2 4 dB 00 09 02 14 gt 2 1 dB 00 09 02 13 gt 1 7 dB OOO oe OUO9 es 12 00 08 59 13 gt 3 2 dB 00 08 53 07 gt 3 4 dB 00 08 54 20 gt 3 5 dB O00 09 01 11 gt 3 6 dB 00 08 49 2722 gt 3 6 dB Click on any timecode to locate there Meter Sets A meter set contains eight sources which cqn come from a combination of any signal paths in the system These can be displayed the Master Screen Meters There are 9 meter sets in the system There are two ways to choose sources for the Meter Sets Using the Master Screen Meters Step 1 Click Meter Sets and choose a meter set you can change your choice later Step 2 Click the Define button The system displays the Patch I
34. Ab GE A Ai GEN H o GR oB Dae HE m Cursor Normally the Cursor is stationary and the clips scroll across the tracks The audio you hear is the waveform passing the Cursor hence its name Play Head Moving Cursor Many products show stationary waveforms with a moving cursor To show this in Dream II select Setup Locked Playhead from the Edit Screen menu bar When this item is ticked the cursor is stationary but otherwise it moves While the cursor is moveable you can reposition it by right clicking anywhere in the Edit Screen and dragging the mouse right or left audio is not played while you do this or press the Jog command and use the Jog Wheel audio is scrubbed if the movement is less than four times play speed When re locking the cursor its current position is held This allows you to place it away from the middle of the screen which can be useful for seeing more of the incoming audio for example But if you want to get it exactly back to the center use the command Setup Reset Playhead Page 83 EDITING January 22 2013 Cut and Paste Whole Clip To cut and paste a clip Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor The clip is red because it is touching the cursor Step 2 Press the cut erase key so that Cut is selected Step 3 Press the cut clip key We see the clip s ghost It s a picture of the clipboard ready to be pasted in Step 4 Select another track and or move to
35. Clipstore open the Clip Search dialog in one of the following ways Press GoTo gt Clip Click View Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for each open Clipstores When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the selected Clipstores which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Group Clips can be auditioned and pasted as well This allows the possibility of collecting complex effects into the Clipstore and reusing them at any time Page 143 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 Preview from Windows Explorer Audio files can be previewed directly from Windows Explorer To do this click File gt Import Audio File s This allows you to open up a custom Explorer window allowing Preview Auto Preview click and hear and Audition of individual audio files on the Windows file path You can then either drag drop multiple files directly to the timeline select Paste to place the selected media at the playhead or select Import to place the media at the playhead and exit the dialog This is only available in Windows 7 Organize New folder ME Desktop j Name Title Contributing artists Alburn Jp Downloads Jan 2012 El Recent Places t adr waw t Cybernetic wav d SWISH O02 Bamboo f t SWISH 03 Bamboo Libraries Documents a Music E Pictures E Videos mM ef Homegroup jE Computer Local Disk C ca Media M E This Year
36. FF Jump GoTo Locate or right button drag with the mouse Any speed is OK though of course the data resolution will be very low if you go fast Even if you press Stop the system stays in write this allows you to adjust control values before moving forward again As soon as you move more than one frame backwards the system will switch to Read Preview The Preview state is console wide When it is on parameters cannot be in Write or Trim but only Preview Read and Isolate Its purpose is to free the faders and other controls from motor control and let you move them while finding a new balance Normally moving controls implies writing that data but Preview removes that restriction so you can play with the controls as much as you like and only write data when you are ready To free a particular mix item from motor control means putting it in Preview mode as follows Step 1 Make sure Mix is ON and Preview is ON Step 2 Enable the parameter Step 3 Put the mix item into Preview in one of these ways e Press the Auto button on its fader e Press the XCS Auto button puts the currently selected channel into Preview e Toggle Live Preview ON and select the channel on the XCS Parameters in preview can be moved freely while you get a balance Then they can be written into the automation data in a number of ways Punch In The Punch Menu provides commands for punching selected channels into and out of Write Trim When channels ar
37. Fairlight amp U Projects New Project9iMedia 0 an T EEE Name Size Type SFL Recorded Audio 13_a1 1GC84Z6BC43x wav 766KB WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 14 a 1GC8476BC43 74 way 766 KB WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 15 a3 1GC84766C45 77 way 766KB WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 16_a4 1GC8476BC43 way 766 KB Wa Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 17_a5 16C8476BC4370 way 766 KE WAV Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 16 a6 1GC84766C4571 Way 766 KB WAV Audio Qo o k isk free space 101 GB 4 48 ME F My Computer F The Media folder looks like this The WAV files are named as follows Clip Name _ Track number _ GUID wav The Clip name is the automatic name given to the clip by the system Or you may have named the clip while recording it The Track number is the one on which the audio was first recorded The GUID is a system number discussed below GUIDs Xstream Broadcast WAV Files are named using GUIDs A GUID is a unique ID that makes it easy for the system to locate files in a database Since GUIDs are hard to read Fairlight has created the Fairlight Shell Extension for Windows Explorer The Fairlight Shell extension is installed by default and allows users to view hidden iXML metadata in the Fairlight Broadcast WAV Files The Project Name Clip Name and Frame Rate are embedded in each WAV file by Xstream during recording and can be viewed with the Fairlight Shell Extension Using the Fairlight Windows Explorer
38. Follow Zoom Toggles follow zoom on and off When on the gear ratio of the jog wheel is affected by the zoom setting this is the default mode this setting affects how fast the Jog Wheel needs to be turned to achieve a particular transport speed Mouse Jogging The mouse can also be used to move the transport Simply right click anywhere and drag horizontally to move the transport Audio is heard while this takes place IF the transport is in Jog Mode i e Jog has been pressed Shuttle To shuttle the transport hold down the BLUE key and press Jog The jogger wheel will then increase and decrease the transport velocity in forward and reverse Press the FF Or REW keys to reverse the shuttle direction To shuttle at normal speed press pLay then hold down the BLUE key and press Joc The transport key LEDs reflect the current speed and direction For example if shuttling reaches play speed the play light comes on Looping Overview Looping means playing the same section over and over There will normally be a pause at the start of the loop while the system loads audio from the hard disk ready to play The loop uses a start and end timecode which can be set in a number of ways Looping can use a preroll and postroll See below for options Loop Commands To set Loop parameters visit the Edit Loop menu by holding down Mode and pressing Edit Loop The following soft keys will become available Page 45 CHANNELS
39. Grid shows all the current parameters of the EQ being changed Choosing a Parameter Click with the mouse in the cell you would like to change In Xstream this becomes available after you initially click in one of the Value Grid locations Changing a Parameter Value There are several ways to change the value of a parameter once chosen e Use the Jogger Wheel make sure the transport is not in Jog mode at that time e Use the and buttons in the Numeric Keypad e The Frequency and Gain values can directly be chosen and changed with the mouse by dragging the red dots in the graph area e While you are changing parameter values with the encoders the actual sound is updated after a short delay e There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have your low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want e When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ Applying the Changes To apply your changes click the Apply button or press Enter Only the bands whose Enable checkboxes are selected will be applied To escape without applying your changes press the edit soft key to deselect it Newor Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the NEW OLD soft key or
40. Integrated Gate 31 LKFS Scale EET The Compound meters are controlled by accessing Setup gt General Preferences Meters The compound meter contains 2 individual components a BarGraph and a Loudness meter The compound meters source can be selected as either the Control room source pre volume control or fixed to the main meter from the Source selection in the meter preferences The Width of the individual components is defined by the source and so if for example you have the control room selected as the source and change the monitoring source between a 5 1 main and a stereo sub bus the compound meter source and format will follow The Bargraph can be chosen from several scales Peak PPM BBC PPM DIN RMS The Bargraph can also be individually disabled if this component is not required The Loudness meter component offers BS1770 1 compliant loudness metering consisting of simultaneous momentary short term and infinite integration RLB2 weighted meters These meters are referenced to a target LKFS value and offer either a standard 18 9 LU scale or an optional 36 18 LU scale for material with a wider dynamic range e g long form Settings for the loudness component include RMS Window The length of the momentary sliding window in ms Target Reference in LKFS Short Window The length of the short term sliding window meter integration time in seconds Integrated Gate An optional Gate c
41. LIB 1 Cog Fairlight amp uU Projects New Projectl2 New Projectl BR LIB 1 Ed Multiple reels can be selected at the same time and linked to a single project Set up destination tracks If all tracks will be involved choose Track 1 as the destination Click the Reconform button If one of the linked projects is not found an error message will be displayed and the reconform will stop If there is no audio between the source In and Out times for an event an error message will be displayed but the reconform will continue with the following events Additional Facilities Selecting a reel in the Reel Linking dialog also selects all of the EDL events associated with that reel Clicking the A button in the Sort group causes the EDL events to be sorted according to the EDL event numbers Clicking the C button in the Sort group causes the EDL events to be sorted according to source reel Page 310 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Sync and Machine Control Introduction Xstream can communicate with industry standard Sony 9 pin serial controlled machines with a timecode reader installed providing control over external video or audio machines directly from the Xstream Xstream can control up to three machines M1 M2 and M3 Of these two can be physical VTRs and the third can be Linear Timecode or MIDI Timecode Setting up Machines To choose a machine type to be M1 M2 or M3 Step 1 Press the key plus M1 key
42. Levels Set output sor amp HDMI amp Y R Y B Y Set input S n ate a A ETa i For video and audio capture Use video setup in MTSO tf At 7 5 IRE for use in the USA At 0 0 IRE for use in Japan W Remove Field jitter when video is paused Select 4 4 4 on video output F Usea Gb s SDI for Single Link 4 4 4 Set black ref on video output in capture When not playing video send Black To all the video outputs Requires restarting your computer Set reference output timing E 0 Reference input nok detected cont _ It is critical that you select the appropriate Inputs for your system In the example we are intending to capture video from a Digital Betacam VTR via the Decklink Component inputs If you will be consistently using the same physical inputs for all video capture duties you should be able to set and forget this value Page 263 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Configure Dream Il Video Capture options With Dream II launched and a Project with Pyxis track open navigate to Setup gt General Preferences Video Capture This window configures the Dream II part of the video capture system General Preferences x Projects Scrollers Watermark Audio Plugins Options Audiobase Playback video Capture Device Deckiink Video Capture Capture Settings Standard Capture Size f20 4 5 6 6 bit 25 00 fos Input Source Re
43. Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the Clear Peak soft key You can also clear peaks using the Clear Max button on the Master Screen Meters Bie i Bim 0 too 100 100 100 Peak Hold Time Peak hold time can be set in the Meters Menu as follows Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the Peak Hold soft key repeatedly to choose Off Short Long or Permanent peak hold Overload Hold Time Overload hold time can be set in the Meters Menu as follows Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the Over Hold soft key Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel to change the overload hold time Page 255 METERS January 22 2013 Step 4 Press the Enter key or the Exit soft key Meter Point The Meter Point is the place in a channel where level is extracted for metering To move the meter point for all signal paths Step 1 Press the Meters button Step 2 Press the Mtr Pnt soft key repeatedly to move the meter point The meter point can be seen in the Fat Channel by the position of the meter graphic Stereo Compound Meters Fi PPh LEQ LU The system offers a new compound stereo meter including PPM and Loudness metering as well as Phase indication To enable it click Setup 3 Meters View Compound Stereo Meter Now you will see the new meters if you are using the new Xstream Mixer Screen Mixer Screen see above and on the ILP2 screen if you have one It will o
44. O page Page 253 METERS January 22 2013 Dnt Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Sub 1 M Sub 2 M Sub 3 M Sub 4 M Multi Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined Meter Meter Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined Track Track Track Live Live Aux Bus View Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Repro Send Direct Send Direct Send User set 1 set 2 set 3 set 4 set 5 set 6 Aux Bus Aux Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus CR Mon View Meter Meter Meter Dir Out Send Dir Out Dir System set 7 set 8 set 9 CR Mon Main Main Osc Analog Out Send Out Inputs Digital MADI Solo Instrument Inputs Inputs Out Inputs Step 3 Select the source type you want in the lower left section Step 4 Select one or more signal paths to patch to the meters If you wish to display Tracks or Live Feeds choose their Insert Send which always sends even if Insert is not switched on it s the Return that is affected by the switch Note the position of the insert in the channel which can be controlled on the Path Menu Choosing Direct Out is also possible but is subject to the Direct Out on off switch pre post Switch and level control Step 5 Select one or more individual meters to patch in the upper right of the screen Step 6 Click the Patch button This patches the sources to the selected meters and saves the Meter Set Whole Bus Patching Expandable If you patch a whole bus to the meters in one gesture it becomes resizable One gesture means
45. Page 293 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Load Last Project on Startup D Set the desired interval for Auto Save or turn it off Note When the time for an Auto Save arrives it will wait until the transport is stationary then take control of the system While saving it will prevent the transport from starting and mute all audio at the outputs This is necessary to prevent unwanted interaction with the automation system Undo Files Xstream allows unlimited UNDOs for audio editing It does this by storing a copy of the Edit list each time an edit is made The undo files are stored in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Undo Each time a project is opened the system starts writing undo files for it starting with a file called UndoFile_00 1 This file name does not contain the project for which it was created because the system is designed only to work with the currently open project file Immediately after reopening any file the UNDO command cannot be issued it only works on edits made in the current sessions If there is an UndoFile_00 1 already in the folder which there almost certainly is it will be replaced with this one This means that undo files from older projects are difficult to identify But if you have wrongly and very recently saved a project and you wish
46. Paths page BLAH The following describes a quicker way of patching a specific channel s Direct Output Step 1 Step 2 Step 4 Oscillator Hold down the Mode button and press the Direct Config button Select the path whose Direct output you wish to configure Press the Patch soft key Operation is the same as other patching except that the Direct Output of the path you selected is already active on the Patch Page see Patching Signal Paths page BLAH Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs The system oscillator has three channels Page 188 MIXING January 22 2013 e Tone e Noise switchable between White and Pink e Beeps used by the ADR program Each of the channels can be routed to a different point in the patching system The Tone and Noise outputs are both toggled on together while the Beeps are turned on and off independently by the ADR program The Tone and Noise channels use the same Level control see below The settings for Beeps are controlled by the ADR program To access these settings click on the menu item ADR ADR Preferences The system oscillator is controlled on its own layout in the Mixer Megamode To access this Step 1 Hold down the Mode button and press the Mixer button Step 2 Press the Osc Setup button The following functions become available Osc On Off Simply press the Osc On off button to
47. Record button is held down Page 59 RECORDING January 22 2013 These include record head record clip record here and record again These are explained in the next step Preroll and Postroll Many record menu commands use a Pre Roll and Pre Roll The length of these can be set in the ADR List the Edit Loop menu or the Sync Menu To do this in the ADR Menu hold down Mode then press apr and use the on screen dialog To do this in the Sync Menu hold down Mode then press Sync Setup then press the Pre Roll or Post Roll soft key and choose a number of seconds on the buttons that appear To do this in the Edit Loop menu hold down Mode then press Edit Loop then press the Pre Roll or Post Roll soft key and choose a number of seconds on the buttons that appear The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR ADR List Using the Record Menu Hold down the Record button to display the following soft keys head prerolls then punches in at the nearest clip head on the selected track clip prerolls then records the length of the nearest clip on the currently selected track here prerolls then punches in at the current position range prerolls punches in at From and out at To This command is shown only when there is a range again prerolls then repeats the last recording you made Punch Into Tracks Independently Overview Using the Play and Record button punches all armed tracks into and out of record What if you want to
48. Setup Menu and the sample rate is 44 100 it will pull down the sample rate to 44 056 if you feed in timecode at 29 97 If however you change the NTSC field to 29 97 Xstream will play at 44 100 at 29 97 frames per second and will pull up to a sample rate of 44 144 when timecode runs at 30 frames per second It is advisable to choose a sample rate at which you want to make the final transfer of the Project Then record your material at whichever frame rate is going to be used during that final transfer The importance of this choice is that you do not want to compromise the quality of your final product by using sample rate conversion at the moment it leaves Xstream for the last time You should make these choices at the very beginning of the Project and then you may use any other combination that suits your purposes temporarily during the recording and editing process Page 320 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 HUI Slave Mode Introduction HUI is a protocol invented by Mackie Corporation which allows different audio systems to control each other Many consoles and other devices now incorporate aspects of the HUI protocol and Xstream has implemented the full specification as a slave including the Universal Pro Extensions This allows the following functions to be controlled remotely e Transport states including Jog and Shuttle e Jog Frames i e the system can be jogged remotely e Fader levels bidirectional for motor control
49. Shell Extension 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Under the View menu select Details 3 Right click a column header eg Name and select More from the popup 4 Scroll down to the bottom of the list and add the desired iXML columns eg Project you wish to view 5 Click Ok Localize Localizing audio means putting the files in the same folder as the Project file Any audio which is referenced out of other folders is copied into the Media folder for the current Project file as new WAV files Once a project is localized it is much easier to move it to another system or back it up because all the media is in one place To localize files in a DR2 project select the Localize command from the Process Menu above the Editing screen The displayed dialog will ask whether you want to localize all files or just the selected ones Page 291 Selected Clips Only Handles in Seconds PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Head fio Tail f0 Handles Localizing only copies those sections of the original recordings that have been actually used in the project Anything that has been edited out will not be present To provide insurance for future editing you can save Handles on each piece of audio These are extra pieces of audio that can be exposed using the Trim menu It s advisable to use handles unless the edit is absolutely final Recovering Lost WAVs If a DR2 project has not been saved recen
50. The input meter shows the signal level at the input of the signal path If a track feed is selected the input fader level is shown The EQ display shows a graph of the equaliser response The dynamics display shows the composite transfer function of the entire dynamics section The display also includes gain reduction signal meters for all three sections If the dynamics are Switched IN the graph is highlighted if switched OUT the graph is dimmed The insert send and receive I O patching is displayed If the insert is switched IN the insert display is highlighted if switched OUT the display is dimmed The main fader level for the signal path is displayed with a numeric display of the fader gain This is an active control The direct out level pre post status and output patching is displayed If the direct out is Switched ON the direct out display is highlighted if switched OFF the display is dimmed The direct out level is shown with a horizontal bar If the direct out is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red Page 173 MIXING January 22 2013 e The Auxiliary bus display shows the status of each aux send The send level is shown with a horizontal bar If the send is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red e The pan display offers a sophisticated representation of the sig
51. Tk Tk 7 Tk 4 Tk 10 Tk 11 Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Filters l Plug ins Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Control Parameter Sub Pages Groups The five buttons at the lower right are used to choose the parameter group for the encoders The buttons at the lower left choose pages of controls for the parameter group Step 2 Press the Path button and observe changes in the encoder values and the page buttons at left Step 3 Press the Page 2 button and observe changes in the encoder values Step 4 Press the Pad button again to exit Momentary example Step 1 Following on from the previous routine Press and hold the Pad button The Pad enters Edit Mode again and the same display appears Step 2 Continue to hold Pad down and press EQ The changes are the reverse to the previous set Step 3 Release the Pad button NOTE While the Pad is in Edit Mode the upper fixed keys still select tracks Each time you select a track if it wasn t already selected it becomes the Current Track and its parameters appear in the pad To access tracks that are not currently shown in the Pad press the Bank button to move up in lots of 12 or 24 or hold down the Bank button and choose from the displayed buttons see below for more details Page 14 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 ALT TrackiS Tracl Track1i3 Track192 Each encoder controls two parameters the normal parameter and the ALT parameter To access the ALT para
52. Touch Snap Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the Touch button until Snap is illuminated Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Select signal paths see Select Signal Paths below Press Play to move transport Touch and move the control of any enabled mix item it enters record and starts writing automation Release the control it leaves record The mix items that will be recorded are only those you have touched and only while you were touching them Notes J Only enabled mix items can be written by this method See Touch Auto Enable below for a more powerful version Using Touch Latch This is the same as Touch Snap except once a control is touched it stays in record even after you release it Use Stop or other standard methods to exit all recording or press Auto to take the current signal path out of record Using Touch Auto Enable In this mode you enable parameters but not signal paths Touching the control of any enabled parameter will do it automatically Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Touch button until Snap or Latch is illuminated Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Press the Mix Menu button to open the Mix menu and toggle the Touch AutoEn button on Press Play to move transport Touch the control of any enabled parameter on any signal path It enters record and starts writing automation You can
53. a The same click and drag move can be used to arm or disarm multiple tracks but this time using horizontal dragging If the track has no input the system will display the error message No input patched to Track To fix this go to the Patch page as described above in Patching Inputs and give it an input Once a track is armed use the Play and Record keys to punch into record Play Stop REW FF or Jog to punch out Arm or Disarm All Tracks To disarm all tracks Hold down the Record button and press the Disarm al button Record Monitoring Overview When a track is armed you can choose whether to listen to its input signal its playback signal REPRO a switched combination or nothing Press Mode and then Arm to access recording functions The mon soft key will now toggle between Input and Auto settings For more settings select Setup gt Record Settings and select a radio button in the Monitor group The Monitor settings work as follows Input always monitors the input to the track Page 56 RECORDING January 22 2013 Auto monitors repro in Play or Jog otherwise input Record mutes the track when stopped otherwise as AUTO Mute mutes the track while in Record otherwise repro Repro always monitors recorded audio Tape Mode Overview When Tape Mode is selected you can punch in on existing Tape Mode clips and replace the audio media This can save filling up disks with
54. and named They can also be used in Jump and Go To commands as target locations Create New Mark To create a mark press the Mark button at any time Editor Megamode This will put a Mark at the current timecode position Placing of Marks can be undone using the Undo button or the Undo command in the Edit Menu It is also possible to remove the undoability of marks This is done by clicking Setup General Preferences Projects and unselecting Marks are undoable Edit Marks You can display all the Marks you have made and change their names and timecodes remove them and more There are two ways to display the list of Marks e Press the Go To button to display the Go To menu Then press the mark soft key e Choose View Marks Either way the list of marks appears over the Edit screen Page 47 CHANNELS January 22 2013 My new mark Another new mark No name needed mark 3 00 53 14 07 To select a Mark use the Jog Wheel the and buttons click with the mouse or type the index number on the Numpad To change the timecode stored in the mark press the Set Time soft key or click the Set Time screen button and type in a timecode then press Enter To rename the mark press the Rename soft key or click the Rename screen button and type in a name then press Enter To change the mark index click the Set Index screen button and type ina Index number then press Enter You can also press Enter to locate to the select
55. are always displayed on the Basic Edit Megamode Other Menus can be accessed by holding down the Mode button Soft Keys There are 10 soft keys They display functions related to the current Menu Some Menus have banks of soft keys which are accessed by other soft keys For example pressing the Paste Special button causes a row of pasting options to be displayed Soft keys may also change their function according to whether a Range is active or some other state Clip Head Tail Keys These keys execute the most basic functions of the current Menu For example when the current Menu is Erase they erase the Clip Head or Tail of the current selection The current selection is usually the clip s touching the cursor on the selected track s Selected clips are shown in red When a range is present the Clip key changes to a Range key executing the basic Menu command on all clips in the range Page 23 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 The Clip Head Tail keys display the name of the current Menu to remind you what will happen when they are pressed Sometimes the Clip Head Tail keys display a Jog icon This means that you can hold down that key and turn the Jog Wheel to influence your edit The edit is completed when you release the key For example pressing Cut Head and Jogging forward will move the head of the selected clip s forward in time to be pasted when you release Cut Head Clip Head Tail Menus Holding down C
56. around these three display options e EQ a graph displays the EQ transfer response Track 29 N e Dynamics a simplified transfer function for compressor limiter expander gate and the various combinations of these can be displayed Live 22 vE g Page 172 MIXING January 22 2013 e Pan a miniature display of the pan surround field with the red pan position is displayed The pan position changes in real time Track 5 5 Buses The fader levels of the Main sub and auxiliary buses are displayed Signal level meters for the Main bus are also displayed Fat Channel The Fat Channel provides a detailed display of the signal processing and routing for the called channel Its only control functions are the fader and the Pan dot while the other graphics are for display only Right Main clicking in the EQ DYN or PAN sections causes display of the Zoom panels See below The Fat Channel shows a detailed display of the parameters for the currently called signal path A signal path may be a mono live or track feed a bus or a multichannel surround format link group which can be selected and modified from a single set of controls The user and system names of the signal path are displayed at the top left The input box at the left of the signal path indicates the format or element name of the path and the user name and system name of the physical input from which it is patched
57. be affected Page 103 EDITING January 22 2013 Level Normalisation Clips can be normalised to the maximum possible level using the Normal Level Soft key in the Clip Level menu Clip Equalisation Xstream provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the system on a copy of the original media therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is independent of the track feed mixer EQ Note Clip EQ is a multi track operation Applying EQ Step 1 Press the clip EQ button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 Press the edit soft key Step 3 Press the edit soft key The Pad now displays an EQ graph for the clip and parameter values at the ends Use the Encoders to change the parameter values dtgh Fx ASLONGA TRACKS Track The 14th Track Track Track Track Track Stereo 1 POSS 13 Tra 15 16 1 18 19 Tks 1 2 Tks 3 4 Tk 5 Tk amp Tk 13 Tk i4 Tk 15 Tk 16 Tk i Tk 18 Tk 14 bay NMJj 0 0 dB 10000 hz Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Page 1 Page 2 Page Selection Clip EQ Parameters The four bands of EQ are displayed on two pages Use the Pad buttons to choose a page 0 0 dB 1000 0 hz 1 0 Normal view ALT view Page 104 EDITING January 22 2013 To gain access to the Shape parameter press or hold the ait button
58. category at upper right Click the Patch button To unpatch any connection select it in the upper right area and click Remove Noise Type Toggles between White and Pink Noise types for the noise channel Using XE 6 Faders Introduction The XE6 Fader Extender has 6 faders for individual feeds buses or groups You can use up to four of these units together on one Xynergi system to control up to 24 signal paths at the same time Installation of Xe6 faders is described in detail in the Xynergi Installation manual Xynergi Media Production Centre Quickstart pdf which is supplied with your system and found in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Docs This chapter assumes you have successfully installed and tested your XE 6 unit s Page 190 MIXING January 22 2013 Fader Controls OLED Soft Pot normally Left Right Pan Control but switchable to other functions Solo toggle Mute toggle AUTO button channel enters automation write trim preview CALL button brings channel to PAD Fader controls level or other choices Basic Operation Fader Each fader controls the channel volume level in a range from 90 dB to 10 dB To set the fader to exactly 0 dB hold down the BLUE button and touch the fader The current fader level can be read in the OLED display above more info about this below The motors work during automation playback to track the level data recorded for the
59. channel being controlled During automation recording the motors switch off allowing new movements to be recorded The touch sensor tells the NAME software that you have touched the fader The most common use is to put the fader into automation write when you move it Mute The Mute button is used to turn the channel on and off When the channel is muted it is equivalent to having the fader pulled right down and no signal passes from the channel to its send destination Page 191 MIXING January 22 2013 The Mute button always follows the fader See below how the fader can be reassigned to various functions in the channel in all cases the Mute button is reassigned to the same function Solo The Solo button has the general effect of isolating the soloed channel so it can be heard alone The OLED Display The OLED display at the top of the fader strip gives you a lot of information about the channel Steady State Under normal circumstances the OLED will show details of the channel being controlled by its associated fader The most common situation is shown below lt Pan Graph Pan Pot function lt _ Mute Icon Meter y lt Fader Icon lt 4 User Name lt 4 System Name Step 1 Hold down the Bank button Step 2 Press an F Set button from 1 to 11 Step 3 Release the Bank button Alternatively Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode by holding down Mode and pressing Mixer Step 2 Hold down the Fader Set but
60. clicking the and buttons next to the channel name Click to select next or previous channel Page 175 MIXING January 22 2013 Input Section DREAM IT 48 V and Mic Control Used for Fairlight Mic preamps Recording Section Available only when a track is the current channel Arm means ready to record press this button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Thru means the track will monitor its input but will not respond to a record command The Thru state makes the track equivalent to a Live Feed Press the Thru button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Rec Level controls the level going to the Disk before recording It does not affect the track when in Thru mode Trim controls the level as the channel enters the mixer For tracks this is after coming back from Disk and does not affect level being recorded Phase flips the audio phase at the input to the mixer It does not affect the signal being recorded on a track Direct Send and Insert irtual Channel Direct In toggles the Direct Output on and off Pre toggles the Direct Output pre and post the main channel fader Level controls the level going from the channel to the Direct Output Note Direct outputs are only heard if patched to a physical output or to the input of another path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Insert In controls the Insert Return only Whe
61. comes out of Write mode it remembers the values of all parameters that were enabled Now if you locate to any other time and press Join the system will immediately go back into Write with the remembered values set This is useful for setting a scene or section balance as follows Starting writing automation anywhere ina scene or section Adjust parameters until you are happy with the sound Now go back to the head of the scene and press Join then Play Jog Mix Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play As long as the transport moves forward the system will continue to write See more below Auto Curves Hold down this soft key and touch a parameter control to display its curve for the selected tracks Press and release to display the Curves menu See Automation Curves below for details Preview Menu Opens a menu with Preview commands See below for details Copy and Paste Mix The Copy Mix and Paste Mix soft keys are used for mix copying IT ALWAYS WORKS WITH A RA NGE Multiple channels source channels can be copied and multiple pasted destination channels Offsets may be used The rules are as follows e Only enabled parameters are pasted e The copied channels are pasted into the selected destination channels in numerical order For example if the source channels are 1 5 6 and the destination channels are 44 102 and 126 1 gt 44 5 102 6 gt 126 e If there are more destination ch
62. controller you assign will play the instrument live To hear the output of that instrument it must be patched to one or more Track or Live Feed inputs This is done on the Patch I O page in the normal way The output right side shows all the tracks you have converted to MIDI Choose the MIDI controller MIDI Device In to be recorded on each track Normally this is the same controller for all tracks which would be your MIDI keyboard Patch the track output to any instrument you have loaded Metronome To set up a metronome use Setup Bars and Beats Setup Page 2 6 MIDI TRACKS January 22 2013 Bars and Beats Setup x The metronome is created by the Oscillator To hear it use the Patch 1 0 page to patch the output of the Oscillator Noise channel to an open track or live feed Track 1 I Recording MIDI Clips Arm the MIDI track by clicking on the record button at the left of the screen Put it in record using the normal transport commands MIDI clips can be recorded on top of each other just like audio clips As usual the top layer is heard Fades and crossfades have no effect Page 277 MIDI TRACKS January 22 2013 00 00 47 21 OO 0042 00 OO 0043 00 MIDI clips show black and white notes at their relative pitches Editing MIDI Clips MIDI clips can be edited using the Cut Copy and Erase menus just like audio clips Head tail clip and range are all understood in the same way The Trim head a
63. disk recorder must move at the Same speed to remain in sync This translates into producing the correct number of samples every second which is called the Master Clock rate This can be locked to a Digital Word Clock a video signal an AES EBU signal by the internal crystal a timecode source or a digital audio source which is being recorded If the Position Reference and Motion References are not the same it is possible that they will drift apart over time This will be shown by a warning at the top of Xstream s video screen which indicates when an inconsistent timecode frame was encountered How Xstream Synchronises Xstream goes through a number of steps in achieving synchronization in play mode 1 Read the position reference and start loading up the corresponding audio on all active tracks 2 When ready start playing but with the outputs muted Use variable speed to reduce the error between the Xstream position and the Position Reference until it is very small 3 Switch to the Motion Reference for continued playback The system is said to be locked once this switch is made and the audio is unmuted 4 Warn of error status if the sync error increases if a reference signal is lost etc Page 319 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Synchronization Conflicts When you are recording a digital source it must be synchronised to the same Master Clock Reference as Xstream or an overflow too many samples or underflow too
64. double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press and release the cut clip button The clip is now on the clipboard Move the transport The clip s ghost shows where it can be pasted Press another track number The ghost moves to the new track Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents once or many times Now press cut head Or cut tail The front or back of the clip is now on the clipboard Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents Using Ranges Overview A range is the time span between two points called the IN and OUT points or the From and To points When a range is present the button labelled cut clip or copy clip erase clip etc changes to cut range copy range erase range In this situation the basic editing commands cut copy and erase target the parts of clips that lie inside the range Some other commands like Nudge Fade and Clip Level target only whole clips that lie inside the range Pressing the range button toggles the range on and off Operation Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button so that Cut is highlighted Press the range key to turn it OFF Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the
65. exterior shot is established Fader Groups VCAs There are 32 VCA style Fader groups on Xstream Members of a Fader Group have their fader levels controlled by a Master and can also be accessed individually to set relative levels within the group Control Faders in a group are controlled relatively by the Group Master fader To do this you must either e Add the Group Master to a fader set e CALL the Group Master then control it with the Pad Level control To call the Group Master click on its Name Plate on the Xstream Mixer Screen e Use the mouse directly on the Mixer Screen by moving the Group Master faders Page 151 GROUPING January 22 2013 Displaying Group Membership The Xstream Mixer Screen screen always displays VCA group membership as shown below Track Track Track Track Track Arack ack Track Track Track Track Track Track Track a s on 26 ae 20 ie 30 il 32 of a4 35 36 Assignment to Fader Groups Global Assignment Fader Group membership can be controlled globally using the Grouping Window To open this Press gt Click gt Page 152 GROUPING January 22 2013 _ se a dfigh L dfigh FX Stereo 1 L FX Stereo 1 R ASLONGASP TRACKB bewxbx 3k3 I L bevxbx 3k3 I c bzvxbx 3k3 I R bevxbx 3k3 bzvxbx 3k3 bzwxbx 3k3 I B Ungroup 1 1 Track 13 L Track 13 R Track 13 C Track 13 B Track 13 Ls Track 13 Rs Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Grp 7 Ungroup Track 25 Track 26 Tr
66. external source press the Source Config soft key Choose the external source you wish to define and the monitor set that will play it Control Room or Studio Monitor Choose Analog Inputs or Digital Inputs at the lower left Choose the inputs you want to use at the upper left and their destination Monitor Elements at the upper right Click Patch Click Rename to name the set Repeat as required Choose any other mode to exit Source Setup ALT Switches Overview The ALT switches in the Mon Megamode allow you to quickly change from standard settings to alternative ones The standard monitoring situation is Main speakers playing Main bus listening to all appropriate speakers You can choose an alternative speaker set an alternative source and or an alternative listening format This guide shows you how Get Ready Press the green Mon button Page 247 MONITORS January 22 2013 Details To toggle to an alternative set of speakers press Alt spkr This will toggle to the last non standard speaker set you used or the first defined set if you haven t used any yet Note you can also do this by pressing MUTE and DIM together To toggle to an alternative monitor source press Alt source This will toggle to the last non standard source you used or the first defined External Source set if you haven t used any yet To toggle to an alternative monitor format press Alt format This will toggle to the last non standar
67. few samples may occur at the input This causes a characteristic periodic form of digital distortion called a whisper A whisper sounds like a brief glassy or metallic buzz and occurs about once every few seconds depending how fast the samples are overflowing or underflowing The best solution to digital sync conflicts is to drive all digital devices from a single studio wide word clock signal Then all devices will have identical word rates so whispers never occur and digital interconnections may made with ease In this instance the sync HOUSE option is always used Pull Up and Pull Down The normal sample rates used by the digital audio industry are 32 000 44 056 44 100 48 000 and 96 000 samples per second The normal frame rates are 24 25 29 97 and 30 These last two may cause confusion when used together Xstream can alter its sample rates far enough to accommodate the small speed change caused by going from 30 to 29 97 frames per second and back again In other words if you slow down the frame rate from 30 to 29 97 Xstream can slow its internal sample rate to match This is called Pull up or Pull down depending in which direction you are taking the speed When you choose a frame rate you are telling Xstream what frame rate to expect To put it more accurately you are telling it the frame rate at which the chosen sample rate will be accurately reproduced For example if you tell Xstream that the NTSC frame rate is 30 in the
68. ght UiProjectsiNew Projectz MediaFL_ Reccord Test 6 al GLTOS0LYDLO_Dvway audio ight UiProjects New Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 5_a5 GLTOSDLYDOO Ciway audio OO000000_00000000_E9640 iQhtAU Projects Mew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 4 a4 GLTO9DLYDDO Boway audio O0000000 00000000 E9640 iQhkAW Projects New Project2 MediaiFlL_ Reccord Test 3 a3 GLTOSDLYDDO Giway audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 IQhtAW Projects Wew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 2_a GLTOSDLYDOO Bway audio OO000000_00000000_E9640 iQhtAUProjects Mew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 1 al GLTOSDLYDDO Fiway audio O0000000_ 00000000 E9640 iQhkAW Projects New Project2 MediaFlL_ Reccord Test 7_az GLTOSDLYDLO F way audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 iQhtAUW Projects Mew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 9 a4 GLTOSDLYDLO Haway audio OO000000_00000000_E9640 iQhtAWProjects Mew Project Media FL_ Reccord Test 6 a3 GLTO9DLYDLO Gaway audio OO000000 00000000 E9640 iQhkAW Projects New Project2 MediaFL Reccord Test 10_a5 GLTOSOLYDLO Jiway audio 00000000 00000000 E9640 Select one file then click on the commands at the bottom of the dialog as follows Reveal File Opens Windows Explorer at the folder containing the selected file Locate Moves the transport to the start time of the original recording Paste Here Creates a clip using this media at the current timecode position on the current Edit Track Refresh The display is updated to include the latest recordings to have b
69. guide you will see its general workings using the EQ control as an example Note Extensive mouse based control of signal processing is also available For details please see Screen Mix Controls on page 165 The Pad rotary controls are always available To choose what type of controls are active Press the Pad button FAIRLIGH I This key is used to display the selection bank for mix parameters in the Pad It can be used in latched or momentary style Page 163 MIXING January 22 2013 Latched example Step 1 Press and release the Pad button quickly The Pad enters Edit Mode and the following display Track Track Track Track Track Track 6 i g g 10 11 Tk amp appears Tk Tk 7 Tk 4 Tk 10 Tk 11 Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Filters Plug ins Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Control Parameter Sub Pages Groups The five buttons at the lower right are used to choose the parameter group for the encoders The buttons at the lower left choose pages of controls for the parameter group Step 2 Press the Path button and observe changes in the encoder values and the page buttons at left Step 3 Press the Page 2 button and observe changes in the encoder values Step 4 Press the Pad button again to exit Momentary example Step 1 Following on from the previous routine Press and hold the Pad button The Pad enters Edit Mode again and the same display appears Step 2 Continue to hold Pad down and press EQ The changes are t
70. has the same effect and creates a Parent Child relationship between the original MT Project and the saved version To break any such inter Project dependencies select Page 289 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Process Detach from the Dream II menus After detaching your MT Project you can select Process gt Stuff Fufs All Clips Or Process Stuff Fufs Selected Clips to consolidate all audio into Fufs associated with your current project If you are unsure of what file a clip is stored in you can find out by selecting view gt Clip Search from the Dream II menus You will see the filename associated with each clip in the list and you can click the Reveal File button to display a file in Windows Explorer Note that you can rearrange columns in the clip search window by dragging and dropping column headers You may need to scroll to the right to view all available clip search columns Always take great care not to delete files associated with your MT Project You may not be able to recover files once they have been deleted DR2 Projects DR2 Dream II projects are a new project format designed specifically for Dream II DR2 files are not backwardly compatible with older Fairlight products although they can be converted to MT projects with FUF files as described above The DR2 file format provides enhanced capabilities compared with the legacy MT file format and all future development will focus on the D
71. i e set using the view buttons not the Jog Wheel or mouse Pyxis Track Displaying Video Full details about Pyxis Track are given in the chapter Pyxis Track on page 258 Track Colours Each track has a colour that is shown at the left and which can be given to the clips on that track Selected clips are always shown red i e those touching the cursor or in a range on selected tracks Page 31 CHANNELS January 22 2013 00 03 58 20 00 02 4200 Y 0003 00 00 003032000 T 00 03 40 00 0004000 gf 00 0 wees a k b Selected o always ee ee p red Bl 3 3 ne CELEO ELL M elit N N Tracks show colour Clips normally show Clips can also be given tabs the track colour special colours To select track colours Step 1 Select tracks you want to colour Step 2 Use the menu Tracks Set Track Colour Tracks Add Pyxis Track Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Repame Track Click to choose a colour for all selected tracks Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Colour Arm Tracks Solo Tracks Click to display a mixer Mute Tracks for special colours Safe Tracks Select All Viewed Tracks 4 Custom Colour ee Enforce When you choose a track colour all clips on the track that currently have its old colour are given its new colour This applies to all clips for which you have never explicitly chosen a colour
72. key if not already on Press the Head key and hold it down the head is extended to show the full extent of the original recording Jog or play the transport you can listen to the audio and choose the right position Release the Head key the head is placed at your current position Limit to Trim When extending a clip the end of the recorded audio will be reached eventually After that it is not possible to extend the clip further Tail Same aS Head but the later part of the clip is trimmed Clip Trim clip changes both ends of the clip at once Its purpose is to preserve the length of the clip but access an earlier part of the recorded audio Not commonly used Range Ranges cannot be used with Trim Multiple Tracks Works as expected All the red clips will be trimmed to the same timecode point Soft Keys in Trim Mode Pressing the Trim Sync soft key creates a sync marker within the selected clip s at the cursor position This is shown as a yellow mark in the clip and can be used to visually locate an important moment To change the sync point press sync point atthe new location There is only one sync point per clip Trim Sync Trim Edit Options Trim is usually applied to a single clip or selections across tracks range IS not supported in Trim Mode Page 92 Slip EDITING January 22 2013 all layers is not supported in Trim Mode razor IS not supported in Trim Mode Slip sync Pressin
73. l Curve point Curve point Trim Head Clip Level Trim Tail poni point point Trim Points The Trim Head and Trim Tail points can be dragged horizontally to expose or hide more of the recorded media for the clip When you first click a Trim point the clip expands to its maximum possible extent in that direction i e shows all the media at that end of the original recording After you drag the mouse to the point you want and release it the clip is trimmed to that position Fade Points Dragging a Fade In or Fade Out point horizontally lengthens or shortens the fade at that end of the clip Fade Curve Points The Fade In Curve Point and the Fade Out Curve Point can be dragged vertically to change the X Level of the fade and horizontally to change the X Point of the fade Clip Level Point The Clip Level point can be dragged vertically to change the playback level of the clip The waveform of the clip will change to reflect this new level Double Clicks e Double click on Trim point extend to maximum e Double click on Fade point remove fade e Double click on Curve point make fade linear e Double click on Level point set Level to 0 dB Edit While Playing All Xstream edits can be performed while the transport is in play If the clip you are editing is actually being played at the time it will take a second or two to update and resume play Page 124 EDITING January 22 2013 To make editing easier while playing yo
74. ne Track 13 1 00 53 13222 00 53 14 1868 00 00 00 20 OOO00000_O0000000_656908E4_ F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicycle aif ne Trak i3 1 OO 5409 09 O00 5409 15 00 00 00 04 OoOO00000_O0000000_65B908E4_7F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp Track 13 1 00 54 10 02 O0 5410 14 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633F 24 bit 48000 Hz 47 Bicyde_10 Speec Track 13 1 00 54 12 13 00 54 13 13 00 00 01 00 OOOO0000_O0000000_65B908E4_7F 356340 24 bit 438000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Trak i3 1 00 54 13 2323 O0 541419 00 00 00 20 Oo000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 4 bi Step 4 This dialog displays every clip in the project You can filter it reduce the number of clips displayed in a number of ways The most important is to type in all or part of a name into the Search box as shown above This will hide all clips except those with names containing what you typed In the example shown above all the clips contain the letters bi Under Playhead Only Offline Clips Having chosen your clip press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the clip s start timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere Or you may double click on the name of any clip to locate to its position The Clip Search dialog has many other capabilities Please see the section starting page 140 Page 52 RECORDING January 22 2013
75. now is to find out the names of its MIDI ports and write them into the HUISetup file in the same way as the existing entries If this sounds too complicated get your Fairlight service provider to help it s a one time setup in most cases First you ll need to identify the MIDI devices attached to your system Connect your HUI controller via MIDI or USB To see a list of the MIDI devices seen by Dream II we ll use our debugging program Page 321 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 MSAT Start MSAT before starting FMC the Mixer program If Dream II is already running stop FMC as follows Step 1 Click on the Mixer screen to give it focus Step 2 Type ctr1 Shift Q Step 3 Type y to confirm closure of FMC Start MSAT using Start gt All Programs Fairlight gt FMC FMC Utils gt MSAT Shortly after starting it if FMC is running you ll see an error message about incompatible file versions which can be ignored x 6 Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtriviewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Now start FMC using Start gt All Programs gt Fairlight gt FMC gt FMC Early in the boot process FMC will report on the MIDI devices When you see it click the red Stop button in the upper left of the MSAT screen to freeze the display It will look something like this Comms is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt Physical Memory Available 705492K GDB 09 42 59 gt Mix Memory allocated 3906
76. one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Selected Clips to only export selected red clips always one file per clip regardless of selected Channels Check Selected Tracks Only to only export selected tracks Check Align to Video Frame Boundaries to align exported file s with the video frame edges Check Export Empty Tracks to export blank files for empty tracks if Multiple Mono files have been selected Then select the location you want the exported audio to go and hit OK Channels Allows you to select the format of the files being created by export Channels Single Multichannel File tall se Mono Files 1 per track Stereo files 1 per track pair no Mono Stereo Files automatically choose SRON Mix Tracks to a single Mono File ypo ag ad Mix Tracks to a single Stereo File ur goggas Tracks to Mono or Stereo sees 14291 Fre Single Multichannel File all selected tracks 1 Tracks Mono files 1 per track Creates a single mono media file for each track in the export i e all tracks or selected tracks depending whether the Selected Tracks Only checkbox is selected Stereo files 1 per track pair Page 304 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 For each pair of tracks in the export a single stereo media file is created Mono Stereo files automatically choose If a track is mono and contains no multi channel clips its contents will be exported as a stereo m
77. only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Press from A range is begun at that point Now Jog to the right The range is extended and the clip goes red inside it Press to The range is now fixed Jump From key The From and To keys Investigate cut range cut head cut tail use undo in between From and To Menu Now hold down the BLUE key Page 73 EDITING January 22 2013 The from button changes into the from gap button Press this and the range will expand to the left to reach the first moment of silence no clip in that direction Press it again to find the following gap in that direction Trimming clips Overview A clip is the visual representation of a real piece of recorded audio located on hard disk Editing a clip means changing which part of the recorded audio is played When cutting or erasing parts of a clip you are reducing the amount of accessed audio Trimming a clip also means changing which part is accessed but you can increase or decrease the length that is played This is done by relocating the clip s head and tail thereby exposing more or less of the stored audio Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation Press the trim button If the word slip is highlighted press it again so that trim is highlighted Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip a
78. or Bars and Beats Page 40 CHANNELS January 22 2013 For all timescale choices select view Timescale and choose one of the options View Display Layering Smart Pane i Pyxis Mix Panel Show Pyxis Track Multi Video Monitor Playback Video Source Edit Workspace Marks Sort Video Locators Tracks Clip Search Displayed Clip Information Orphaned Media TimeScale m f Hours MinfSec Frame Background Tasks Hours Min Sec Frame SubFrame Performance Hours MinfSec Frame SubFrame Samples Statistics Feet Frames 35 mm Transport Window Feet Frames 16 mm Timecode Display Hours Feet Frames 35 mm Hours Feet Frames 16 mm Bars and Beats Bar Beat display Positions can be displayed in bars and beats To enable this use the Edit Screen menus and click View gt Timescale gt Bars and Beats The Edit Screen shows dark bar lines and light beat lines To set up parameters go to Setup gt Bars and Beats Setup This displays a dialog with the following parameters Page 41 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Tempo Time r Origin kime 00 00 00 00 Set 1 1 1 Snap to fine Number Bars 1 BPM From Range Tempo Expressed as beats per minute The box on the right allows you to choose the beat value used in specifying the tempo In some cases you may wish to specify beats differently from the time signature Time This is the time signature expressed in the usual way
79. played by the clip The Audio Clip has properties that you can change by editing Audio Clip 1 U0 Name Head trim Fade in Fade in Fade out Fade out Tail trim Curve Point Point Curve e Head Trim the first audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Fade Curves the shape of the Fade In and Fade Out e Clip Level a single level value for the clip e Clip EQ a four band parametric equaliser for each clip Page 71 EDITING January 22 2013 e Also clip Name Colour Grouping Multi channel format etc Other Clip Types Video Clips Video clips are much the same as audio clips but have fewer editable properties e Head Trim the first audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Also clip Name The properties above can be edited by the same methods as audio clips and at the same time For these edits selecting a video track makes its clips i
80. position of the Play Head Project The file created by Fairlight software containing the stored audio and its editing and mixing instructions Physical Input Output An analog or digital audio input or output Track Feed A signal path channel feeding to or from the disk recorder which can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring Live Feed A signal path channel fed from a live real time signal that has been brought from a physical input and can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring Page 2 INTRODUCTION January 22 2013 Bus Destination of a mixing operation Feeds are usually routed to buses via a multiformat surround panner Buses may be configured with various multichannel formats such as stereo LCRS or 5 1 Multitrack buses provide bus paths for summing feeds to be recorded to disk or other I O Bus Element One component signal of a bus e g left right centre or surround Bus elements are automatically allocated to individual buses as they are created Each system has a finite number of bus elements which will limit the format of buses as they are created A full sized Xstream has 72 available bus elements allowing for example 1 X 5 1 main bus 4 x 5 1 sub buses 2 X 5 1 auxes 12 X stereo auxes and 3 multi track buses Anything Missing If you find there s some aspect of Xstream that is not explained or Xplained adequately please let us know You can email me andrew fairli
81. puts the ADR system in Record mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points recording a take then cycle through again for playback Click the Stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport controls Note When the ADR is in Record mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a recording Cycle Playing Back a cue Step 1 Turn off the Rec Playback or Rehearse button if on or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is PLAYBACK This puts the ADR system in Playback mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once playing back the audio Note When the ADR is in Playback mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a playback Cycle Page 68 ADR January 22 2013 Pre Record Pre Record allows you to enter record a little earlier than the time of the cue This is useful when recording artists that tend to anticipate the entrance The streamer will still indicate the cue in time but you are able to capture the audio a little earlier Early In Early In can be clicked during the preroll of a record cycle It causes recording to start immediately There is also an early in Soft key Rec Out If desired the system can ignore the Out tim
82. s recycle bin is taking up To clean up the recycle bins there is a button on the dialog called Empty Recycle Bins This can be used when you are sure you do not need any media from them anymore The new recycle bins are located on each media device under the FairlightAU folder Location Free Space MB Recycle Bin Space Fairlight For Networked Rac SUSIE Di Dream IT Audia Rw 101791 MB 0 ME Yes 2500 Local Up E Dream II Video RW 165770 MB Ves 2500 Local Cr Windows Forma Both RW 28688 MB Mo 2500 Local T Windows Forma Both RW 334316 MB Mo 2500 Shared Find SubFolders Set Device Info View CD Drives Defaut Project Device Audio _O a3 Rescan Devices Empty Recycle Bins Page 298 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Note the same thing can be achieved using Process Discard Unused Media with one difference this will remove unused media from UNDO files as well so UNDO is not possible afterwards This is great for recording sessions with a lot of useless takes because only the ones used in the project survive Recovering Lost Media Orphaned Media When you UNDO a recording or erase all its resulting clips the media is still stored on the hard disk you just don t have a clip in the project referencing it You can of course find it in the Windows system and drag it back into the project but there is an easier way Note this can only be used dur
83. that only one clip per track is created by recording you can start by making a Tape which is a Tape Mode that is ready to overwrite Page 57 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 5A RECORDING January 22 2013 Press the Record NEW Tape soft key in the Arm menu Use the From and To keys to make a range that represents the length of the Tape you want to make Arm the tracks where you want to put a Tape Mode clip Press the Setup Tape soft key Now you have two choices Blank Tape will make a blank zero waveform Tape Mode clip on each armed track filling the range Render Tape will make a single Tape Mode clip on each armed track copying all the audio that is already in the range on the armed tracks Afterwards you can replace any parts that are not correct by recording over them Both Blank Tape and Render Tape run quite fast about 10 seconds for each hour of track time depending on computer and hard disk speed The advantage of using them is that you do not need to record sequentially you can move around anywhere in the Tape and replace the parts you are ready to work on Add Recording Handle Overview A Handle is an extra piece of audio at the beginning of a recording The system automatically adds this piece just as if you entered recording earlier This can be very useful when trying to capture performances as it gives you extra time to react Press Mode and then Arm to access recording fu
84. the arrow to scroll the Mixer Screen by 24 places left or right Toggle the Auto Scroll button on if you wish the Mixer Screen to always display the Current Channel Oscillator Setup Oscillator Setup is used to toggle the Oscillator on off set its level and frequency and access its patching to signal paths Press the Oscillator Setup button to display this small layout Freg Level Patch 1000 20 dB OSC Page 27 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 The Frequency and Level buttons will cause the Numpad to display when pressed You can type in the required number then press Freqency or Level again to accept the new value and exit To exit the Oscillator Setup layout press Oscillator Setup again Fader Set Button The Fader Set button allows you to choose which Fader Set to display on your faders It also includes a Map button which begins mapping on the currently chosen fader set Automate The Automate layout is only useful when Mix On is toggled on At this time the Automate layout gives you all the active controls needed to automate your mix Parameter Auto Setup All Read Soft keys Paratn Auto Target copy paste write jog auta puie Enab Setup Audio mix mix i ee recall mix curves menu Punch Preview YE Menu Punch AUTO Path p m Menu mix Order AUTO ait Common Mix Mix A ix Auto toggle Modes Prime Parameter Enable Parameter Enable opens a layout where you select which parameters are rea
85. these buses are controlled from each channel and can be sent pre post fader also pre post mute Auxes can take any bus format Multi Track MT MT buses were created to allow traditional multi track tape bussing There can be up to 24 of them and their format is either mono or off This guide shows you how to set formats for your buses Note The total number of bus elements is finite Setting Bus Formats In Reduction Mode a Sub Bus has its own fader on each channel These are controlled using Faders To see Faders To later in this chapter Sub Bus faders may be set pre or post the Main channel fader using Bus Params see Bus Params later in this chapter All reduction faders default to OdB in post fader mode they offset Reduction fader levels from Main levels Use the Bus Format Dialog to set all Bus Formats including Bus Reduction as explained below The Bus Format Dialog To display the Bus Format Dialog press Mode Bus Format Alternatively click Mixer gt Bus Format in the menus above the Edit Screen Page 157 Sub3 Sub4 Aux1 Aux Aux Aux4 MIXING January 22 2013 User Name orm Width Reduce Sub 1 Sub 2 Sub 3 Sub 4 Aux 1 Aux 2 Aum 3 Aux 4 PI 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 3 The Bus Format dialog lists only buses with non zero format i e buses in use You can add a Sub Bus or Aux bus by clicking in the Add group or by selecting an existing bus and clicking Duplicat
86. touch a control and put it into record before or after pressing play The rest is the same as the normal Touch modes Page 202 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Enabling Mix Items Typically mix items are recorded a few at a time often only one To put a mix item into automation record we must first enable it then put it into write or trim this is just like arming tracks before recording audio on to them Enabling mix items requires enabling their parameters and their signal paths as outlined below Enable Parameters Using the XCS Param Enable Layout Parameters can be enabled by pressing the blue Param Enable key and selecting one or more parameters Some of the parameters have red triangle in the button That means they control more than one parameter For example the EQ 1 button controls the following e Band 1 Gain e Band 1 Frequency e Band 1 Q factor e Band 1 Shape e Band 1 Range e Band 1 Gain e Band 1 In Out To toggle the enables for all these controls simply press and release the button To access the controls individually hold down the button and select from the individual parameters that appear in the top row LF FE Pan Pan Spread Div Rotate Bus Mute Direct Assign Pan group partially Hold down buttons with red enabled triangles to display individual parameter enables Pan In Out Press Exit to leave the Param Enable layout Using the ILP2 Enable Button You can enable any parameter by h
87. tracks Xfade can work on clips that are not touching as long as there is sufficient media to extend across the Good name Imd 0419 gap Good name IMa_0419 Xfade preserves clip coverage In the above example the selected red clip remains underneath the unselected clip Mantes ng Good name Good name IMG 0419 Page 101 EDITING January 22 2013 The yellow highlighter will not expand beyond the available media for the clip The two clips below therefore have different widths of yellow highlighting In this case the resulting crossfades would also be different Good name 1 _0 19 Good name Its 0419 Xfade can shorten clips as well as lengthening them as shown below Good name IMG 0419 Good name IMG 0419 Fade Options Layers On all layers is not supported in Fade Mode Razor razor is not supported in Fade Mode Soft Edit Every clip has a small fade at the head or tail to make it sound smoother This is called a Soft Edit and you can control its length To do this click the Setup Menu on the Track screen and select General Preferences In the dialog that is displayed click the Playback tab Page 102 EDITING January 22 2013 Step 1 Click the Setup Menu on the Track screen Step 2 Select General Preferences Step 3 Click the Playback tab Step 4 Change the value for Soft Edits The current value for Soft edits is shown in the Audio Options group A value of 72 samples i
88. unwanted material and results in a cleaner simpler project with fewer clips Press Mode and then Arm to access recording functions Press the Record soft key so that Tape is displayed You can also select Tape Mode by selecting Process Tape Mode gt Tape Mode Using Tape Mode If you punch into record over existing Tape Mode clips shown yellow the audio media will be replaced as you record If you continue to record past the end of the clip it will be extended If you punch into record in empty track space or over an Edit Mode clip shown red or blue the system will create a new Tape Mode clip Note if you extend beyond the end of a clip you may be overwriting media that has been trimmed from the end of the clip This is illustrated below Before clip exposes only part of the original media Recording reaches the end of the clip and continues clip is extended and now the hidden media is being replaced This media might be used by other clips in which case their sound will change To prevent this you can use Replace Mode This is a variation where the system will not punch in until it is playing over a clip and will punch out automatically when it reaches the end of that clip This ensures that you cannot overwrite any media that is not exposed nor can you create a new clip by punching in too early To select Replace Mode select Process gt Tape Mode Replace Mode Creating Tapes If you would like to ensure
89. where you were This is skilful because it requires two hands but it s fast Latching means Press a key to enter latch a mode do some things in that mode then press the original key again to exit the mode This is not as fast but it s easier being one handed When we refer to momentary operation you ll see words like hold down and release Page 1 INTRODUCTION January 22 2013 When we refer to latched operation you ll see the word press Or type which both mean press and release Some Important Terms Throughout this manual we will use some terms that you need to understand Transport This refers to the movement of the system along the timeline For example when we put the transport into Play it means we cause forward movement along the timeline This applies to the disk audio tracks Pyxis Track if enabled the timecode generator if enabled and any machines that are being controlled by the system Transport commands include Play Stop Record Jog Rewind Shuttle and FF The timeline is shown at the top of the Edit Screen 133 134135 130 lar 13 A29 140 14 142 143 144 140 141 142 143 144 145 1 4147 145 149 4150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 g4 H000 16 i eaa HOD 1 g4 H001 0h Play Head The line in the center of the Edit Screen is called the Play Head This is the current point where the system plays audio and video It is also the point where most edits occur The timecode display shows the
90. you have the option of using one of three modes for key assignment which are Single Split and Layer On the SDS layouts there is a Softkey that cycles through Single Split and Layer Single Mode In this mode the first Grabbed sound will be assigned to the Assign Root Key and subsequent Grabs will add sounds to the next highest white key This provides predictability of where Samples will appear on the keyboard The set the Assign Root key see Load Grab above Split Mode If Split is selected the keyboard will automatically be divided into equal splits based on the number of Samples in the Patch and the size of keyboard as defined by the Keyboard Left and Keyboard Right parameters in Setup gt General Preferences SDS As more Samples are added the split points will be updated automatically Each sample is played at its grabbed pitch in the center of its split This is normally its original pitch but it may have been grabbed at a different pitch by holding down a keyboard note while grabbing Layer Mode If the Mode is set to Layer each Sample will have the entire keyboard and will play simultaneously when a key is pressed AHDSR and Modulation Both a Patch and its Samples have AHDSR envelope and filter parameters The Samples use their own individual AHDSR envelope and filter and the Patch values are global offsets to all the Sample settings Modulation is Sample based with controls for Tremelo and Vibrato Patch
91. your choice of The current project Attached Library projects for information about libraries see Import on Page 114 Your project Bin described in the next section Your Clipstores described in the next section You can filter the display in the following ways Clip Bins Type a sequence into the Search field The display will show only clips whose names contain the sequence Select the Under Playhead check box The display will show only clips touching the cursor This can be extremely useful for working with multiple takes for example Select the Only Offline Clips check box This can be useful for finding missing clips by seeing which files they were originally referencing Every project now has a Clip Bin This is a place to store clips not being used at the moment They are copied directly to the Project Bin using Clip Copy Clips to Bin Page 142 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 OR Clip Cut Clips to Bin The command will target the currently selected clip s If a Range is present only wholly included clips will be copied To access them open the Clip Search dialog in one of the following ways Press GoTo gt Clip Click View Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for Bins When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the Bin which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Note the Bin can only be seen by the project from which it was
92. 00 Shared Yes o000000 619719412 2500 Shared Yes O000000 Dream II Convert to Media device Set Device Info View CD Drives Default Project Device C ED Page 295 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Click here for folder display g0000002_00000000_E3240276_7E110000 OK YY cancel To use a network connected device first create a mapped network drive or folder in Windows Explorer This can now be selected in the device panel and converted to a Xstream Media Device as above Please note that audio and video files can only be played from a designated Media Device If you try to play files from any other disk you will receive an error message Creating New Projects Once Media Devices have been set up on your Xstream system for Audio and Video you are ready to create a New Project To do this Press the Project key on your Xstream controller followed by the New softkey or select File New from the Xstream pulldown menu You will see the following dialog D FairlightAU Projects Will appear in tite bar Choose a Project Type MT or DR2 By default your project is created in its own subfolder named with the Project Name This is the recommended practice as it helps keep your Xstream system organized If you prefer you can place your projects elsewhere as long as you select a designated Media Device If you enter a comment
93. 10 mormonok mhas eo GiH pii ie ee i H OOO dem 8A CH 1 HS oa e aBa om me t 11 z an Lo g z Le Pism 13 Le isim 14 Le sm 15 Le s m 16 j They effectively provide an extra zoom range to use on tracks of particular interest while the rest of the screen gives more contextual information To enable Scrollers use Setup gt General Preferences Scrollers Page 43 CHANNELS January 22 2013 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback VideoCaptue Projects scrollers Audio Plugins Tracks that have scrollers Scroller Settings Video Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 6 Track 9 Track 10 IY Scrollers as Outline Scrollers on full screen video Scroller follows current track Select the tracks you wish to see Only two tracks may be displayed You can also select tracks for scrollers by holding down Shift and pressing Zoom you can now release Shift and toggle scrollers on or off with the track keys You can only select a track if less than two are already on the screen While audio scrollers are displayed you can e Click at any point to locate to that position e Click and drag the scroller to move the transport e Zoom the scroller by floating the mouse above it and turning the mouse wheel Alternatively hold down the shift and Zoom keys then turn the Jog Wheel or press and buttons
94. 12 26 Paste OO 0034 20 1a04i4 Paste OO 00 31 19 13 04 35 200 2 13 04 29 00 00 25 07 0000 27 0g LOS 22 Recordclips Close Recordclips OO 00 24 03 13 03 19 Recordclips 00 00 03 01 13 02 49 January 22 2013 The Undo List shows a mixture of audio events automation data events and combined audio data events The Undo menu shows a list of undoable events with some detail about the type of event This will help you choose which event s you want to undo Red events are ones that you have already undone and can be redone The Time column shows the time of day that the event occurred You can undo to any point in the list in the following ways Step 1 Double click the event with the mouse OR Step 1 Jog down to the event using the Jog Wheel Step 2 Press the ENTER button this also closes the Undo List You can locate to the PlayHead timecode of any event by selecting it and pressing the Locate softkey Undo Follow When you undo or redo an event the system can help by restoring the conditions under which you first made the change This may include optionally the transport location Zoom level track selection and track display which tracks are displayed Each of these options is available in the Setup gt General Preferences Projects dialog as shown below Page 119 EDITING January 22 2013 General Preferences ea Themes Options Audiobase Playback P
95. 2K GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC re sync GDB 09 43 00 gt Disabling UI Completed GDB 09 43 00 gt FaderCount 8 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 0 of 4 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 1 of 4 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 2 of 4 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 Page 322 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 3 of 4 name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 0 of 5 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GD
96. Auto Assign Step 3 Set the Assign Root to be the keyboard note where the first sample will be grabbed Step 4 Exit the dialog by clicking the Close box in the upper right corner Grabbing successive clips will place them at original pitch on a series of white keys You can also do the following e Grab arange of keys by making a range and pressing the grab soft key They will be assigned to the next available range of white notes Page 283 SAMPLING January 22 2013 e Grab aclip at a different pitch by previewing the note at your desired pitch Then hold down the keyboard note that plays that pitch and press the grab soft key Working with Audiobase Within Audiobase you can perform a search scroll the results and Preview them on the keyboard Just as with clips on the timeline if the SDS Preview is active the highlighted sound in the search results list will be active on the sampler for playing listening To load an AudioBase sound into the sampler press the Grab soft key For convenience there is a new SDS Preview key on the AudioBase Smart Pane and a Grab key on the AudioBase PAD layout The keyboard behaviour for Audiobase sounds works the same way as for clips Removing Samples You can remove any sample from the keyboard using the delete soft key To select a sample for deletion simply play it on the MIDI keyboard Keyboard Mapping By default SDS automatically assigns Samples to keys as they are Grabbed But
97. B 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 1 of 5 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 2 of 5 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 3 of 5 name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 4 of 5 name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 102 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 5 10 GDB 09 43 00 gt name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 A number of MIDI devices may be presented not necessarily with useful names this depends on the driver for the device At the end the line GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 tells you which MIDI device the system is using If this is clearly not your HUI device nothing is going to work In the example given it is possible to see that Microsoft GS Wavetable SW S
98. Bank Select All Tracks Choose Bank Choose Fader Set Onscreen Edit Tracks Bank Number Xstream calculates how many banks will be needed to display all the signal paths in the project Step 1 Hold down the Bank key Page 16 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Step 2 Press one of the Set Bank buttons Step 3 Release the Bank key View Tracks The Edit Screen can show few or many tracks with corresponding greater or less detail Press one of these buttons to control the number of tracks on screen Step 1 Hold down the Bank key Step 2 Press one of the View Track buttons Step 3 Release the Bank key Another way to control the number of tracks on screen is as follows Step 1 Hold down the Blue key Step 2 Hold down the Zoom key Step 3 Turn the Jog Wheel Step 4 Release the Zoom key and the Blue key the order doesn t matter and there is also a way to do it with the mouse Step 1 Hold down the ctrl button on the QWERTY keyboard Step 2 Turn the mouse wheel Step 3 Release the ctrl button Pyxis Track Toggles the video track display on and off the Edit Screen Before this can be done the video track must have been created See page BLAH for details Pyxis View Toggles display of the video picture at the right of the Edit Screen Pyxis Full The Sel Video The Macro This part of the software has not been completed The Bottom Row Keys The Bottom Row keys are fundamental to the operation of the system Learning them will
99. Bookmark not defined Set up Destination tracks for Conform The Destination tracks are those to which the audio will be copied to match the Rec Start time for the EDL events You need only specify the first destination track the software uses the following tracks to place audio for events requiring more tracks Click the Capture button The EDL Capture and Conform will now go ahead The software will request the first source reel to be loaded on to the source machine x 2 Please load reel ANIMAL L Is this reel loaded It will then capture all the audio needed from that reel optimizing to reduce the amount of shuttle time The software will then request the next reel and continue in this vein until the conform is complete Events that cannot be recorded are marked E Error Reasons for this can include Bad timecode causing lost sync before the end of a recording Tape machine not locating to the pre roll point The software will continue after errors of this type and complete as much of the conform as it can Reconform Reconform uses an existing project or more than one project as the source audio for a Conform There is no Capture process as the audio is already present on hard disk but otherwise the process is very similar to Conform Each reel in the EDL may be mapped to a different audio project Step 1 Set up Track Mapping as for Capture Commonly all tracks will be involved Page 309 S
100. CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 2 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 dynamic sat Dyn Satur CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 3 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_O1 air air CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 4 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_O1 air level air level CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 5 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 bass cut bass cut CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 7 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_O1 stereo CONTROL XP_MAIN 1 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 compression style style CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 8 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 complex complex CONTROL XP_MAIN 4 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 compression compression BEGIN_TEXTMAP BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 compression BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 001000 1 000000 SCALE 1000 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_O1 style BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 000000 0 333200 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POS TFIX vca POS TFIXONLY BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 3333 0 6666 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POS TFIX opto POS TFIXONLY Page 237 Header containing plug in name and pre amble Fadersets Each faderset is a page of Pad controls Each CONTROL statement must match the control name which includes the plug in name in the header This is a common source of errors Parameter display names are shown after the control names Text map This controls the display text in the Pad Multi Switch text map This is a 3 Switch Three control segments are shown dividing the total range 0 to 1 by 3
101. Clips The system displays a dialog where you can browse for a media file Page 117 EDITING January 22 2013 Choose new media file x Look in Media t My Recent Documents Deskto m My Documents sr May Computer My Network Places FL_ _al 4PHS6N 24 7 1M way FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4871N way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY24 7 LP way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4 710 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ447 1R wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ447 15 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY24 71T way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ447 Iy wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ487 LW way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4271_ way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ427 1t way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NVZ427 1Y way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4271Z way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NvZ42720 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B730 way File name Files of type o B FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5673F way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B736 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73H way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73I wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ52726 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY Z5272C way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ52720 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY Z5272F way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ52726 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6N Z5272H way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5472 wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6Nv Z5472K way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY Z5472L wav FL_ _al 4PHS68NVZ5472M way a FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5472N way FL_ A FL A FL A FL Ay FL A FL A FL A FL A FL A FL AN FL AN FL A FL A FL Ay FL E Step 3 x Pf Cancel Browse to find the media you want and click the Open but
102. Compensate for Blackmagic 2 47 NTSC Driver Bug E Display Video Underun Message Show Special Video Info Auto Fades microseconds No Media Soft Edits 1500 Media Offline Tape Mode 1500 Video Playback Advance Delay Compensation Frames Vga Video Window The control allows you to advance or retard playback by a number of frames While in stop or Jog the correct frame is output but in play the offset is activated You can have a separate setting for your Decklink output and your VGA output since they are likely to feed different monitors Page 260 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Loading Video into Pyxis Track There are two methods for loading video into Pyxis Track In both cases the video track must be visible on screen Importing a Video File Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click here to browse for the _ lt file you want to import Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Click File gt Import Video File The following dialog box is displayed A IVAVI_Bars_PAL_6 Bit avi Por t M JPEG A Quickt Uncompressed JDY25 Tideo Re a MiIpec Q MJPEG Quicktime y Rab to Y CbCr Conversion fe 3 The following file types can be imported using this method Quicktime mov Avi avi Windows media format wmv Mped4 files mp4 Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf dv25 dv or dif Bitmap bmp or Cineon cin sequence of images in sequentially num
103. DI port at the rear of the SX 20 sync box Putting Machines Online Machines stay in stop and are ignored by the Xstream system while offline To put a machine online do one of the following e Press the mi or m2 button on the Xstream Center section e Select one of the Online checkboxes on the Machine Control Smart Pane Config Name e Servo Ti B Offset 00 00 00 00 i 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 Editing with Machine Control All the transport controls and locating methods operate with a 9 pin remote machine online The following procedure is used to place new recordings or previously used clips to picture Press the M1 key to toggle the 9 pin machine on or off Xstream s transport will locate to the timecode from the 9 pin machine The system defaults to M1 controlling 9 pin Port A Placing Sound to Picture Step 1 With M1 online locate the video at the desired frame Step 2 Take M1 offline Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies on the sync point of the clip Step 4 CUT or copy the clip to the clipboard Step 5 Place M1 online the transport will relocate to the video at the desired frame Step 6 Press lt Enter gt to paste the clip Page 317 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Timecode Setup Introduction The Setup Menu is used to configure the Project s synchronisation setup Step 1 Press the Setup key or click View gt Smart Pane Sync Setup Step 2 The following dialog is d
104. E 00 46 21 14 O0 48 37 05 OO 03 17 14 O00 05 33 05 4 C Al BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 54 07 00 03 54 07 4 D A12 2 S3EP 33 OO 14 38 12 O0 16 55 12 O0 03 5407 0006 11 07 5 E A 34 CLOSE 0047242 0048 26 00 05 335 05 00 06 35 04 6 C Al SSEP 33 00 16 55 23 00 16 55 24 00 06 11 07 00 06 11 08 Fi E Al SEP 33 00 16 55 24 00 16 55 24 00 06 1108 00 06 11 08 Fi D A 34000 18 20 15 17 18 28 16 17 TAF AAS a4 eee Capture Settings Handle 12 fF Capture and Conform Preroll 2 SEC postal 7 se Sort 00 06 14 08 8 C l CLOSE 00 48 25 11 00 48 26 11 00 06 35 8 D 5 MAIN_RE 19 00 51 10 19 00 54 10 00 06 RY E Al SEP 1 O00 12 24 20 00 12 44 15 00 06 35 R 10 C Al S3eP 12 00 15 15 22 00 13 54 02 00 06 55 18 11 C Al SSEP 12 00 13 54 02 00 13 54 02 00 07 35 23 00 07 35 23 1i D Al 12 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 OO 07 35 23 00 07 36 10 1 C A 34 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O00 7 35 25 O00 7 35 25 12 D A 34 12 SEP 12 00 17 32 09 00 17 33 06 0007 35 23 00 07 36 20 13 C A 34 SSEP 12 00 17 33 06 00 17 33 06 00 07 36 20 O0 07 36 20 13 D A 34 25 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 07 36 20 0 07 37 20 14 C Al 5S3EP 11 00 07 30 20 00 09 30 24 00 08 35 24 00 10 36 03 15 C A12 SSEP 11 00 09 30 24 00 09 30 24 00 10 36 03 00 10 36 03 15 D Al 12 34000 18 25 13 11 18 28 16 17 00 10 36 03 00 10 39 09 Navigate to the file location of an EDL file and click the Open button Capture and Conform a
105. EMOVING CLICKS soesoscctteretssatsoceueetieeteheasadines 137 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH GEIPST ORES ciceicectscsedenwccsiccievestiaaciciest 138 PUGIO BASE aranna a 138 Cli Sear iisen i 140 CID BAS iere watncawesaendauabnewcae as 142 CMD SON CS maue ene teas eaeneias 143 Preview from Windows Explorer cscseee 144 GROUPING 0 ccssscssnsennssnenssennsesensenenes 145 TATE OGUGH OM ise atest teas Yes ars vnteteia E vous eeesbet 145 Summary Of GrOUDS cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeenens 145 EN AK GOUS rierren tines tuetandGaanielcentieaves 145 Fader Groups VCAS cccecsceeeeseeseeeeeseseeaees 151 Naning aGhOUD ara ae a tein 154 MEI U i aiun a osdie panantatranias 154 MIXING ensia a 156 MiroducHON eiie caledaatiavisnis aa 156 DUSSIN isenana a a a 156 Signal Processing Using the Pad 163 MIMI Re arinena aaa 165 Screen Mix ControlS cccsececeeeeeeseeeeereeseeers 166 ZOOM PANEIS arin 180 Processing Order the Path Order Menu 186 Pat CODY anaana AS 187 NISC EUS caus ladens se aneedsurs cdncn Ween sebiawndauesadens tei 187 Direct OURO UNS seautbscoceausiccene ug aeeadeteceeieaaales 188 OSCINAUOM a ssacsdauchesasananiencan tera rsusveacnaansanceeaes 188 Using XE 6 FaderS ccccscseeesseeesnesseneneaees 190 TENG HD A Venea a NA 196 AUTOMATION cccccccsssenssseesseeenenennens 199 TEP OCUICH ON wivivcseseseccazsotastsersiaadedsecssiantecons 199 Automation BASICS ccccsceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenaeee
106. ES File name Jestrean ede Pr Savt type Dream Hide Fol Dream 2 DR2 Fairlight MT MT Fairlight MT Mf3 MT If you save a project into the MT format it will load and play on QDC systems If you save a project into the MT MFX3 format it will load and play on MFX3 systems MT Projects The MT Project format is designed for backward compatibility with Fairlight QDC systems running software version 19 2 11 or higher Xstream can also open MT files created on older Fairlight systems dating back to MFX3 systems running rev 15 x software If you are planning to swap projects with QDC systems always use the MT format when creating new projects Recording Files FUFs When using the MT project format on a Xstream system new audio recordings are stored in FUF files FUF stands for Fairlight Universal Format and a FUF file acts as an audio container with many individual audio files bundled inside it FUFs are saved as soon as the recording is complete At this point the audio media is written to disk but it is still not safe The clip s that appear in the edit screen immediately after recording are the ONLY reference to the recorded material They are stored in the Project MT file and until that file is saved the audio is not secure FUFs can only grow to a maximum 4GB to maintain QDC compatibility and new FUF files are generated automatically as required FUFs ar
107. Edit selection i e tracks selected while Edit menus were active not Mix selection This is because the curves are displayed on the Edit screen Display Toggles the curves display on and off for the selected tracks Edit Allows editing of the curve information Pressing it accesses the Event and Delete soft keys Event displays all the automation data points so you can select and move them with the mouse Delete removes all selected automation data points Target Accesses the pull down menu where you can choose the parameter to be displayed on curves for the selected tracks Clear Hides the curves on selected tracks Data Storage All the mix data of the current mix is stored in system memory This data must be explicitly saved to disk as a named mix If a new project is loaded the previous mix data is retained in memory and may be saved as a mix in the new project Mix Thinning Xstream offers a Mix thinning algorithm that ignores identical static mix data This is especially useful for large amounts of mix data as it can largely reduce the actual number of mix events When automation is written there can be events that are nothing more than a block of static information e g nothing more than an in and out point with no dynamic information in between These neutral events can nonetheless add up to a lot of data With Mix Thinning turned on multiple identical events of this nature are only identified once therefore creati
108. F 346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 O1 08 14 11 01 08 1425 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 01 09 14217 0109 15 01 O0 00 00 12 OOOO0O000_OO000000_656908E4_ F 346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Traki2 1 O1 10 1414 01 10 15 02 00 00 00 12 O0000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 O1 12 1415 O1 11 15 04 00 00 00 12 Ooooo000_OO000000_65B908E4_7F346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 01 121416 O11215 05 O0 00 00 12 OOOO0000_DO000000_656908E4_ F 346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Trak i3 1i 00 52 09 0656 00 52 09 10 00 00 00 04 OoO00000_O0000000_65B908E4 7F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp Track 13 1 00 52 10 00 OO52 10 12 o0 00700 12 OOOOO000_O0000000_65B908E4_7F35633F 24 bit 48000 Hz 47 Bicyde_10 Speec Track 13 1 00 52 12 10 00 52 13 1110 00 00 01 00 OOO00000_00000000_656908E4_7F 356340 24 bit 48000 Hz i 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Trak i3 1 00 52 13 2720 O0 52 1416 00 00 00 20 Oo000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 13 1 O07 53 09 07 00 53 09 11 00 00 00 04 OOOOO000_O0000000_656906E4_7F35633E 24 bit 48000 Hz 25 Bird Pigeon Flapp Trak i3 i 00 53 10 01 00 53 10 13 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633F 24 bit 48000 Hz 47 Bicyde_10 Speec Trak i3 i OO 53 12 11 O00 53 13 11 00 00 01 00 Ooooo000_O0000000_65B908E4_7F356340 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif
109. FAIRLIGHT XSTREAM Operator Reference Manual 22 January 2013 Software Version 4 0 Issue 001 Important Notice COPYRIGHT The material in this document is copyright to Fairlight AU Pty Ltd and may not be quoted or reproduced in any form without written permission from the company Fairlight is a trademark of Fairlight AU Pty Ltd All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners LIMITED WARRANTY POLICY All the software and hardware provided with or purchased especially for Fairlight products has been tested for functionality Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will make its best efforts to correct reported defects for future releases subject to technical practicalities Fairlight AU will also replace any defective media on which software has been delivered provided that the item to be replaced is returned to the dealer who Supported the product within 90 days of purchase Fairlight AU Pty Ltd makes no warranty or representation either expressed or implied with respect to the system s performance or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Fairlight AU Pty Ltd be liable for direct or indirect damages arising from any defect in the product or its documentation Further Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will not accept any liability for any programs sounds audio recording or sequences stored in or used with Fairlight products including the cost of recovery of such data Product features and specifications are subject to change
110. I TRACKS January 22 2013 Quantizes the selected note s to the current Click to toggle the track display between the Piano Roll and normal tracks Click one of these three buttons to set the mouse click action It can be used to select clicked notes add a note where you click or delete notes where you click Set the current Note Value used by Add Note Duration and Quantise note value Shows These commands advanced act on the selected quantize note s They set options duration to the current note value or add subtract the note value s duration To set the velocity of the selected note s move the slider to show the required value then click Set To Trim the velocity of the selected note s move the slider to show a positive or negative value then click Trim To Trim the pitch of the selected note s move the slider to show a positive or negative value then click Trim Control how many octaves are shown on To change the MIDI channel of the selected note s move the piano the slider to show a channel Toggle the number then metronome click Set on and off Set a playback loop and start it Only MIDI events are played not audio Notes can be added To do this click the Select button in the Left Click group then click a note value from the array Now move the mouse cursor into the piano roll and you ll see the note length Click to create a n
111. Inverts the audio phase of selected clips Allows the selected clips to be renamed Syncs the selected clips to their record timecode Reverses the audio in the clips Positions the Sync point in the clip Can be used for Jumping Page 133 EDITING January 22 2013 Edit Settings Menu Range I Controls Range On Off and sets head and tail of range All Layers Controls the number of layers affected by edits Turns Razor edit on and off Range Selection i Toggles range selection type between inclusive and exclusive Snap Editing Turns Snap Editing On or Off snap To La Defines where clips snap to when mouse editing Jump To Defines Jump destination points for speedy project navigation Fade Menu Fades can be applied to clips using the binnacle keys as described in the Chapter on Fades on p 139 It is also possible to apply fades using the Fades Menu This is located at the top of your Dream II window and looks like this Fades Auto Fade Uses Playback head location on a clip to guess desired fade Fade Head Fades to head of Clip s Fade Tail Fades to tail of Clip s Make Overlap Makes a one second overlap by pulling out the head and tail of butted clips Page 134 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING January 22 2013 Time Domain Processing Introduction Xstream provides powerful Time Compression and Expansion via Serato s Pitch n Time FE Fairlight Edition and automated dialog alignment via Synchro Arts Vocalign Project Time Compr
112. January 22 2013 Pre Roll Used to set the system Preroll Press this soft key then choose a number of seconds to be the system Preroll Post Roll Used to set the system Postroll Press this soft key then choose a number of seconds to be the system Postroll Use Rolls If you toggle this option on the loop will add the system preroll and postroll to its start and end points Clip Uses the clip under the cursor on the current Edit Track to set loop start and end points and Starts looping around that Range Takes the current edit range which you have previously set using the From and To buttons and loops around it Note you can set the range while the Loop Menu is active Last Record Uses the start and end of the last transport recording to set the loop start and end points and loops around it Note The system Preroll and Postroll are used for all automatic recording functions including automation recording In the case of looping their use is optional controlled by the Use Rolls soft key Shortcuts The following shortcuts allow you to issue Loop commands without visiting the Edit Loop menu Hold down the BLUE key and press the Loop Range button that appears The transport will preroll and postroll the range if there is one otherwise nothing will happen Hold down the BLUE key and press the Loop Clip button that appears The transport will preroll and postroll the next clip on the currently selected track if there is one
113. Library file The clips continue to reference the same media files as they did in their original project Page 114 EDITING January 22 2013 Import Clips To import clips from another project do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Open the Import menu by holding Mode and pressing Import Choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens a file in import mode The file is Known as the current Library File This file is opened as read only so you cannot edit anything Move around the Import File and locate the clip s you want to import You can use a range or not and select one or more tracks The targeted clips will be red Press the Copy soft key This will copy the targeted clips to the clipboard and will re open your original file Locate to the position where you want to paste the copied clips and press ENTER The clips are pasted The system immediately goes back to the Import File allowing you to find and copy more clips It will continue to alternate between the Import File and your current project until you select another mode The clips will be sample rate converted on import if necessary to match your current project You can go back to a Library file at any time by clicking View gt Edit Workspace Filename The Import Menu can also be used to import mix automation This is described in the section called Import Auto
114. Once a WAV file has been found it may be auditioned and then imported into the current open Project Creating and Maintaining Databases Refer to the AudioBase3 User Guide for details on creating and maintaining clip databases Searching for Sounds AudioBase3 uses a simple search interface to find clips Step 1 Press the audio base key The search field becomes active Step 2 Enter the text you wish to find and click the search soft key or the on screen seach button All relevant database fields will be searched Use quotes to find whole phrases An AudioBase search can be stopped by pressing the search soft key again or by clicking the screen Search button again Page 138 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 Placing Sounds In A Project Dream II v0 0a35 Beta ali_48tk le lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File x Search For car Clip Name T283 Category 6004 Sample Rate 44100 Type Ja User 1 User 2 Clip Type fo Sample Rate Jal User 3 User 4 Track 0 Results 617 Preview Description Auto crash car approac from trac File Name T2_83 WAY File Type 2 emg description cipname a 43ACCL DCCL EXT from tra 43ACCL DCCL Ex a ACCL IN BY from track 1 in ACCL IN BY ACEL DECL EXT AU95127 f ACEL DECL EXT Aircraft carrier genera from T1 305 Aircraft carrier genera from T2 305 Alarm car car alarm go fro T118 Alarm car car alarm go fro T218 A
115. R2 file format Recording in DR2 When using the DR2 format new audio recordings are stored as industry standard Broadcast WAV Files Xstream Broadcast WAV Files are stored in the Media subfolder of the DR2 Project folder The WAV files are created when recording starts and they are refreshed at regular time intervals during recording When this happens all but the last part of the recording is safely on disk This means that audio recordings in DR2 format are quite secure even if the project file is lost or never saved the WAV files are viable stand alone containers for audio media References to them can easily be imported and re synchronised in a new project or in any other project This process is described below as Recovering Lost WAVs 101 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Back gt z Bi A Search gt Folder m Address D FairlightALiProjectsiNew Project 1 E co Folders File Folder 33 337 KE DR File etaxz003 _ etaxz004 C etaxz005 etax 006 C Fairlight El gt Fairlightau The picture above shows the typical file layout with a DR2 file The Media folder which is automatically created by the system contains the audio in the form of WAV files while the DR2 file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files Page 290 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 P 10 x View Favorites Tools Help ae gt Bi a Search E Folders J Di
116. RECORDING January 22 2013 Ensure Track Input is selected at the lower right then select a track number to be recorded in the upper right Y j yt Liser Click Analog Inputs Of Digital Inputs at the lower left of the screen Select any Input in the upper left of the screen Click Patch to connect the physical input to the track Exit Patching by selecting another menu or by right clicking the Patch I O display Note Patching is used for all system connections between paths Please see Patching Signal Paths on page Error Bookmark not defined for more details Arming Tracks Tracks can be armed in the following ways e Hold down Mode and press Arm or ADR then press a Track button e Hold down the Record button and press a Track button e Click the Arm button near a track number on the Edit screen The button should turn red Page 54 RECORDING January 22 2013 Click to Arm You can click one Arm button thus toggling it and then drag up or down to toggle others to the same value armed or disarmed without being careful to drag exactly over the buttons only vertical mouse position is taken into account Click then drag to arm multiple tracks The illustrated move will cause tracks 5 to 14 to be armed as long as they have patched inputs Page 55 Click to Arm RECORDING January 22 2013 e Click an Arm button on the Xstream Mixer Screen Track Track Track Track Track l 4
117. RES January 22 2013 e Paste found clips into the project e Locate to found clips e Pop change layers of clips within the project e Export clips Accessing Clip Search Clip Search can be accessed in the following ways Press GoTo gt Clip Click View gt Clip Search E a THS La 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 2 00 02 12 02 00 02 20 05 00 47 59 1858 00 48 26 19 00248 3422 00249236 14 00 15 37 0272 00347553 12 00348322 18 00 50 13 16 00 55 09 15 00 03 10 02 00 02 50 19 00 02 52 03 00 02 56702 0002 57 14 000k 0k02 00 04 17 16 00 04 12 06 00 02 20 23 000A 20l 00 48 09 18 00 48 35 15 00 48 43 18 006 4 00 16 07 15 00 48 11 17 00 49 14 12 00 51 05 10 007 55 2 7 06 00 03 16703 00 03 00 16 O0702 56702 00 03 05 10 00 03 11 09 00 04 17 16 00704525705 00204225211 00 00 08 00 00 08 21 00 00 10 00 00 00 08 2721 00 00 08 2721 00 00 10 00 00 00 30 12 00 00 18 05 00 00 51 18 00 00 51 18 00 00 17 16 00 00 06 00 00 00 09 2721 00 00 03 23 00 00 09 08 00 00 13 20 00 00 14 13 00 00 05 14 00 00 13 05 While the Clip Search dialog is open you can e Filter the list by typing a sequence of characters in the text box Only clip names containing that sequence will be displayed To quickly move the cursor into the Search field press the Search soft key e Sort the clips in track order start order end order or duration or clip colour by
118. SE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE e NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT Fairlight AU HAS INDE PENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS HAVE RELIED UPON Fairlight AU TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE e NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS e Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsys
119. Seed Name The Seedname Dialog Enter the seed name you would like use for the selected tracks Recorded Audio Starting Seed Number 1 Add Track name to head of dip name Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then Tab to or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it You can also choose the Add Track Name checkbox When this is selected the name of the track being recorded will be prepended to the clip name as well as the other items in the seed name Click ok or press Enter to finish You can do this while in Record Note If you give more than one track the same seed name at the same time their clips increment as a group preventing repeated names Clip Naming Each clip can be given a typed name For existing clips you select them and issue the clip name command You can also name clips while they are being recorded Press the name menu button in the Edit Basic Megamode or in the Mode display to display naming soft keys Select the track s where there are clips that you want to rename Press the name soft key To rename clips they must be touching the cursor or wholly inside the range In either case they will be coloured Red Press the clip soft key to display the name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then press ENTER or click ox to finish Recording Shortcuts the Record menu Overview The record menu gives you some recording shortcuts which appear when the
120. Select the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the call button Step 3 Press the Scroll Mixer soft key Solo Mute Arm Soloing muting or arming a succession of channels can be done quickly as follows Step 1 Click on the arm mute or solo button of the first channel Step 2 Drag the mouse to the right or left to toggle the other channels You do not need to do this accurately as the horizontal position is the only criterion for choosing Page 167 MIXING January 22 2013 Bus Meters Sub 1 2 Sub 3 CR hon The Bus Meter section shows all busses with non zero format see Bus Format on page 157 to learn about changing this As you add busses to your project the meters become thinner to accommodate them Page 168 MIXING Plug ins Single click bypasses pug gt Fe at ma Double click opens screen GUI FLOOR Right click opens plug in Config window Insert Single click toggles insert Aux Sends Double click opens Aux Zoom page Dynamics a Double click opens Dyn Zoom page Bus Assign Single click on Main or any Sub bus toggles assignment Solo Single click toggtes soto gt Channel Name Archive ADR gt Single click to select as current J Double click opens Virtual Channel Channel System Name Shows the number of the track live bus or group Link group numbering is shown Page 169 January 22 2013 Input Double click opens Patch I O EQ Single click toggles EQ in out Double click opens EQ Zo
121. Statistics Performance Background Tasks Page 266 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 This window is resizeable and can be made to go full screen with a double click on the window with your Left Mouse Button HANNNNNHHHNN 169 170 171172 173 174175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 Drag here to resize Pyxis window Click here to scroll video locators list Bistsme 8 usu eu F gt A H Os te tS Lg Video locators Video Locators While the Pyxis window is displayed you may click on an empty messy Ab any time This will capture the current video frame and display it with a timecode number resize Pyxis To locate to any video locator simply click it window To re order the locators drag and drop them with the mouse To delete a locator drag it far to the right and drop it when the delete icon is displayed Delete icon Video locators are also displayed in the Edit Marks list Locators list and can be edited there The Video Scroller The Video Scroller is a line of frames across the bottom of the screen centered at the current frame These frames cover the same width as the audio tracks Page 267 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 The Video Scroller is useful because you can see specific frames and scene changes coming it for easy location To Display the Video scroller hold down the Shift and Zoom buttons Now the track buttons select audio sc
122. XStl wertyetS FxStereo 1 FXMono TrackS Track6 ES CS ee Ge le ee a Stereo FX Je 0 0 IO j AN ye i 0 0 0 rreg 800 5 2 E Dynamics Equaliser Plug ins Aux Sends Pan 23 Track23 Track24 Track22 Track21 Track20 Track18 Track1 Track15 Tracki6 Tracki3 Tracki92 Track19 OF O00000 O00000 O ore Clip 4 k Z g Fixed Keys Cut Picture EERE E a HEAD TAIL Keys Jog Wheel Bottom Row Keys Page 11 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Fixed Keys Fixed keys have two main tasks Most of the time they function as track selection keys or soft keys whose function is shown immediately above or below them in the Pad screen area When the need arises they become QWERTY keys At this time they light up to show the printing on their surfaces Picture Keys The Picture Keys can change their appearance as well as their function This enables them to be used in a great number of different ways Key Layouts The Picture Keys and Fixed keys in some cases are arranged in Layouts Each Layout includes some or all of the available keys dictating their appearance and their function The factory software automatically loads and unloads layouts as part of the normal editing and mixing technique you do not need to think about it But if you want to make your own layouts Xstream is designed to allow it See the later chapter on layout
123. a specific channel s Insert Send and Return Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Hold down the Mode button and press the Insert Config button Select the path whose inserts you wish to configure To work on insert sends press the Sends Returns toggle so that the word Sends lights up For insert returns do the opposite To set up the physical I O for a send or return press the Patch soft key Operation is the same as other patching see Patching Signal Paths page BLAH Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs Plug ins are described in detail in the Chapter Plugins and Rewire page BLAH Direct Outputs Overview Most channels particularly Tracks and Live Feeds are assigned to buses where they are mixed with other channels A Direct Output is an additional feed of a channel signal path that can be patched anywhere you like in addition to its normal output to buses The Direct Output can be sent pre or post fader and may have its own independent level offset and mute Direct Output levels are controlled in the Path display Setting the Destination The Direct outputs in any channel are available in the general patching system You can reach the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch button in the Mixer Megamode by clicking on the Patch icon in the Edit Toolbar and several other ways Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal
124. ack 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 Track 33 Track 34 Track 35 Track 36 ALL Be Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Track 42 Track 43 Track 44 Track 45 Track 46 Track 47 Track 48 2 2 2 2 Track 49 Track 50 Track 51 Track 52 Track 53 Track 54 Track 55 Track 56 Track 57 Track 58 Track 59 Track 60 Track 61 Track 62 Track 63 Track 64 Track 65 Track 66 Track 67 Track 68 Track 69 Track 70 Track 71 Track 72 Track 73 Track 74 Track 75 Track 76 Track 77 Track 78 Track 79 Track 80 Track 81 Track 82 Track 83 Track 84 Track 85 Track 86 Track 87 Track 88 Track 89 Track 90 Track 91 Track 92 Track 93 Track 94 Track 95 Track 96 Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Rename 1 2 7 10 11 Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp 13 14 13 16 17 18 19 21 Grp Grp 27 al To use this window Step 1 Select a VCA group at the bottom of the window Step 2 Toggle signal paths in and out of the group Step 3 Use Page Up and Page Down to access more Tracks and Live Feeds Step 4 To close this display type SHIFT ctrl v again or esc or right click on the window Assignment from the Virtual Channel Membership of fader groups can also be controlled in the Virtual channel which is accessed by right clicking a channel tile in the Mixer screen Page 153 GROUPING January 22 2013 Click here to change the Fader Group of the called channel Zero means no Fader group membership Naming a Group Groups are named the same way a
125. ade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level Setting Fade Curve Parameters Click in the x Level or x Point field in the Smart Pane Use the Jog Wheel or Numeric Keypad to set values Press Enter to accept those values or Fade Hade Fade Tail to create a new fade using those values You can also use the Mouse click on the red dot in the Fade Curve and drag it up down to change X Level or left right to change X Point Drag red point to change X Level and X point 0070070 1 00 Quick Fade To create a Fade and set its curve quickly do the following Locate to the point where you want your Fade In to end Hold down Fade Head Turn the Jog Wheel until the Curve in the Smart Pane looks right Release Fade Head This method is not precise but it s very fast XFade New Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Crossfade method creates the overlap at the same time as the crossfade Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the cut eras
126. all by Fader Touch 6 Allow Call by Fader and Pan Touch No Call by Touch Softpanels Allow channel keyboard softpanels E Allow softpanels on touch Enable joystick zoom 3 Off Peak hold mode 5 0 Peak display limit dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload Clear Peak on Record Play All Meters use same meter point Launch on screen meters at Bootup Mixer Requires Restart E EQ On Busses Step 2 Check the 3D Panner checkbox Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog MADI Channels 56 C 64 Automation Enable automation 10 Glide in time Frames 10 Glide out time Frames 0 Mix Edit Handles Frames Enable automation optimisation Save automation with project Target Both as Default Oscillator Off 20 0 Oscillator level dB 1000 Osdllator frequency a Mite F gt Metron Noise White Pink C jag Main WU Follows 20 0 VU reference level dB 0 0 VU Trim left dB 0 0 VU Trim right dB Digital VU meters Now open the 3D Panner by double clicking the Pan Graph in Xstream Mixer Screen right clicking the Pan graph in FMC or double pressing the Path button in Xstream XCS Page 273 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 FX Stereo 1 and click the video button The Pyxis Window will now display the Pan Theatre Page 2 4 MIDI TRACKS January 22 2013 MIDI Tracks Introduction A licence is required to access the MIDI features so what follows only appl
127. also known as VCAs after Voltage Controller Amplifiers from earlier analog consoles Hardware Components Xstream is made up of five interconnected hardware devices 1 PC containing CC 1 Engine 2 Audio Interface and Sync box SX 8 SX 12 or SX 20 3 Xstream console with Mouse 4 Recorder Editor Video Monitor not supplied 5 Optional Mixer Video Monitor not supplied Plus additional optional components e Extra audio I O boxes SX 48s loaded with analog and or digital I Os e MADI interface cards Graphics Recorder Editor Display Features The graphical display provides status information clip and waveform display and visual feedback for editing functions A number of optional windows can be selected displaying a small mixer the video playback Video Locators or a combination of these To select these use your mouse with the View Menu above the screen Page 6 XSTREAM OVERVIEW January 22 2013 Range Available a de display Pyxis Track Edit toolbar recording time Smart Pane Zoom range Timecode video on current drive position Kalimba flowers My garden 04 37 58 0090 E MESE TI DE AAR E ee AE ee AA E 04 37 00 4 38 0 00 alimba Kalimba 6 9dB Kalimba 10 0 dB Kalimba Kalimba Kalirnba 6 r a r 11 Pyxis Mixer Track Panel Arm window Solo Mute Select Fader Pan Automation Track and clip area Smart Pane This area contains a number of different displays at differ
128. an be applied to the Infinite programme integration The blue numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 1 standard as a referenced LKFS value LK They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right hand number gives a rolling average over the defined short term window length and the left hand number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you last reset the meter You can reset the long term average infinite integration by clicking the number The long term average level can additionally have a gate applied in the meter preferences in order to allow it comply with the R128 EBU Standard Page 257 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Pyxis Track Introduction Pyxis Track is Xstream s built in video disk recorder and editor It can import files of many formats and export to many formats Some of these formats require special licences to operate See below for import export information Creating a Pyxis Track Before using Pyxis Track a video track must be added to the project This can be done in two ways e When creating a new project select the Add Pyxis Track checkbox shown below Dream 2 Ce FairlightaliProjects For a project that is already created use the command Tracks Add Pyxis Track Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Rename Track Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Colour i A
129. and Sample Modes The Patch Sample soft key toggles between Patch and Sample parameter setting When Sample is selected Page 284 SAMPLING January 22 2013 e All the controls work on the current sample the one last played e The Delete softkey removes only the current sample When Patch is selected e Modulation controls are not available e The AHDSR controls affect all samples in the Patch offsetting their individual values e The Delete softkey removes the whole patch with all its samples AHDSR The ADSR controls are Attack Hold Sustain Decay Release These control the output volume of a particular sample after its MIDI key has been pressed These are illustrated below Level Attack Time Hold Time Decay Time Release Time Sustain Level Tim Key Press Key Release These terms are familiar to most synthesiser and sampler users so they will not be explained here See Wikipedia for further information To control the AHDSR parameters use the rotary knobs at the sides of the Pad Note To access parameters written in grey in the lower part of each section hold down the ALT button Other Controls Filter This is a low pass filter Resonance Boosts the signal at the turnover frequency of the filter Level Sets the maximum playback level of the sample Distortion Adds third harmonic distortion to the sample For Patch settings only Pitch Bend On off Pitch Range The maximum pitch ben
130. and hold the cut tail button This will cause the cut of the selected clip to display a ghost Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to paste the tail If desired select another track to be the paste target but keep holding the cut tail button down Step 4 Release the cut tail button to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be cut and pasted at the same time BE HEAD TAIL Erase Head Tail E These keys erase the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for erase tail is listed below Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to cut and paste Step 2 Press the erase tail button This will erase the tail of the selected clip Note Clips on multiple tracks can be erased at the same time Mute Clip This button toggles the Mute state of individual clips When a clip is muted it is not heard Name Clip Press this button to name one or more clips A dialog will appear allowing you to enter the new name for the selected clip s Press Enter or click ox to adopt the new name Press esc or click Cancel to leave the dialog without changing the name Save Project This button saves the project under its existing name Importing from Other Projects The Import Menu allows you to copy clips from other projects into the current one Mixing data can also be brought in A project that is open for import is called a
131. and press These two commands are used to create most simple fades Press this will simplify the next step Now press the button Locate to the middle of the clip where you placed fades Press the button Now about half the clip s length to the right and press You have pasted a copy of the clip on top of itself The beginning of the newly pasted clip now interacts with the clip underneath inducing a crossfade You can see the line of the crossfade in the lower clip Move the top clip backwards and forwards to see how the fades interact Also go back to the Fade Menu and experiment by changing the fade in point Fade Shape Curves A fade s shape includes the following parameters controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Second clip Second clip second clip An vw Varying X level changes the loudness at the Crossover shown for clarity in a crossfade this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point First clip Second clip Second clip Second clip T Y Varying X point moves the Crossover earlier or later in the fade shown for clarity in a crossfade Page 76 EDITING January 22 2013 Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the f
132. and to keys to select a Range that includes all clips to be nudged Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When a Range is selected all layers of clips within the Range are nudged including those which are completely buried NOTES Nudging is possible while the transport is in play When nudging a Range clips not wholly within the Range are not affected However the Range itself is also nudged so it is possible to keep nudging the Range without resetting the From and To points This Page 93 EDITING January 22 2013 can be used for example to phase the audio with a guide track using Variable nudge with a small value Nudge Sync It is possible to nudge the audio inside a clip without moving the clip itself This is called Nudge Sync The Nudge function is normally in Clip mode i e clips are nudged To toggle it into Sync mode press the Nudge Sync soft key so that its colour changes to bright cyan Fade and Crossfade The fade button allows fades to be applied non destructively to the heads and tails of clips The fades are performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the machine Fades can be created on the fly relative to the playhead or they can be created and or modified on multiple clips at once Fades are applied from the picture keys soft keys and from the PC screen 10 00 00 00 08 10 AS Fade Presets 20 Duration 20
133. and touch the Encoder to cycle through the possible shapes While changing EQ settings you can hear the changes by playing over the clip Hint while over the clip hold down BLUE and press the loop clip button At any time you may A B the changes you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this press the 0ld New soft key below For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can press the EQ In Out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off Clip EC Mame EQ In Out Copy Nudge eG Old New Level Old hJ E When all parameters are set press Enter If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings press Edit EQ again Clip EQ Parameters Band There are four EQ bands that you can apply They are given the names commonly used on mixing consoles but actually they are not in fixed ranges you have the full frequency range available on each of them Filter Type Choices are P Band pass filter gt High pass filter lt Low pass filter Each band can be set to any filter type Mouse click on the button to cycle amongst the choices Frequency The centre frequency of each band Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20dqB Q This displays the Q of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Enables Used with the Apply command Only the Enabled bands are applied to the selected clips Page 105 EDITING January 22 2013 Value Grid The Value
134. ands are available when the cut copy or erase modes are current and a Range Is present split range fill b f fill overlap Cuts any clips lying across the ends of the range into two pieces at those range ends The fill function is used to automatically repeat a section of audio to fill a Range on a track to create background fills or buzz tracks The audio used for the fill is the clip currently on the clipboard from the last cut or copy function Multiple copies of the source may be needed in which case an overlap is used see below Reverses the audio in every second copy of the clipboard used for filling This can give a smoother effect Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the i11 command To set the overlap value Step 1 Press the Overlap a number of times until you have the value you want The maximum value is 10 frames Pressing Overlap again will bring it back to zero To use the i11 function Step 1 Copy or Cut the desired audio to the clipboard The cursor s sync point will be maintained Step 2 Create a Range encompassing the area to be filled Step 3 Press the i11 soft key When multiple copies of the clipboard are needed to fill the range the Overlap value is used to determine the length of crossfade between copies If Overlap is set to zero the copies will be butt edited together Razor Soft Key Functions When Razor is ON the soft keys menu change in
135. annels than source channels we cycle again from the beginning of the source channels For example if the source channels are 5 8 and the destination channels are 44 56 77 and 78 5 gt 44 8 gt 56 5 gt 7 7 8 gt 78 e The source channels and destination channels can be of different types For example you can copy from a Track to a Bus or a Group to a Live In some cases the data cannot be pasted e g Lives can have an expander gate but Buses cannot e Timecode offsets may be used The amount by which the transport has moved in between copying and pasting is used as the offset The play head or cursor is used as the sync point for copying and pasting just as it is for clips e Plug in data may be copied If a plug in is pasted to a channel where it is not instantiated the software will do so automatically Page 213 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Jog Mix Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play For example in Jog mode the system will update the numerical readouts of the automation data faders will move up and down and the audio levels mutes pans etc will update If you jog too fast the system will get behind but it catches up when you slow down or stop Until now automation could only be written in Play Mode Now it can be written in any forwards transport mode To do this toggle the Jog Mix button ON in the Mix Menu Any forwards movement can be used including Jog Shuttle Play
136. another location The ghost shows where the clipboard contents can be pasted Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard Page 84 EDITING January 22 2013 The clip is pasted nn eee i Head This time we ll only work with the Head of the clip That is the part before the cursor Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor rr The clip is red because it is touching the mm E cursor Step 2 Press the cut erase key so that Cut is selected Step 3 Press the cut head key Only the head goes on to the clipboard The ghost shows a head shaped clipboard ready to be pasted The original tail is now Blue because its track is not selected Page 85 EDITING January 22 2013 Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clipboard former head is pasted Range You can make a range that specifies exactly which part of the clip is affected The easiest way is like this more about ranges later Step 1 Move the transport where you d like to start the range Step 2 Press the from key Step 3 Move the transport where you d like to end the range Step 4 Press the to key Jump From key The From and To keys The range is marked in red Now we ll cut and paste the audio in the range Step 1 Choose the track and set the range we ve just done this Step 2 Press the cut key if not already selected Step 3 Press the cut range key Page 86 EDITING Ja
137. any clip into your current project This is explained starting at page 140 Patch I O Page Opens a window where every signal path in the system can be accessed and connected to any other path This is explained starting at page Error Bookmark not defined Undo and Redo Undo reverses the effect of the last edit performed The system has an unlimited number undo steps Each one saves a complete copy of the edit list to disk and can be recalled later if need Redo reverses the effect of the last undo You can see a list of the available undo steps in your project using Edit Undo List You can see a list of the available redo steps in your project using Edit Redo List Erase Selected If there is no range this command will erase all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will erase all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Cut Selected Cut is the same as Erase except that the clips are removed and placed on the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s If there is no range this command will cut all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this c
138. any errors or omissions to andrew fairlightau com Table of Contents INTRODUCTION cccsssessessenssseseeeeeees 1 CONGKACUIAU ONS sorer ners aiteeedneteexeeenn Wits 1 About This Manual ccsceceesecseeeeeeeeseeeseereees 1 What Else You Need to KnOW sceceeeeeeeereees 1 Some Important TerMs cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeas 2 Anything MISSING risiini iaa 3 XSTREAM OVERVIEW cccccccssssensseseees 4 Signal Flow DidGramM ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaees 4 Hardware Components ceccecseeeeeeeeeseeeeeneees 6 FDE rE 6 Starting the SyYSteM ccsccesseeesseeeseeeeeeseeaees 8 System SNUTKOWN cscecsecscseerceseeseatensesenseueans 8 Graphic THEMES nseni a 9 SELECTION AND CALLING 10 Selection TV DOS annia 10 HOW TO SCIOCE sacccee coin cescss naa 10 HOW TO Callin aa 10 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL 11 TATFOGUICH ON eccsascecerstcceesieticiecsendccsetenevaeakeee 11 FERMINOIOGY maisar aaa clei aweteties 11 PIMGG KE VS reinir eaa a 12 PICTURE KEYS rhii a 12 Te Padierna aati aA 12 Pad ALT Bank and Macro keys sassen 13 The Bottom ROW KeYS cccsceeeeseeceeeeeeeeseeaees 17 MEGAMOd GS uicina einai 23 QUICK ECILOM coseson iaa R 24 PIMC irnn e et tanca a iseeduseeesean een ies 26 Automate saose a a AE 28 CHANNELS siirsin 30 MrodUcTONrsn onean 30 Set Number of Tracks in Project 30 Displaying Channels cccecseseeeseseareeeeeeneees 30 Pyxis Track
139. ar the MultiTrim Group double click on one of the red channel numbers Calling a Group Master Group Masters are shown in the path displays in Xynergi when called To CALL a Group Master do one of the following e Click its name on the Mixer Screen If not visible scroll the mixer screen Note a Group Master is only visible if its group has members e Select the Mixer Megamode Press SEL Press Buses PreSS Bank Down to display the groups Choose a group Page 155 MIXING January 22 2013 Mixing Introduction This chapter describes everything you need to know about mixing in the Xstream system The information is organised in sections as follows e Bussing types formats assignment e Signal Processing using Tactile controls e Screen Mix Controls e Inserts and Direct outputs e Faders e Preset Library Bussing Definitions Bus a mix destination where many channels are summed in desirable proportions Bus Format the number and order of outputs that a Bus addresses Typically the format matches that of a speaker set in the final listening environment Common format examples include Mono Stereo and 5 1 Newer 3D formats can also be addressed Xstream provides all the commonly used formats ready to go You can also create custom formats for special speaker sets and the NAME panning system will follow your instructions for distributing energy between the speakers Xstream can also be licensed to al
140. ast one that was selected In most cases it is also the Current Channel It becomes the target for some special edit commands that can be performed on only one track How to Select To select do one of the following e Press a Xstream path button in the rows above or below the Pad e Click a track number in the Editing Screen e Click in the body of a track on the Editing Screen but avoid clips The last track you select in this way becomes the Current Track How to Call To Call a channel do one of the following e Press a Xstream path button in the rows above or below the Pad It it s already selected you will need to turn it off first then turn it on e Press the caL button on a fader e In the Mixer Screen screen click on a channel name e In the Mixer Screen double click on a channel s Pan EQ Dynamics Aux or Plug in graph Page 10 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Central Tactile Control Introduction Xstream uses the Xstream controller for editing basic signal processing setup and config functions monitoring plus automation This chapter describes the use of this tactile controller in detail This chapter is a great one to read right through as it gives you an orientation to working in the Xstream environment Terminology Xstream controller includes the following sections FAIRLIGHT XSTREAM ae Fixed Keys 2 0 D00000 000000 Track Tracks Track Tracki0 f racki Track12 F
141. aste the mix data at a different timecode simply locate there Note Another great way to do this if you want to copy audio as well as mix data is to use the Copy Project Segment command which is described on page 217 This depends on having the correct automation file loaded into the Library project Automation on Screen On Stop Touch Enables Automation The controls in the upper left of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the console surface The Automation Enable checkbox is equivalent to the Mix On button Page 218 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 On Screen Automation Controls Pan in TRIM Pan in READ Pan in WRITE Track Track Track Track Track Track Track g q 10 11 1 13 Fader in WRITE Fader in TRIM Fader in READ The controls in the lower right of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the Xstream picture keys The Mix On checkbox is equivalent to the Mix On button Automation Curves Automation data for tracks can be shown on the Edit Screen using the following command sequence View gt Smart Pane Automation or by pressing the Auto Curves soft key in the Mix Menu Fader Mute L R Pan er Aux Level x2 Level Aux3 Level ci T Click to toggle Click to remove Pull down menu Preset controls Edit Controls automation automation of automation graphs on or off display display parameter parameter To display automation curves on one or more trac
142. be used to control knob and fader settings This behaviour must be enabled first Step 1 Access the System Variables display by holding down shift and ctri then typing vV Step 2 In the Mouse Control group right side of dialog box enable Use Mouse Wheel The Mixer Screen must be in focus if the Editor Screen is in focus the mouse wheel causes zooming of the tracks To get the Mixer Screen in focus simply click anywhere on the screen For mouse wheel control of any fader or rotary knob in any of the Mixer Screen displays hover the mouse pointer over the control and turn the wheel Page 174 MIXING January 22 2013 For fine control hold down the SHIFT button while turning the mouse wheel Virtual Channel All other functions can be controlled using the DREAM II Virtual Channel shown below etek 0 OO eee DREAM II irtual Channel ai a Track 2 Boom ad Dynamics Aux Sends Buy Assign amp YCA E Cal mall Click on any switch Click on any knob Hover the mouse over Click and Click to toggle it and drag around it any box or knob and drag the and to to change its use the mouse wheel fader change value to change its value channels e To open the Virtual Channel double click a channel name in the EVO Mixer Screen screen In the above example we have selected Track 8 e To close the Virtual Channel right click anywhere inside it e While it is open you may move to the next or previous channel by
143. ber of plug ins this can take a long time especially since many of them require dongle verification Another strategy is to use the Rescan button in the same dialog only when you have added or removed plug ins from the system Plug in Latency and Compensation Each plug in takes a certain amount of time to run and this effectively delays the audio in the track or live feed The delay time is called the latency of the plug in Latency has two components e AudioBridge latency which is the time taken to get the audio from the Crystal engine to the CPU where the plug ins are executed and back again This is unavoidable due to the VST specification requiring blocks of samples to be sent for processing e Processing time of the plug in which is how long it takes the CPU to process a block of samples This is reported by each manufacturer of VST plug ins Latency Compensation For Track Feeds containing plug ins the track playback is automatically advanced by the amount of the latency Note this is not possible for Live Feeds as they happen in slightly retarded real time When Buses contain plug ins the tracks feeding that bus are automatically advanced by the amount of the latency If a track is feeding more than one bus the amount by which the track is advanced is decided by a priority system Main Bus is highest then Sub Buses in numerical order then Aux buses With a track feeding more than one bus the timing will only be corre
144. bered files 1 frame per file Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported Page 261 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 jpeg also any Dream Pyxis native files which are uncompressed vmu dv25 dif mjpeg vmj lossless Huffman compression vmh Import by Drag and Drop A quick way to import video files is to use Drag and Drop as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Open Windows Explorer or My Computer and find the video file you wish to import Drag the video file from the Windows Explorer window and drop it on the video track in the Xstream Edit Screen The following file types can be imported using drag and drop Quicktime mov any more than 2 accompanying audio tracks must be imported the system will prompt if this is necessary Avi avi Windows media format wmv Mpeg4 files mp4 Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf dv25 dv or dif MXF mxf containing dv25 dv50 dvi00 DVCPro HD or IMX mpeg compressed video Omf video files omf containing mjpeg dv25 or uncompressed video Thomson Grass valley dv25 files vid Bitmap files single still image bmp useful for a clapper board LongGop requires mxf licence option mpeg licence option plus MXFReader2 1 beta or later Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported also any Dream Pyxis native files
145. blue label in the Edit Screen Clip EQ does not use a range Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation Press the clip eq button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the edit soft key The Pad now displays an EQ graph for the clip and parameter values at the ends Use the Encoders to change the parameter values dfgh Fx ASLONGS TRACKS Track The 14th Track Track Track Track Track Sterea 1 POSS 13 Tra 15 16 17 18 19 Tks 3 4 Tk amp Tks 1 2 Tk 5 Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 Tk 16 Tk 17 Tk 18 Tk 19 bay MM 0 0 dB 6 3 dB 10000 HF 3392 he Band 1 2 Band 3 4 Page 1 Page 2 Page Selection Clip EQ Parameters The four bands of EQ are displayed on two pages Use the Pad buttons to choose a page 0 0 dB 1000 T hz 1 0 Normal view ALT view Page 80 EDITING January 22 2013 To gain access to the Shape parameter press or hold the axt button and touch the Encoder to cycle through the possible shapes While changing EQ settings you can hear the changes by playing over the clip Hint while over the clip hold down BLUE and press the loop clip button At any time you may A B the cha
146. c editing of video in a variety of formats up to and including HD Signal paths for feeds and buses comprise both fixed and moveable processing blocks Signal paths may be configured in formats from mono up to 5 1 surround When a track feed is armed for recording the fader may be switched to control the level at the input to the disk recorder as shown below Track and Live Feeds Up to 192 Track Feeds Up to 48 Live Feeds 4 band automated EQ Bell Shelf High amp Low Notch 2 band automated Filters High Pass and Low Pass at 12 pr 24 dB per octave Compressor plus Limiter plus Expander Gate Insert Direct Out Track Metering Aux Sends 12 each in any bus format up to 7 1 Fader and Mute Panning up to 7 1 surround Link Groups Up to 8 members with linked parameter controls and support for advanced surround panning features Main Bus 1 x Main Bus Formats Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 7 1 Compressor and Limiter Insert Direct Out Master Fader and Mute Sub Buses 8 x Sub Buses Formats Mono Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 7 1 Compressor and Limiter Insert Direct Out Master Fader and Mute Page 5 XSTREAM OVERVIEW January 22 2013 Aux Buses e 12 x Aux Buses e Formats Mono or Stereo LCR LCRS LCRSS 5 1 7 1 e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Master Fader and Mute Multi Track Buses e 24x Multi Track Buses e Mono Format e Master Fader and Mute Groups e 32 x Group Masters
147. ceeeeeeneees 295 Creating New Projects ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 Backup Project to FOIder ccccecsecseeeeeneees 297 Media S Gann NG assia tes weoteidewedineeiey 297 Detailed Media Management cccccceeeeees 297 IMA POru NG FIGS cievesecdeteioutivedeaewemede ees 300 EDL Management ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeenes 306 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL 311 IPE OGIUGHION erinan a 311 Setting up MaCHINGS ccccccesseeeseeeeeeeseaees 311 Machine Control Indicators ccecseeeeeeeees 316 Timecode Generator ccecsecseeeeeseeeeseensenens 316 Putting Machines Online cccsceceeeeeeeeees 317 Editing with Machine Control cccceeeee 317 Timecode SOU D wicstiacicac teases Meceei el aeicecvas 318 HUI SLAVE MODE ccccccssssenseeeees 321 IE OCUMCHION secina smincnioanvateen 321 SS UUs ise cecta cov nvenisawiuiaes si stiaenenes ana eee 321 MIDI DEVICES arican n 321 Remap FIle gaariii a 324 Advanced using Scripted Macros s s s 327 INTRODUCTION January 22 2013 Introduction Congratulations You re reading the manual This is a great way to learn Xstream Xstream is a large audio production system with very strong support for video recording and editing If offers a variety of work surface components and modular furniture About This Manual The Xstream User Manual provides all the information necessary to rapidly become proficient at operating the system in a pr
148. cks include record and playback capability plus basic editing e Audio Tracks include record and playback capability plus full editing and mixing e MIDI Tracks can record and edit MIDI parts e Live Feeds bring audio straight from an input to the mix with full processing e Buses the destination for mixing Include Main Sub Buses and Aux Buses e Group Masters also known as VCAs Video and MIDI tracks are described in their own chapters This chapter describes the behaviour of the other channel types Set Number of Tracks in Project The number of tracks refers to both Audio and MIDI tracks For a New Project When a project is created you can specify the number of tracks To do this e Click the File New command in the menu above the Edit screen or Press Mode gt Proj gt New Proj In either case you will see a dialog box where you can select the number of tracks With Open Project If you wish to change the number of tracks in your project you can e Click the Tracks Set Track Count command in the menu above the Edit screen You will see a dialog where the number of tracks can be changed WARNING If you remove tracks containing clips the contents will be destroyed with no UNDO Displaying Channels Audio and MIDI tracks are displayed on the Edit Screen Live Feeds and Buses can also be displayed but only when mix automation is active Mix On is on The latter is intended for displaying auto
149. click Duplicate Page 159 MIXING January 22 2013 cS Fairlight Setup Utility a Bus Format OF n B a a 6 Surround Left o came Step 5 Double click the name of the new format which appears as 5 1 D for duplicate and edit it to read 5 1 SMPTE The SMPTE 5 1 format requires a different element order from the factory 5 1 format based on Dolby Step 6 Click on the Centre Element Page 160 MIXING January 22 2013 Bus Elements Element Name Short LR FE Left L i00 100 Right R 100 100 Cente C 0 100 Surround Left 100 100 Surround Right Rs 100 100 Boom B 0 100 Down Step 7 Click the Down button until the Centre element is in the correct position below Right Step 8 In the same way move the Boom element to its correct position below Centre Step 9 Click Save When you restart the Xstream software the new Bus Format will appear in the Bus Format dialog and the Xynergi Bus Format Pad Menu Note The DU Down Up parameter cannot be altered unless you have purchased a 3D licence from Fairlight Bus Assign Overview Assigning a path to a bus means sending it to that mix destination Every path in the system has separate assignment to Main and each Sub Bus meaning that you can choose which paths go to which buses Bus to bus assignment is limited Sub Buses and Aux Buses can be assigned to the Main Bus but not to each other Main and MT Buses cannot be as
150. clicking the ADR Menu and selecting ADR Preferences The following screen is displayed Page 66 ADR January 22 2013 The main purpose of this dialog is to control beeps and the streamer The streamer is a pair of vertical lines moving across the Pyxis screen during the Preroll to the cue At the same time as the audible beeps the line extends upwards and downwards briefly The two lines come together at the cue point and a large cross is shown The extensions and cross can be given a different colour to the lines Note the number of beeps and corresponding streamer crosses is controlled in this dialog but the Preroll must be long enough to accommodate them If the Preroll is too short some of the beeps will be omitted See below for instructions on setting the Preroll The text referred to is that shown on the Decklink output from the Pyxis Track The font colour height control and Wrap Text control are used to customise the text display Note this text display is not shown on the Edit Screen Pyxis Window only on the independent monitor fed by your Decklink card if fitted Use the ADR Display described below to show text over the Edit Screen The ADR Display The cat sat on the mat The ADR Display is a band across the screen which displays the ADR text and also gives an indication of the start point for the cue An example of the streamer is shown below The text is shown and the indicators converge on the centre of t
151. clicking on the column header Clicking the header a second time reverses the sort order e Double click any clip to locate to its timecode e Press the Playhead soft key or select the Under Playhead checkbox to display only clips touching the cursor This is updated as the transport moves Page 141 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 Press the Pop soft key or select the Pop button to bring the currently selected clip to the top layer on its track This can be used to manage multiple takes of the same recording layered on a single track Press the Offline soft key or select the Only Offline Clips button to reduce the list to only those clips for which media are not currently available Click the Reveal File button to display a Windows Explorer window showing the file containing the media for the clip Resize the dialog by dragging with the mouse on any of its sides Change the order of displayed fields by dragging the field names horizontally with the mouse Paste the selected clip s at the current time by clicking the Paste button or by dragging one or more clips from the window to the Track display if multiple clips are selected they will be placed end to end at the destination What is Displayed il 1 PROJ Jestream video Bin 01 Ds Fairlight tAU Audio Clipstore Andri By default the window displays clips from the current project By clicking the various checkboxes you can access
152. clicking the New Old radio buttons until you apply the changes In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the in out soft key or the In Out radio buttons Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Page 106 EDITING January 22 2013 Step 1 Press the clip EQ button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 3 Press the copy soft key or click the Copy button on the screen Step 4 The enable checkboxes allow you to choose which of the bands are pasted into your target clip s Step 5 Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Step 6 Click the Apply button or press the apply soft key or press Enter EQ In Out Use the EQ In Out Soft key to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings of the EQ parameters Saving EQ Presets The system allows you to save the current EQ settings and later retrieve and apply them To save an EQ setting do the following Step 1 Step 2 Type a new name into the Presets field or use an old name if you want to change its settings Set the EQ values to the ones you want to save by editing or simply by picking up the values by touching an existing clip Click the Save button or press the save soft key To retrieve an EQ setting select it fr
153. control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Sub Bus For more details about Bus Reduction see page Error Bookmark not defined The mMuTE key now controls the bus assignment to the selected Sub Bus The panpot is inactive The mute and fader controls may be automated and will record data for the bus send level pan and assignment parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see BLAH Fader To Record Level While the Faders To layout is active the Rec Level soft key may be chosen All track feed faders now control the level prior to the disk recorder This can be used to control the level going to disk during recording Note that live feed faders are inactive when Faders To Rec Level is selected This fader control cannot be automated Page 195 MIXING January 22 2013 Faders to Direct Output While the Faders To layout is active the Direct Output soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the direct out level The Mute key toggles the direct output ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the direct out level parameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Fader To Boom While the Faders To layout is active the Boom soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the boom level The Mute key toggles the boom ON and OFF The fader contro
154. cord Format UYe5 Capture Format MEDIASUBT PE Uy Frame Offset fo 25 FPS Save Delete cancel Apo _ Capture Size is a default value based on whether Dream II is launched in Standard or High Definition mode and the current project sync settings See View gt Smart Pane Sync If this setting is not the format you are wishing to capture it is recommended you consider exactly what format you wish your project to be and configure it in consequence The Device value tells Dream II which video hardware capture unit will provide the incoming video signal Under normal conditions this will be Decklink Video Capture Input Source is currently not activated Setting the correct Video Input must be performed within the Decklink Control Panel See above Page 264 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Record Format is the video file and codec format for capturing the incoming video signal The options available are e DV25 DV Codec 3 5Mb sec SD NTSC or PAL ONLY e MPJEG e Uncompressed e Huffman Lossless For Standard Definition systems DV25 is the recommended setting For High Definition systems Huffmann Lossless is a good reliable option Invoke Video Capture Mode Unlike an audio recorder digital video capturing equipment must be in a specific Video Capture Mode in order to record an incoming signal In DreamII you can invoke this mode by navigating to S
155. created ClipStores ClipStores work in a similar way to Bins but can be located anywhere on your network and are accessible to all users ClipStores can be created at any time using File gt New Clipstore Clipstore files have the extension CLIPS TO open a ClipStore use File Open Clipstore and browse to the file you want The project remembers which ClipStores have been used recently these can be accessed via the File Menu also Multiple ClipStores can be opened at the same time and by multiple users To place clips in a ClipStore select them then use Clip Publish Clips to Clipstore While this dialog is open you can choose which of the open ClipStores to target If you have selected multiple clips you can save them as a Grouped Clip and give them a name If your ClipStore is to be shared on a network the Publish Media as Well checkbox should be used so that the media is placed in the appropriate folder under the ClipStore file This will allow users from anywhere on the network to audition and paste the audio Multiple users can publish at a most the same time to the same ClipStore Because the clip metadata is very small the ClipStore is only opened for Write for a short time making clashes between users relatively unlikely If a clash occurs the later publish command will be held off until the earlier one is finished which will hang the late publishing system for a short period To access audio from an open
156. ct for the highest priority bus and others which happen to have the same latency Bus Balancing There is one exception to the preceding statement If a track is feeding the Main Bus and one other bus and the other bus is also routed to the Main Bus the system will correctly compensate for the latency See diagram below re Latency 1 7 Main Bus Track Aux Bus Let atency 2 J In this instance special channels are used to create the necessary timing changes to correctly compensate for latencies Page 228 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Notes e Bus Balancing is enabled in the Audio Plugins General Preference Tab by selecting the Bus Balancing Enabled option Since this new mechanism uses system resources it is Disabled by default e The new mechanism only works for Main Assign If a track is not assigned to the Main bus this mechanism is not invoked e or this to work a track can only be assigned to one bus plus Main e g If Tracki is simultaneously assigned to Sub1 gt Main and Auxl gt Main then the old priority mechanism is invoked and only the Sub1 correctly compensated e Ifa bus feed is not also assigned to the Main bus then the mechanism is not invoked and the old bus priority mechanism used e No more than 12 buses can be balanced in this way e Each balanced bus uses special channels which copy the elements of the Main bus For a 5 1 Main bus 6 such channels are used stereo uses
157. ctions affect only the audio When set to both clip editing functions like copy paste nudge and slip will affect the automation data as well as the audio clips See Automation follows editing later in this chapter Copies mix data over the range from the selected channels into a clipboard Pastes the copied mix data from the clipboard to the selected channels See details below Determines what data is written after leaving automation record by pressing the STOP key or pressing the Mix ON Hold erases all events from the current position to the end of the project Return returns to the previously recorded value at the current location Event holds the current value until the next event is encountered Enable ON When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH any enabled parameters that are touched are automatically put into Write or Trim It is not necessary to first enable the feed or bus OFF When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH only feeds or buses that have been enabled in the mix menu will be put into Write or Trim when their enabled parameters are touched Note Touch Auto Enable is selective by parameter For example if the EQ section is enabled and you touch only one control only it will go into Write or Trim The other EQ controls will remain in Read until you touch them Page 212 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Join Allows you to carry written values from one place to another Each time the system
158. d Curve button Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip where you want the Fade In point Page 111 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 EDITING 0121 122 123 124125 121 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134135 136 137 138 139 140 14 142 143 1441 EEE 00 0 10 00 00 08 0 00 00 08 3000 Press and hold the Fade Head button This will cause the Fade display to show in the Smart Pane u 1U zU osu SU bH FU gU UI LU u Wo 2u Su SU ok 1 1 50 1 3 3 w5 3 3 7 6 T LO 10 00 00 01 00 10 15 15 7 15 m 20 Duration 20 0008 10 00 O00 000 O00 3000 Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the displayed curve u LW Zul sU l SUM sU gU JU 1U u WW Zul 230 l ol h 1 1 50 1 3 3 n 3 11 7 Th LO 10 00 00 01 00 10 15 15 7 15 m 2 Duration 20 10 008 10 00 O00 000 00 08 3000 When ready release the Fade Head button to apply the fade Page 112 January 22 2013 EDITING January 22 2013 J II eu SU O H dd 1 QSL L fot ay 00 00 01 00 o F Duration on co 50 Top Layers Sx20 Internal UU S A 0008 10 00 Note Clips on multiple tracks can be faded at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected using the number in the Duration field as the length of their fade in 00 00 01 00 10 Duration oe 10 15 201 Jog Level This key combines the Jog Wheel and the Level Trim fu
159. d for the patch Portamento On off Glissando On off Page 285 SAMPLING January 22 2013 P G rate The speed of portamento or glissando between successive notes Modulation To display Modulation parameters press the Mod softkey This toggles the layout between its normal AHDSR display and the Modulation parameter display The Modulation controls include Vibrato On off depth speed attack and delay Tremolo On off depth speed attack and delay Saving SDS The SDS samples and settings are saved with the current project Media Considerations SDS samples can be located anywhere in your disk system To bring them all together into the current Project folder use the Localise Audio command in the Process Menu Select the Consolidate Sampler checkbox to ensure that your SDS samples are included in the consolidation Backup to Folder operations also take SDS samples into consideration This is done automatically Page 286 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Project and File Management Introduction File handling in Xstream supports legacy formats from previous products but also introduces powerful new Project and File management capabilities This chapter details the way the system looks after files Project Formats In Xstream three native project formats are supported The newer format has the extension DR2 It has the strongest feature set and is recommended for use where compatibility with older sys
160. d format you used if any The Monitor Megamode The Monitor Megamode is used to control all aspects of monitoring External Monitor Monitor xt xta xta yte xe x16 xt xta xto Ext10 Ext11 Setup Mode Mon Setup Stereo Stereo gene Alt Sp kr Sp kri Com p comp Mona Mono Co A p j MILITE Comp mor Speaker Speaker Mute and Mutes Sets Dim Monitor Sources The monitor system can play the audio from any system bus or from a selection of external sources coming into system I O The default selection is Main Bus In the Monitor Megamode the buses are shown in the Pad not visible above and any of them can be selected The external sources are chosen in the upper row of the Picture Keys as shown above Page 248 MONITORS January 22 2013 Stereo and Mono Comp These buttons allow you to listen to your mix through a stereo or mono speaker system If your main speakers are 5 1 the monitor system will use Left and Right for stereo or Center for mono Speaker Sets The Monitor Megamode allows access to two alternative speaker sets plus your Main speakers Monitor Setup Menu Monitor Setup allows you to configure your speaker sets as to their format mono stereo 5 1 etc and the physical outputs that feed them Page 249 METERS January 22 2013 Meters Introduction Signal level metering is available in the various system video displays Master Screen Meters Xstream provides a set of eight Master Scr
161. d project management select Setup Media and Project Management from the Xstream main menu Controlling Scanned Folders You may wish to save time when the system starts by omitting the scan of some folders in your system This is particularly useful when the system is connected to a network In the Media and Project Management dialog you can display all storage devices folders and files Devices Name Location Description Mede _ RiW Free Space MB Recycle Bin Space FarightAu For Speed Networked Ree Priority Audio_D D Dream II Audio RiwW 101844 MB OMB Yes 2500 Local Up Video_E E Dream II Video Riw 165770 MB OMB Yes 2500 Local Local Disk ci Windows Forma Both Riw 28722 MB OMB No 2500 Local Vault Ti Windows Forma Both Riw 334316 MB OMB No 2500 Shared gt Find SubFolders 4 Convert to Media device Set Device Info View CD Drives Default Project Device Audio_D sa Rescan Devices Empty Recycle Bins Scanned Folders Subfolders D FairlightAU Projects Projet Type Comment S O D FairlightAU Media NLY Diana frango Pyxis NLY 8 D Fairlight4U Projects 24000 clip project DR2 Dream II 24048 D FairlightAU Projects New Project2 Big Import DR2 Dream II 5678 D FairlightAU Projects New Project2 Media Frank Mix05 DR2 D rcii Testing 1140 D FairlightQU ML3_4 T40a50 ML4_audio New Project19 DR2 Dream II 1548 D FairlightAU Media videoImported4udioMedi BusTest New Project20 DR2 Drea
162. d then do something with it For example you might want to move the transport exactly 2 seconds and 3 frames backwards To capture timecode Press the Grab Time button You may now continue with the Go To Timecode procedure To complete our example of going back by 2 seconds and 3 frames continue like this Step 4 Type the button Step 5 Type the numbers 203 if subframes are not being displayed otherwise 20300 Step 6 Press the Go button again Or ENTER Play Or Esc You might press the Esc key if you simply wanted to capture the current timecode for another purpose such as setting an Edit Range Go To Mark A Mark is a stored timecode Marks are created by pressing the Mark key which is visible in the Edit Megamode You can press it at any time itrany transport mode Marks are shown above the track display in the Edit Screen as yello y pointers N EE ety ae er ee Es y 239 00 00 10 02339 00 00 10 02 40 01 To locate to a Mark Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the mark soft key Step 3 The Marks dialog appears on the Edit Screen Page 50 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Index Time Line Marker 00 02 56 18 O0 03 28 09 00 04 06 10 00 04 25 11 00 04 39 11 00 04 51 01 00 05 13 09 00 05 46 2721 00 02 00 18 00 04 03 10 00 07 57 12 00 06 42 01 00 05 55 05 Video Locator 5 00 06 13 21 my mark Mark 4 3 4 5 6 T B 9 Yeti bebe eet There you can choose a Mark wit
163. dd a clip use the Track menu as follows Step1 Use the command Tracks Add Clip The system displays the following dialog Track E Ripple All Clips File Name Clip Name Step2 Choose the track where you want the clip to be placed Step3 Choose the audio file that will be played by the clip You may type in the name of the file if you know it including its full path Alternatively click the Browse button labeled and find the file in your disk storage Step4 Choose a name for the clip Step5 You may audition the clip at any stage to confirm that you have the right audio Step 6 Click OK to create the clip It will be placed at the current timecode position on the track that you chose Clip Display Information You can choose which information is displayed in clips using the command View Displayed Clip Information The system displays a dialog like this Page 34 Bit rate Frame Rate Sample Rate Video Resolution Gain F Gain Icon offset Codec F Source Channel F Not local media icon CHANNELS January 22 2013 Note that Frame Rate Video Size and Codec are only shown on Video clips see the chapter Pyxis Track on page 258 for details about video Choosing Clip Colours To explicitly choose clip colours do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Clip Set Clip Colour m Clip Level Normalize Clip Level LR Stereo Swap Phase Invert Clips Renam
164. design and implementation The Pad The Pad consists of a screen area and six encoders The buttons immediately above and below the Pad are used to select functions displayed by it A lot of the time the Pad shows 24 of the project Signal Paths known as paths These include Tracks Live Feeds Buses and Group Masters Selected path Current Armed track Unselected bright signal path red text and path dull background blue panel border background Che ater sixteen Gain Stereo Atmos 4 0 0 Tk 1 Freg heats Track Track Track 7 Track Track Track Ls Ta 1 16 19 Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 Tk 1 Tk 17 Tk 18 Tk 19 System User Solo indicator Mute indicator Name Name green red Page 12 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Another important use for the Pad is displaying the mixing parameters of the Current channel Stereo Atmos Encoder ALT Current Dynamics Bus Assign EQ Plugin Aux Pan values Encoder channel user Graph indicators graph list send graph values name graphs Pad ALT Bank and Macro keys FAIRLIGH I This key is used to display the selection bank for mix parameters in the Pad It can be used in latched or momentary style Latched example Step 1 Press and release the Pad button quickly The Pad enters Edit Mode and the following display appears Page 13 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Track Track Track Track Track Track 6 F g q 10 11 Tk amp
165. diting commands can be used with the video track the same way as they are with audio The copy and cut commands can be used as with audio to put video clips on the clipboard but unlike audio clips they can only be pasted back to the video track NOTE Cross fades between two video clips become dissolves Audio tracks and Pyxis track can be selected and edited simultaneously Editing with the Mouse Video clips can be dragged left and right but not up and down across tracks Using Pyxis Track as a Machine Selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines For information about setting Pyxis as a machine see Machine Control page 311 Page 271 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below ie ey A ili i 7 ee SPE i T FF 7 r p Poi gt r l P j 3 Ta f i i l AON ho This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick To enable the Pan Theatre first enable the 3D panner using the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type The System Variables dialog box is displayed Page 272 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 System Variables Call Modes E Allow Call by Solo E Allow Call by In Line Panel Allow C
166. don t release it yet With your other hand jog the transport forward Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted where you jogged Example 2 Press down the cut clip key With the same hand press down the track up down button With your other hand turn the jogger wheel to change the track selection Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted on a different track With practice two handed editing can substantially increase your efficiency at repetitive editing tasks Copy Copy works exactly the same way as Cut except that the audio is not removed to place it on the clipboard only copied Pasting after copy is the same as after cut Erase Erase works exactly the same way as Cut except that the audio is not placed on the clipboard The clipboard remains unchanged so its previous contents are ready to paste at any time Edit Soft Key Commands The following soft keys are available when the cut copy Of erase modes are current split clip Cuts the clip into two pieces at the cursor position mute clip Silences the clip Page 89 cleave clip reverse Ghost On EDITING January 22 2013 Removes the link between stereo linked clips Creates a reversed version of the audio in the selected clip s and replaces the original with this reversed version Toggles the ghost image on and off Some people prefer working without it Range On Soft Key Functions The following additional comm
167. dy for automation write or trim Parameters can be selected individually or in groups Common Mix Menus The common mix Menus include the Mix Menu and the File Menu which would be familiar to experienced Fairlight users For others the chapter on Automation in the user manual is recommended reading Auto Setup is a new menu containing automation parameters Page 28 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Auto Auto Write Stop Touch Glide Setup Enab Trim Event Cat 10 tr Punch Menu Punch Menu accesses commands for instant or programmed automation write entry for all selected channels p E active Purch Cut Menu Suto Punch For many users this is the easiest way to manage automation sessions Prime Prime is a state where automation write entry is linked to recording This allows users to make a live recording of their mix punching in ona finished audio track while simultaneously recording all mixer moves needed to create that mix Preview Preview is a mixer state where controls can be adjusted freely without disturbing the written automation data Once the desired settings have been discovered it s easy to punch them into the data either live or by overwriting existing data All Read All Read is your panic button It instantly drops all channels out of Automation write or trim Page 29 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Channels Introduction Xstream provides six types of channel e Video Tra
168. e this will create a new bus with the same format Format is set using a dropbox in the Format column the Width column is a read only indicator of how many elements are used by each bus Clicking in the Reduce column checkboxes will toggle a Sub Bus into and out of Reduction Mode as explained above Click the Bus Assign button to open the Bus Assign dialog Custom Bus Formats You can create new Bus Formats as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Exit from the Xstream software Open the Fairlight Setup Utility by clicking Start and then typing setup into the edit box then select Fairlight Setup Utility from the list of matching applications Click the Bus Format tab Page 158 MIXING January 22 2013 Step 4 Bus Format LA iT mT o T Em 7 E a La fi fa C 7 LA an T i 6 Bus Elements en LUJ al i pm i ka hm Lily M 100 a A Oo a 50 100 Add Remove Up Down 05 x J Cancel The Bus Format tab shows all the currently available formats in your system The factory formats are shown in grey and cannot be edited Clicking on an element as shown above displays its position in 3D space as a red square with numerical equivalents below To create a new format press Add creates a blank format or Duplicate creates a copy of the selected format which you can edit In this case we select the factory 5 1 format and
169. e Resync to record time Reverse Clips Set Sync Point BYE Flip Video Clip Field Cut Clips To Bin Copy Clips To Bin Select tracks containing the clips you want to colour Move the transport so the clips are under the cursor or make a range using the From and To keys The clips should be red Use the menu Edit Set Clip Colour y Publish Clips To Clipstore Multichannel Clips Custom Colour Follow Track Click to choose a colour for all selected red clips Click to display a mixer for special colours Click to return the selected clips to their track colour Multichannel clips are linked for editing operations They are displayed with no separating line and a little smaller in height The picture below shows two stereo multichannel clips Page 35 CHANNELS January 22 2013 A pare You can create multichannel clips in two ways e By importing a multi channel Wave or other file e By Recording into a Link Group of tracks Once a clip has been defined as multichannel operations on one channel of the clip eg EQ affect all other channels Multichannel clips can be broken apart using the command Edit Cleave Multi Channel Clips Clips that have previously been cleaved can be restored using Edit Restore Multi Channel Selecting Channels Selecting channels makes them the target for commands and parameter changes With audio tracks clips on the selected ones are targeted for clip bas
170. e fil Press a HUI key and observe the MSAT display It will show you the name of the key l x is Msg All Filter Te Msg Meg All Filter Te O a E ae us Para Pars ker Gen Sys Para Para ster i nl note iL l H j gt fe J Gib Set Set Get Test e n B we it ot O DB 14 59 49 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fl gt 0 DE 14 59 30 gt Error from ShbortNs g 5 DE 14 59 32 gt Ctrl oW MACKIE F1 1 DE 14 59 32 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fl 0 DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fe 1 DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID SW MACKIE Fe g DE 14 59 34 gt Error from ShortMag 5 Stopped E Ready ackets Tx 197 4 In the example shown the keys CID_SW_MACKIE_Fi and CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 have been pressed and released hence two events per key Page 326 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 Advanced using Scripted Macros In Xstream a number of the HUI keys have been used to trigger scripted macros as follows CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN decrement_fader_set CID _SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP increment_fader_set CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN decrement4_fader_set jump by four fader sets CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP increment4_fader_set jump by four fader sets CID_SW_MACKIE_UP EQUAL less_tracks show fewer tracks on the edit screen CID_SW_MACKIE_ DOWN EQUAL more_tracks show more tracks on the edit screen If you wish to release one of the HUI keys for other functions
171. e automatically named based on their parent project So a project named MyProject MT might have FUF files named MyProject_001 FUF MyProject_002 FUF MyProject_003 FUF and so on FUF files are automatically created in the same subfolder as the MT project You must not delete FUF files unless you wish to remove audio from your project Page 288 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 When copying MT projects to a compliant QDC engine you must always be sure to copy all associated FUF files Otherwise the QDC will not be able to find all of the audio data used in the MT project B Test 1 J File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help O Back gt Search Folder Address D FairlightAUiProjects Test 1 EJ co Date Modified Pest LAN 36 564 KB MT File 11 03 2008 1 39 PM Test 1 O001 FUF 4 990 KB FUF File 11 03 2008 1 39 PM O x A 31 Floppy 44 a Local Disk Cs S Audio D4 9 etax2003 9 etaxz004 O etax2005 O etax 2006 I Fairlight E Fairlight au O Media O ML3_AVT40a50 9 MLS_AvTNewPlugin El Projects r E E objects Disk free space 101 GB 40 8 ME F My Computer The picture above shows the typical file layout with an MT file The FUF file contains the audio while the MT file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files Note The FUF file will generally get much larger up to 4 GB while the MT file already contains a full complement of mix data even
172. e button and then the split clip soft key This will split the clip into two pieces butt edited together We will make a crossfade Press the fade button Page 77 EDITING January 22 2013 000r S00 00 07 00 000a 0000 1 W082 00 Press the soft key or Issue the command gt S00 00 IOS 02 00 O08 We 10 20 Ww ww 6 70 0 The Xfade dialog appears showing the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap Page 78 EDITING January 22 2013 OOo Wee oe oo O00 Oe ww HD w a a w m w Turn the Jog Wheel so that the Duration is increased The Yellow region expands accordingly You may also change the X Point value labelled or the X Level value labelled dB This can be done by tabbing to those fields and using the or by OOF S00 00 07 Sr 0 000a 0000 O02 00 OO de Second clip To apply the specified crossfade press or click the button in the dialog See more details about crossfading later in this chapter Page 79 EDITING January 22 2013 Clip EQ Overview The clip eq menu allows you to add a four band equalizer to every clip The display of clip eq is shown in the Clip EQ Smart Pane above the Edit Screen This comes on automatically when you enter the clip eq menu In Clip EQ only one track is active Even if many tracks are selected only the most recently selected will be affected This track has a
173. e clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Create a range within the clip using from and to Hold down BLUE and press the Razor button to highlight it Press cut range The width of the range is cut out of the track like a piece of tape and downstream clips move forwards The cursor splits into two pieces showing the range that will be added to the timeline on selected tracks if you paste the clipboard Move inside another clip and press Enter The clipboard is pasted and the time it occupies is inserted into the track like splicing tape Investigate cut head and cut tail use undo in between Acceleration Overview Normal cut and paste can go much faster using modifier keys The modifier keys are Blue Track and Zoom To increase your speed practise using them with your left hand while your right hand uses the Jog Wheel Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button to access the Cut menu Press the range button until it is OFF Operation Getting the right location track selection and view use at least half of your editing time This can be speeded up as follows Jog Speed hold down ctr1 to jog faster Track Selection hold down Track up down while jogging Time Zoom hold down Zoom while jogging Track Zoom hold down ctrl and Zoom while jogging Loca
174. e in Preview this is a good way to take them into Write For example you can play to a certain point adjusting parameter values then press the In button to put the selected parameters into Write starting at their previewed values If you wish to punch from Preview to Write automatically use Programmed Automation recording as described on page 208 The Preview Menu All of these commands require Preview to be on They are used to transfer previewed values into written automation data These actions will affect all signal paths in Preview status on all enabled parameters Page 214 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Fill Range A range must be present Pressing this soft key causes all previewing parameters to write their current values into the range This is very useful for working with scenes or sections with different sound requirements Glide Range A range must be on This command takes the data at the beginning of the range and glides smoothly to the current control value fader or pot by the end of the range Preview Trim This command can raise or lower fader levels within a range by a constant amount It can only be used with physical faders It requires Preview to be on and a range to be present To use Preview Trim Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Ensure Mix is On Preview is On and a range is present Enable fader level automation and put the channels to be trimmed into Preview using the
175. e lost It is not enough to simply save the project See System Mix below for a useful safety measure The available space left in the project file for new mixes or mix data is displayed in the Mix menu When the space left falls below 2 the Save soft key becomes disabled Saving a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Press the Save soft key in the LCD menu Step 3 Type a unique name for the mix on the PC keyboard and press Enter Alternatively type a name with a numeric suffix g Demo Mix 1 The next time you press Save anew name will automatically be generated with an incremented suffix e g Demo Mix 2 Press Enter to save the mix with the new name Loading a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes These appear on the screen and in the XCS Pad area Press the Sort soft key to select TIME or ALPHA ALPHA sorts the saved mixes in alpha numeric order TIME sorts the saved mixes in the order in which they were saved with the most recently saved mix at the end of the list Page 210 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Step 3 Press the Load soft key in the LCD menu to load the selected mix Step 4 Confirm by pressing the Yes or No soft key Deleting a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes Step 3 Press the Delete soft key in the LCD menu to delete the selected mix Creating a New Mix Follow th
176. e of the cue and just keep recording until you exit manually using Stop Jog Rewind etc The Rec Out soft key can be set to PROG programmed exit or OPEN keep recording until manual exit The Rec Out screen button does the same When selected blue the record Out time will be obeyed When unselected grey manual exit will be used Keep Playing At the end of a cycle you may wish to keep playing in order to hear the next section of track Pressing the keep playing soft key at any time during a cycle will cause the postroll to be ignored and the system will enter normal Play mode after the cue s Out time Exporting the ADR List Clicking the Export button will cause a file to be created in CSV format containing all the cues in your ADR List E oe 7 The format is as follows 2 columns of timecode Then next column is the character default is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t I seen you before Page 69 ADR January 22 2013 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Page 70 EDITING January 22 2013 Editing Basic Concepts the Audio Clip An Audio Clip plays audio from a single Media File It may play all of that file or only part Audio Clip O04 20 08 MURIE a OO0S 0000 00 05 16 00 oo 0s Audicwcie 1 sauna p D ha Hete bana A Ha E Media file on disk the highlighted section is
177. ead but the fade is applied to the end of the clip Fade Clip If both Head and Tail are selected when you click Apply both ends of the clip can be faded at the same time Fade Across a Range If a range is present when the Apply key is clicked all clips that are wholly inside the range will be affected by it Fade Presets The system provides nine convenient fade shapes as presets These can be recalled instantly by clicking on the keypad at the left Having recalled a preset it can be applied to the Head and or Tail of the currently selected clips using the Apply button Presets A preset is a saved shape for head and tail Factory presets are provided for your use Custom presets are saved by you To load a factory preset press the Preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets The preset is loaded into the Shape graphs and can be applied to clips in the usual way Alternatively click a number in the preset pad at the left of the display 0 i 20 30 4 S b Click to load a factory preset ziedi Fade Presets To load a custom preset Step 1 Press the preset soft key Step 2 Press custom preset Page 97 EDITING January 22 2013 Step 3 Turn the Jogger Wheel and as each custom preset is displayed it is also loaded Stop when you have loaded the one you want Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display ation Trim
178. eas 199 How to Use Automation ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeees 200 Enabling Mix IteMS ccccsccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 203 MIX ING SlQlUS ienen nea 204 TOUMANI E E 208 Programmed Automation essssesssseresrsrrrren 208 Saving and Loading Mixes sssssssseresssrsnn 210 MEUN dO sanean 211 System Mix Save FUNCTION ccececeesesesenees 212 The MX MON Ussicriesevs abeetatbasieaaneninoniteituaanenes 212 PROVIGW ioi oiia cpa ate NE 214 The Utlis Me NU ssiciro tin mna 216 MIX EGIHIAG sa scevsencreeusssnosesrarnsecguna tee ANNT 216 Import Automation from Another Project 217 Automation on SCree n ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 218 Automation Curves ccccscsescssececeerenseseneneres 219 Data Storage gonca n 223 MIX ERANING saie os cs a E 223 Using the Pad to write Automation data Tutorial atid A A O PE SAEPE E O N EE cua AE E 224 PLUG INS AND REWIRE 00 226 IEF OGUICH ON aiaee ane e a 226 General Capabilities ccecsecseeeeeeeseererens 226 VST andi VST hesia a aa 226 Using VST Effects in XstreamM s s s 227 Plug in Latency and Compensation s s 228 IFISTANT OU ON irana aa EEA 229 Automation of Plug ins ccccceceeeeeeeeeeaeees 231 Controlling Plug ins on Screen ccceeeeee eee 231 Controlling Plug ins on the Pad cscsceeseees 233 Plug ins in the TEP ianen a 238 Clip based PIUG INS ccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 238 Using VST Instruments in Xstream
179. ect in the following formats e WAV e Broadcast WAV e Aif e AES 31 This consolidates your project into a file used by other manufacturers Step 1 Select the clip or clips to be exported Ranges of clips can also be selected Step 2 Click the File menu command above the Track display Step 3 Choose Export then Audio Tracks Clips Step 4 The following dialog box appears native depth z wo r Arie Sees i eee ejani E MonolStereo files automatically choose r oF s s E J al E Masa Sli anra niisiis Make your selections and click OK Page 303 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 File Type Select Wav BWave or AIF files BWave files will be exported with the timecode stamp from the Dream II timeline Export With Select Clip EQ Clip Level and or Clip Fades to render those modifications into the exported file s Normalize Normalize will examine the level in every clip you have selected find the maximum level of all the clips then show the gain increase needed to bring it up to 0 dB Then all the clips will be amplified by this amount giving you the loudest best quality signal possible while maintaining correct balance Audio Type Select bit depth and Sample Rate for exported file s Defaults to Project sample rate and bit depth Mixdown Select Entire Project to export the entire project one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Between Range to export all audio in the current range
180. ed load them By clicking the Insert Bypass icon you can bypass a specific plug in Note that other plug ins in the channel will remain inserted To bypass all plug ins use the channel Insert control which can be found in the Path Pad layout press the Path button in the Mixer Megamode it may need two presses before displaying the Insert button in the upper row of soft keys Plug in Order If more than one plug in is inserted into a channel you can change the order in which they process the audio To do this press the Plug in Order icon The following window is displayed x Insert Bypass E E m p Close Use the mouse to select one of the plug ins Click on the Move Up or Move Down icon to change the processing order Click on the Insert Bypass icon of any plug in to bypass its processing Using the Library Saving a Plug in preset in the Library is a great way of managing plug ins You can save any plug in or chain of plug ins with their current values as a Library preset This makes it very easy to load plug ins into any track or live feed partly because the Library page shows an array of named presets at the same time For instructions on using the Library see page 196 Sending an Aux to a Plug in Patch an Aux Output to the Input of a Live Feed using the Patch I O screen Use a stereo Aux and two Live Feeds if the Plug in is stereo Page 232 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Add a Plug in t
181. ed track copied to the clipboard e The special paste targets every clip that is wholly within the range on selected tracks Trim Trimming allows clips to be resized Trim commands are used to set the head and tail of clips to determine how much of the original recording is played by the clip Trimming may shorten a clip or extend a clip if it is playing less than all of the original recording This will be the case if the clip was imported with handles or if the original clip has been edited Head Trim Head and Trim Tail are the most common uses of Trim Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the Trim key if not already on Step 3 Press and release the Head key Step 4 Move the transport forward a few frames jog or play Step 5 Press Enter Page 91 EDITING January 22 2013 The head of the clip is placed at the cursor which is now shorter The effect is just like erasing the head of the clip Its sync remains as before but it starts at a later time and a later point in the audio Step 6 Jog backward a few frames and press ENTER Now the head is moved earlier revealing more of the audio You can keep jogging and pressing ENTER as long as you like until you are satisfied with the position of the head Two Handed Trimming This is a more powerful method which is worth learning Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the Trim
182. ed Mark or click the Jump To button if you want to keep the dialog open Normally marks are displayed at the top of the Edit Screen To display the mark as a vertical yellow line check the Line Marker box The middle mark below is a line marker while the other two are normal Page 48 CHANNELS January 22 2013 00 53 12 00 O0 53 13 00 00 53 15 00 Jump to Mark Hold down one of the keys Press the button which appears above the Jump Key Proj Wark Range Jump at Go To The Go To command is used to quickly locate to either a Timecode position a specific clip name or a stored Mark General Go To Usage Step 1 Press the button Step 2 Select an option from the Soft keys note Timecode is selected by default Go To Timecode Step 1 Press the button Step 2 Type a timecode address using the Numpad keys Page 49 CHANNELS January 22 2013 The number you are typing is shown on the Edit Screen If subframes are displayed type ten digits otherwise type 8 digits Numbers wrap around if you keep adding them Press Clear to reset all numbers to zero Press or to add or subtract what you have typed from the existing number Step 3 Press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere Capture Timecode Sometimes you need to capture the current timecode an
183. ed editing Using Pad Keys Channels are displayed in a sequence that includes all channel types A Link Groups is displayed as a single item This is a departure from previous Fairlight products Select i Ae ga ADR Rec o Dia Dial Dial WO l Left eri JL Fx 2 Fx 3 Tk F7 Tk 9 Tk 10 Tk 13 Tk 14 Tk 15 37 42 Tks 19 24 i Tks 31 36 2 b 43 49 Tks 49 54 Tks 55 60 Tks 61 66 Tks 67 72 This cut down section of the Pad display shows Link Groups on the lower row This channel display allows large projects to be navigated with less need for bank switching Page 36 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Track Track Track Track Track Live Live Live Live Oo ga g g5 06 1 3 5 6 Tk 92 Tk 93 Tk 94 Tk 95 Tk 96 Live 1 Live 3 Live 5 Live amp Group 7 Main 1 Sub 1 Sub 2 Sub 3 Sub 4 Sub 5 Aus 1 Aus 2 Towards the end of the Banks of channels we see Live Feeds Groups and Buses Note these two pictures are cut down from their actual size The order of display is e Tracks e Live Feeds e Groups e Main e Sub Buses e Aux Busses Press any Pad button to toggle the associated channel in and out of the selection Double press any button to make its channel the sole selection To select a range of channels press and hold down the first channel select key and double click the last channel selection key you wish to be active All other channels will be deselected The last selection you make always becomes the Current Cha
184. edia file If a pair of tracks are linked as a Link Group their contents will be exported as a stereo media file If a track contains a two channel clip its contents will be exported as a stereo media file Mix Track to a single Mono File All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a mono mix and this is recorded into a mono media file Mix Track to a single Stereo File All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a stereo mix and this is recorded into a stereo media file Single MultiChannel File all selected tracks A single file is created with multiple linked media one for each track in the export Note The description field inside a BWave file is preserved when a clip is exported as BWF The default value for the BWF originator field can now be specified See Setup gt General Preferences gt Options Exporting Video You can export the video straight from a project and automatically combine it with your choice of audio from a project To do this choose click on the File Menu and choose Export then Video This box pops up Page 305 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 e S lin por aies iv Step 1 Choose the video format into which you wish to export Step 2 Choose whether you want to export the whole project or a selected range Note to export as a Quicktime file you must have the latest version of Quicktime installed Note some file types require licenc
185. edia folder of the project Click Delete Project to remove the project from the hard disk You will be prompted to remove all the media in the Media folder Discarding Unused Media It is possible to create a number of recordings which end up not being used To remove these from your hard disk automatically select a project and use the command Setup gt Media and Project Management Discard Unused Media Empty Recycle Bins SubFalders D Fairlight Projects a Type Comment NLY Diana frango Pyxis WLY v2 0rce f 24000 clip project DRZ o frem LIDT ssaaaa Big moore DR ream ve AOD i a Frank Mix0S Zip 2 D rcli Testing New Proje 19 DR2 Dream II 1 60 0b29 Jedi New Prop ct20 DR2 Dream II 2 1 0b5 a Plugin Builder DR2 eee ee xxx File 0 Fairlight 4U Projects Plugin builder DR SortwereException DRZ Dream IT v2 0 1 New Projecta MT MT Project Very large MT MT MT Project lediz Medi EE gt List Media Discard Unused Media View Backup Projects Selected Project Discard command This command moves the unused media into a recycle bin of which there is one for each media device Specifically it removes media in the selected project s media directory that is not used by any project in the selected project s current directory It will only remove native recorded or localized media not files that have been imported from other systems The device list has a column reporting how much space a device
186. een Meters To toggle them on and off e Use the Panel ON OFF soft key in the Meters menu Setup Megamode e Use the Screen Meters button in the Setup Megamode e Click on the Mixer screen and type ctri SHIFT Space These meters can be dragged by their Title Bar to any point on the Edit Screen or Mixer Screen or to a third video monitor if your system has one installed Ya Fairlight Digital Peak and RMS Meters x 100 ETE ET Clear Max Clear Ava mu Jda I r r r Od MH mm ma 1 T e 5 T T gt T mo mo mo i C Meter set Page 250 10 METERS January 22 2013 x Choose Aux or Meter Set for 100 100 the 12 buttons above 100 100 Shows maximum value since meters opened Be Shows average value since meters opened 10 10 Selection of metering source for the Master Screen Meters e With Aux selected click Main Sub Buses B1 B2 and Aux buses A1 Az2 to toggle them on or off the meters You can add any number of buses and the system will display meters for up to eight Bus elements starting at the top of the selected buses e With Meter Set selected select one Meter Set or a number of Main and Sub buses Meter Sets cannot be added to other sets or buses Page 251 METERS January 22 2013 mo ma m J ay D q oo Msi Choose a Msa meter set here MS se 7 wh M53 Click here to define the current Define meter set
187. een erased or pasted not normally necessary as the display updates automatically Preview Plays the selected recording through the monitor system Press the same button again to stop playback ReSync Creates a clip using the selected media at the original recording timecode and on the original track Close Closes this dialog box The Escape button can also be used Importing Files Xstream has a number of features to allow the import and export of audio clips and Projects File Types DREAM II can import the following file types Video Files these can be displayed on the Pyxis track Pyxis Projects these are projects created using the program Pyxis Page 300 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 OMF Files these are files from other manufacturers ML Files these are files from older Fairlight products AES 31 Files these are files from other manufacturers AAF Files these are files from other manufacturers MXF Files these are files from other manufacturers Importing Video Files See Pyxis Track on page 258 Importing an OMF Step 1 Click on File then choose import OMF Step 2 Browse to the location of the omf and select it Press OK Step 3 The following dialog box is displayed Clip naming Nuendo 4dyvanced Standard a Remap Stereo Source Clips Fully Import Media Sub Composition Audio Data Mode Offset Timecode 00 00 00 00 Track T EQ Plugins
188. ent times It may show Meters Clip EQ parameters Fade parameters and so on Each editing mode automatically displays its appropriate Smart Pane You can also force the display of any pane or no Smart Pane at all by selecting gt at the top of the Edit Screen Range Display This area contains three timecode values associated with Editing Ranges They are respectively the Range In time Range Out time and Range duration When Range is switched off these numbers show the last range that was created which can be restored by pressing the Range On key or selecting the Range On command from the Edit Menu Track and Clip Area This area shows a selection of the available tracks and the audio clips on them A complete description of all its functions is contained in the chapter on Editing page 71 Page 7 XSTREAM OVERVIEW January 22 2013 Timecode Display This line shows the timecode at the left and right of the screen and also at the centre line or Play Cursor position To the right of the timecode display are two lights which change colour as follows Sync shows green if the system has a viable sync signal otherwise red Position shows green if the system sees a viable position signal such as timecode or 9 pin otherwise red Status View This area shows information such as the Project name and status and alert messages from the system Starting the System Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Start t
189. ep 1 Select a range of clips on one or more tracks Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press ENTER Sample Rate Conversion Sometimes the files you import are at a different sample rate than the project When this happens Dream II automatically turns on real time sample rate conversion to ensure the audio has the same pitch and duration as the original Clips subject to sample rate conversion are marked with a black sr label The quality of sample rate conversion may be varied using the dialog Setup gt General Preferences gt General Live Sample Rate Conversion f Fast High Quality Fast Puts a small load on the computer system but doesn t sound so good Very useful when there are a lot of clips to be sample rate converted or a lot of plug ins in the project Page 302 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 High Quality Sounds good but loads down the CPU If you need good quality and have lots of clips to sample rate convert you can localise the media which performs the best quality sample rate conversion and re references the clip Step 1 Select the clips that need to be sample rate converted Step 2 Issue the command Process Localise Audio Use handles if the clip has been edited and might need to be re extended Select all clips using this media before localising and the system will only produce a single piece of media which they can all reference Export Exporting Audio You can export audio from a Proj
190. ers and automatically places the selected channels on them As you select and de select channels they dynamically come and go from the faders This makes it very easy to mix a large number of channels with a small number of faders Page 193 MIXING January 22 2013 Mixer Set has two modes Dynamic and Fixed Dynamic mode is always set first It responds to every change you make in the channel selection Fixed mode can be entered later It retains the last set of channels you placed on the faders in Dynamic mode but no longer responds to changes The first 12 faders are allocated to the Mixer Set If you only have 6 faders they will all be used If you have more than 12 faders the remaining ones continue to display the contents of whichever Fader Set you have chosen So you can have some fixed allocations and some dynamic ones To toggle Mixer Set on or off Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode by holding down Mode and pressing Mixer Step 2 Press or hold down the Fader Set button Step 3 Press the Mixer Set button This puts Mixer Set into Dynamic mode The button lights up fully Pressing Mixer Set again puts it into Fixed mode Further presses will toggle it between Dynamic and Fixed modes To exit Mixer Set select any Fader Set Mixer Set Shortcuts Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the Mixer Set button This procedure can be used to get into Mixer Set and to toggle it between Dynamic and Fixed modes Yo
191. es Move knobs then press Stop Enabled controls go into read Press Play Menu twice to review what you have just written Press the Undo button to remove the new automation data Page 225 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Plug ins and ReWire Introduction Xstream provides powerful support for 3 party hardware and software plug ins via the industry standard VST VSTi and ReWire protocols General Capabilities Plug ins can be instantiated placed in Track Feeds and Live Feeds This is done as an Insert to the feed See Inserting a Plug in below You can instantiate up to 6 plug ins per feed Control of plug ins can be graphical using the mouse or fader based using fleximaps The graphical controls are supplied by each third party manufacturer of plug ins Fleximaps allow physical control of plug in parameters and this how they are automated Access to control of Plug ins is via the Plug in button in the Channel Panel or via mouse clicking on the Fat Channel in the Mixer Screen Details below VST and VSTi e4 er A v Ti ECP About VST VST Virtual Studio Technology is an audio plug in standard created by Steinberg The VST standard allows third party developers to create VST plug ins for use within VST host applications or to create VST host applications themselves The VST plug in standard is the most widespread plug in standard in use today with thousands of available plug ins The VST Hos
192. es for export Please consult your Fairlight distributor for details Export Cue Sheet You can export the clip data from your project as a comma separated CSV file To do this Step 1 Issue the command gt gt Step 2 Use the Save dialog to select a destination for the file Step 3 Press EDL Management Introduction EDL Management supports three activities associated with EDLs Edit Decision Lists produced by other editing products Capture records the material needed by the edit list from original sources such as video tape Conform edits the source audio recorded in the capture process placing it at the destination locations Page 306 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 indicated by the edit list Reconform re edits an existing DREAM II project according to a cut list usually representing a re edit of the pictures in a video project Loading an EDL The first step is to load an EDL file Step 1 At the top of the Edit Screen click File gt Import gt EDL EDL Tool x Step 2 This will cause the display of the EDL dialog e Fseaziwae A12 18 Cap Event Type Tracks Trans Reel fps Source Start Source Stop RecStart Rec Stop ai 0 re sade BFG Ha BAE 23 All Audio Track 1 C A12 ANIMAL 00 06 47 00 00 07 17 00 00 02 00 00 00 02 30 00 2 C Al 42000 OO 03 01 1F O0 035 26 09 000A SA22 O00 035 17 14 3 E A 34 BL 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 17 14 00 03 17 14 3 D A 34 CLOS
193. ese steps to create new empty mix with no automation data Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Press the New Mix soft key in the LCD menu This new mix must be saved once new data has been written Copy a Mix Between Projects Mix Carry Over allows the static snapshot and dynamic mix data from a single mix to be copied from one project to another Step 1 Step 1 Press the File button and use the Save or Load soft key to save your current mix or load a previously saved mix Step 2 Press the Carry over soft key in the File menu The Carry over key flashes when carry over is active Step 3 Close the current project Step 4 Open the destination project Step 5 Hold down a BLUE key and press File key and use the Save soft key to save the mix in the new project Mix Undo The automation system supports multiple levels of mix undo These are interleaved with audio edits making a single undo list for the whole project To undo the last edit press Undo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit since the project was opened To redo the last undone edit press redo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit that was undone To work with a list of the undo steps available do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the Undo button OR hold down the undo button A dialog box is shown with a list of the undo and redo events in the project The red items are those wh
194. ession Expansion Serato Pitch n Time FE provides the industry s finest time compression and expansion Change length without changing pitch or pitch without changing length and hear the result in real time as you jump from clip to clip Pitch n Time FE is fully integrated with Dream H s Binnacle controller allowing for fast intuitive operation Note Pitch n Time FE requires an iLok USB Security Key and a valid license Licenses can be purchased at http www serato com Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the wave key Step 2 Press the Pitch n Time soft key The Pitch n Time FE popup appears Algorithm Polyphonic Input 8437760 Samples Units Output 6328616 Capture 100 000 amp Pitch n Time FE 1 0 2006 Serato Audio Research Preview Process Close Use the keyboard and mouse to adjust parameters e Select an Algorithm o Polyphonic best suited for music o Vocal best suited for voice o Varispeed varispeed mode e Press the preview soft key or Preview button to audition your settings in real time Page 135 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING January 22 2013 e Tempo changes speed without changing pitch Use the tempo slider to set the desired tempo or press the fit range soft key to capture the current range length or press the edit soft key to edit the output duration or type a value in the Output box e Pitch changes pitch without changing tempo Use the pitch sl
195. etup gt Video Capture Mode General Preferences Locked Playhead Bars and Beats Setup Media and Project Management Instruments Flip With Video Capture Mode ON your decklink card will act as a loopthough device and will display the incoming video signal This is in contrast to its normal mode where the Decklink card displays whatever video is already on the Pyxis track To iat el s im 2 With Video Capture Mode ON you may ARM the Pyxis track and record the incoming video signal in the same way as you would record audio Encryption Video files can be encrypted as they are recorded This will prevent anyone from seeing the video without applying the password If you wish to capture to an encrypted format do the following Page 265 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Step 1 Open the dialog box at Setup System Preferences gt Video Capture Step 2 Enter an encryption password in the lower part of the page Confirm by repeating entry of the password Step 3 Capture a video file The same password must be entered to unlock encrypted video media each time the project is opened Once you have entered the password you can open any files encrypted with that password The Pyxis Window To show a window displaying your video use the command View Pyxis Display Layering Show Pyxis Track Playback Video Source Edit Workspace Locators Sort Video Locators Tracks Clip Search TimeScale
196. eview Root to be the keyboard note which original pitch is previewed Step 4 Exit the dialog by clicking the Close box in the upper right corner Note ADSR functions are available while you are previewing See AHDSR and Modulation below for details Load Grab To load the clip under the cursor into SDS press the Grab soft key The clip will be mapped to the keyboard at its original pitch positioned at the next available white key See Within Audiobase you can perform a search scroll the results and Preview them on the keyboard Just as with clips on the timeline if the SDS Preview is active the highlighted sound in the search results list will be active on the sampler for playing listening To load an AudioBase sound into the sampler press the Grab soft key For convenience there is a new SDS Preview key on the AudioBase Smart Pane and a Grab key on the AudioBase PAD layout The keyboard behaviour for Audiobase sounds works the same way as for clips Removing Samples You can remove any sample from the keyboard using the delete soft key To select a sample for deletion simply play it on the MIDI keyboard Keyboard Mapping below for more options Note the first available white key is set as follows Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences Step 2 Click the sps tab General Preferences Scrolers Meters SDS Keyboard Left Fight C6 Preview Root C3
197. g the clips are synchronised in relation to the Play Head in the same way as when they were cut or copied Fade Head Inserts a fade from the head of the clip to the Play Head If there was already a fade at the head it is replaced The curve parameters of the inserted fade are the ones that would be visible in the Cross Fade Smart Pane To view this click View gt Smart Pane Cross Fade Fade Tail As Fade Head Split Clip This command breaks clips into two pieces This will happen to all clips on selected tracks that are touched by the Play Head Trim Head This command trims the Head of the clip s touching the cursor on selected tracks The clip is trimmed at the Play Head position Trim Tail As Trim Head Nudge The command moves selected clips forward or backward by one frame If there is no range it will affect clips on selected tracks touching the Play Head If there is a range it will affect all clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Mute Clip This command toggles the Mute state of the selected clip s When a clip is muted it is shown darker and its audio is not heard If there is a range this command affects clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Page 129 EDITING January 22 2013 Name Clip Opens a dialog where you can rename clips Clip Level Opens a dialog where you can set the volume level of selected clips Add Mark Adds a timecode Mark to the time
198. g Clicks Clicks in audio media can be removed by rewriting waveform data using a simple linear smoothing algorithm Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Step 2 Select the track where the click is found Step 3 Identify the click by zooming in very close and position the click exactly under the cursor Step 4 Press the Remove Click soft key Step 5 The width soft key becomes active This should be set to match the number of samples occupied by the click To do this turn the Jog Wheel until the red range on the screen matches the width of the click Step 6 When the width is correctly set press the Enter key to execute the command Note that the click must not be in the fade in or fade out area of a clip and that the command does not work on linked clips i e Multi Channel clips Undo is available after using the Remove Click command Page 137 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES January 22 2013 AudioBase Clip Search ClipStores AudioBase and Clip Search provide different ways of managing sound effects and clips AudioBase has database capabilities which make it suitable for large scale and shared sound library capability Clip Search is more suited to fast storage of clips and groups and provides searching within the current project and attached library projects AudioBase AudioBase is a library database which allows you to search for WAV files on your Medialink2 server via a standard Windows network
199. g the Slip Sync soft key allows the audio within the clip to be slipped without changing the positions of the head and tail To do this press the Slip Sync soft key move the transport and press ENTER The audio within the clip will move by the amount you just moved the transport There are limits to slipping sync Eventually the end of the recorded audio reaches the end of the clip and after that it can go no further Nudge The nudge function slips clips by a predetermined amount of time nudge can operate on one or many tracks affecting clips that lie under the cursor or within a Range nudge can operate in fixed steps of plus or minus one frame or in Variable steps of 5 10 20 or 40 sub frames a sub frame is 1 80th of a frame Using Nudge Step 1 Press the nudge button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clips and select the appropriate track s Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr Soft keys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When there is no Range only the top layer of clips highlighted under the cursor is nudged The var and var keys move selected clips by an amount controlled by the var button Setting the Variable Nudge To set the amount that var and var will nudge the clips simply press the var button until the displayed value is suitable Nudge with A Range Follow these steps to perform a Nudge with a range selected Step 1 Press the nudge key to select Nudge mode Step 2 Use the from
200. get access to 27 macro keys Identifying Keys On some HUI controllers the key labelling may not match the list above You can find out the name of any HUI key using the following method Step 1 Start the system and load a project can be empty Step 2 Start the MSAT application Start All Programs FairlightFMC gt FMC Utils gt FMC Step 3 If you see this error message at any time click OK it doesn t mean anything is wrong x 6 Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtriviewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Step 4 Click buttons at the top of the MSAT screen so that Msg Gen is on Msg Sys is off and All Para is off as shown below Page 325 Step 5 Step 6 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 D x File View ali ter Te co a All Filter Te be cher C ee Sus Fara Fara eter L an not tll Gib FFFFE Set Set Get Test m note Par Ctrl Www est eis DB 14 52 20 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 52 24 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 52 729 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 52 33 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 52 37 gt Error from ShortHsg 5 DB 14 52 42 gt Error from ShortMsg 5 Type ctrl SHIFtT 0 then turn on Control message display using the Debug Switch Control dialog as shown below set the switch value to 1 Then close the dialog Debug Switch Control x Debug Switch Control Mag display T a Switch alu
201. ghtau com With new releases of software you ll sometimes get a new version of this manual that adds more information You can also download the latest version from Fairlight s website www fairlightau com Page 3 XSTREAM OVERVIEW January 22 2013 Xstream Overview Pr TE Patch Record Process Bus Mix Patch Edit Assign 1 I O Configuration 2 Patching connects paths in the system see page Error Bookmark not defined Inputs Analog 3 Recording see page 53 gt B CORD S i 4 Editing see page Digital Live Feeds 7 2 4 5 Processing see page 163 BUN 6 Bus Assignment assigns channels to Buses see page 161 MADI 7 Mixing see page 156 8 Bus Format mono stereo 5 1 etc see 157 gt CORD Mix Automation see page 199 Analog Digital MADI 9 Monitor Configuration 3 sets up speakers for 4 control room and studio see page 244 Monitor Config Control Room Studio s speakers Main Main Alt Alti Alt2 Alt2 Outputs B CORD amp d h Page 4 XSTREAM OVERVIEW January 22 2013 Xstream is configurable with up to 192 disk recorder tracks up to 212 physical inputs and outputs It integrates recording and editing capability with a fully featured fully automated mixing engine capable of delivering multiple final mixes in any format up to 5 1 surround In addition it provides recording and basi
202. h the mouse or scroll down to it with the Jog Wheel or step down to it with the key Step 4 Having chosen your Mark press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere While the Marks dialog is open you can do all sorts of other things to Marks like rename them change their timecode location remove them from the list and so on This requires mouse clicking and uses familiar dialogs Note double clicking with the mouse on a mark locates you there without closing the dialog This can be very useful Go To Clip A Clip is a piece of audio Clips are created by recording and editing They all have names Go To Clip allows you to display a list of clips in the project then choose one and locate to it Like this Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the clip soft key Step 3 The Clip Search dialog appears on the Edit Screen Page 51 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Track Layer StartTime End Time Bit Depth Sample Rate Native 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Trak i2 1 O1 05 1406 O01 05 1419 00 00 00 12 Ooo00000_O0000000_65B908E4_7F346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 0i 06 1408 O106 1421 00 00 00 12 OOOOO000_O0000000_65B6906E4_7F346339 24 bit 48000 Hz 10 32 Bicyde aif ne Track 12 1 0107 1409 OLO7TH22 00 00 00 12 OOOOO000_DO000000_65B908E4_
203. hat perform mix and automation related functions Record menus Red keys each one loads a set of soft keys that perform record related functions Page 19 Edit Loop Curves Menu Auto sate Liser Auw Macro L MELS ror OJ Setup menus Blue keys each one loads a set of soft keys that perform setup functions ain 1 0 Freq Group D Miz MIen Menu Mute Menu ABC 30 Ta QWERTY Puts a typewriter on the keys most of the time this is done automatically when needed CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Blue Blue acts as a modifier to other keys in the same way that SHIFT or CTRL do in other software In fact the Blue function combines the CTRL key so you can use it with familiar Windows shortcuts When the Blue key is held down you see a layout that shows what the key functions have become EE Shut Flay Last Rec Redo SMU i Again Play Range pp Edit 4 4 Loop Set Range Jump Jump Loop clip Blue Mode Enter Zoom Zoom affects the horizontal and vertical scale of the Edit Screen To change the horizontal scale hold Zoom down and turn the Jog Wheel At the same time a Number Pad appears which you can use to select a Zoom range between 1 and 21 Type the number while the Zoom button is held down then release it to change the scale Other ways to change the horizontal scale e Turn your Mouse Wheel T
204. he mix item it controls is put into Write or Trim if it is touch enabled If Touch Auto Enable is OFF the signal path and parameter must both be enabled for mix items to enter record If Touch Auto Enable is ON the signal path need not be enabled but the parameter must be e Punch in manually on enabled tracks with the rn key or punch in automatically at the Active In point using PUNCH or the PLAY key Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record e Use Prime mode and the transport Recording or ADR functions to record automation on selected Signal paths Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record Leaving Automation Record There are seven methods of leaving automation record e Press any illuminated AUTO key to take its signal path out of record Page 206 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 e Cause the transport to leave PLAY or REC using any transport command not effective if Jog Mix is on see below e When in Touch Snap mode release any fader pot or switch e Punch out manually with the out key or punch out automatically at the Active Out point after pressing PUNCH or the PLAY key see Programmed Automation This works for enabled signal paths e In Prime mode use ADR or the PLAY key to punch out e Press the All Read button in the Mixer Megamode to instantly place all mix items in Read e Press the Mix on key to disable the mix automation s
205. he Mix Menu is active To make the In and Out points active Step 1 Press the Active In button to make the automation In point active The Auto Punch key appears Step 2 Press the Active Out button to make the automation Out point active The Auto Punch key appears if not already displayed Note you do not need to activate both In and Out points See below for consequences To enter record explicitly Step 1 Press the Auto Punch Key The transport will preroll the In Point go into automation record when it reaches the In Point if active then exit record at the Out Point if active If the In Point is not active the transport will still preroll and pass it allowing you to punch in when ready by pressing the In key If the Out Point is not active the transport will go into record at the In Point then stay in record until you manually exit The transport continues to play after the Out point The punch preroll time is set in the System_Variables file To enter record implicitly Step 1 Move the transport to a location before the In point and press pLay The automation system will enter WRITE Or TRIM when the transport moves past the In point if active and return to READ Page 209 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 when the transport moves past the Out point if active Once the transport has moved over the In or Out point they are made inactive This means you can quickly audition the changes you have just recorded by
206. he host computer PC by turning on its power switch The PC will boot the Windows XP operating system and display your PC desktop Video monitor s should be powered up and displaying the Windows desktop Power on the audio interface box es SX 20 and one or more SX 48s In most installations they can be left powered on all the time and will wake up when the PC starts up and the CC 1 board initialises Power on the Xstream mixer surface Start the Xstream application by i double clicking its desktop icon by selecting it in the Start Menu under the Fairlight group If the system is correctly configured the FMC mixer application will also start automatically with Dream II system Shutdown Step 1 Step 2 Exit Xstream by selecting Exit from the File Menu or by clicking the Edit Screen close box or by the keystroke combination Alt F4 when the edit screen is in focus click anywhere on that screen to bring it into focus if necessary If a project is open the system will prompt you to save any changes that have occurred since it was opened PSS Stis The current project has been modified Would vou like bo sawe it now Mo Cancel Step 3 Click Yes if you want to save the changes in the project This may take a minute or so during which a progress bar will grow in size You may now power down the Xstream surface and shut down your PC if desired It is Page 8 XSTREAM OVERVIEW Jan
207. he reverse to the previous set Step 3 Release the Pad button NOTE While the Pad is in Edit Mode the upper fixed keys still select tracks Each time you select a track if it wasn t already selected it becomes the Current Track and its parameters appear in the pad To access tracks that are not currently shown in the Pad press the Bank button to move up in lots of 12 or 24 or hold down the Bank button and choose from the displayed buttons see below for more details Page 164 MIXING January 22 2013 ALT TrackiS Tracl Track1i3 Track192 Each encoder controls two parameters the normal parameter and the ALT parameter To access the ALT parameter the ALT button must be engaged It can operate in momentary or latched modes Gain Band 1 00 In Freq Shape HI 5H Pange HF Normal Mode ALT Mode As shown above the Pad changes its lettering to show which parameters are active Use Touch for ALT Parameters Most ALT parameters are switches while most normal parameters are continuous controls For continuous controls turn the encoder clockwise to increase the value or anti clockwise to decrease it For switched parameters touch or tap the encoder lightly but firmly to change the switch state Some switches have only two values like OFF or ON but others have many values such as the Shape parameter shown above With these parameters tapping the encoder causes them to cycle around al
208. he screen arriving at precisely the In time of the cue To turn it on use the toggle ADR ADR Display Page 67 ADR January 22 2013 Cycle The Cycle command is used to initiate ADR actions It will execute rehearsal recording and playback depending on the mode of the ADR system See below for details Preroll and Postroll It s usually necessary to set a preroll for recording This allows the recording artist to get ready for the Start Postroll is useful for hearing how the new recording fits into the track Set preroll and postroll using the appropriate fields in the ADR List Rehearsing a cue You may rehearse cues before recording them Is this needed in a system where all recording is non destructive Your call Step 1 Click the Rehearse button or press the REHEARSE soft key This puts the ADR system in Rehearse mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click Cycle or press the cycle soft key This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once switching the track from repro to input simulating the record experience Click the Stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport controls Note When the ADR is in Rehearse mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a rehearsal Cycle Recording a cue Step 1 Click the Rec Playback button or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is RECORD This
209. her path To use make a range and select the source path Copy the mix parameters from the selected path by pressing the copy soft key Now select the destination path and press the flood range soft key All the enabled parameters will be pasted to fill the range with automation values from the source to the destination Page 215 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 The Utils Menu The Utils menu contains some options that are relevant to automation It is found in the Setup Megamode Glide In Glide Out When a parameter transitions from one READ value to a new RECORD value discontinuously as when dropping in from PREVIEW to RECORD or when merging one mix into another this value is used to define a ramp from the previous data to the new data Press the Glide In soft key and use the jog wheel numeric keys or keys and press Enter to change the Glide In value When a parameter transitions from one RECORD value to a new READ value discontinuously as when dropping out of RECORD or when merging one mix into another this value is used to define a ramp from the previous data to the new data Press the Glide Out soft key and use the jog wheel numeric keys or keys and press Enter to change the Glide Out value Update Sys File Saves the following system settings to the following files Monitor_Sources TXT patching and formats of external monitor sources Speaker_Sets TXT patching and formats of all speaker sets Setup_Variable
210. hose for the enabled parameters signal paths Page 200 Notes AUTOMATION January 22 2013 You can press Auto before or after pressing Play You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing Auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the all read button See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record There are Auto buttons in the Edit Screen when the tracks are tall enough There are Auto buttons in the EVO Mix Screen Track Track 13 13 Using the In Button The In and Out buttons are available in the Punch sub menu To access this press the Punch button in the Mixer Megamode Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Select signal paths see Select Signal Paths below Press Play to move transport Press In automation enters record and starts writing Press Out automation stops writing The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters signal paths Page 201 Notes AUTOMATION January 22 2013 You can press In before or after pressing play You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing the Auto button on its fader while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the all read button The enabled signal paths and parameters remain enabled so you can enter automation record again at any time by pressing the In key Using
211. hown above the Takes display looks like this when the cursor runs through the middle of all the clips Clip Recorded Audio 5 Recorded Audio 2 Recorded Audio 4 Recorded Audio 3 Color Track Layer Start Time End Time Duration Track 2 4 O0 00 12 02 O0 00 15 05 O0 00 03 03 Track 2 3 00 00 12 20 00 00 15 11 00 00 02 20 Track 2 2 OO 00 10 29 O0 00 14 02 O0 00 03 03 Track 2 1 OO 00 12 02 O0 00 14 11 0000 02 09 As the transport moves to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes display updates at regular intervals to show the current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downwards using the Jog Wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top On off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed The Track Menu Xstream offers a group of commands that work between tracks called the Track Menu To access the Track Menu hold down Mode and press Track Menu Swap This command uses a range exclusively It swaps all layers of audio between the source and destination tracks Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Selec
212. ich have been undone already Step 2 Use the Jog Wheel to move the highlight up and down the list Page 211 Step 3 Step 4 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 You may press the Undo or Redo button at any time You may press the Enter button at any time to execute the undo or redo step that is highlighted This will also close the Undo dialog box For the purposes of automation an undo step is recorded each time the system enters or leaves write or trim or when undo data is changed by graphical curve editing System Mix Save function The System Mix function is available from the FILE menu When switched on the current mix pass will automatically be saved when the project is closed and will likewise automatically be loaded when the project is opened Step 1 Press the File button in the Mixer Megamode Step 2 Press the SYSTEM MIX ON soft key in the LCD menu The Mix Menu Press the Mix Menu key to display the Mix menu When the mix menu is active the feed and bus selection keys are used to enable specific paths for automation The From and To keys can be used to set the In and Out points for automation punch In and Out points which are displayed at the left of the Pad The available mix memory is displayed in percent The current mix name is displayed at the right of the Pad Target Copy Mix Paste Mix On STOP Touch Auto Controls whether editing targets automation data When set to audio all clip editing fun
213. ider to set the desired pitch e Press the process soft key or Process button to render your changes back to the timeline A new clip will be created and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Using VocAlign Processing Note Vocalign Project can be purchased at http www synchroarts co uk Dream II systems will recognize Vocalign Project after it has been installed and run at least once Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the WAVE key Step 2 Select two tracks for VocAlign Processing The first selected track serves as the guide track VocAlign will attempt to match the second track to the guide track Note that VocAlign cannot process clips longer than 120 seconds Dream II v0 0a35 Beta The_Firm_48tk lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File ix e s m Track Fo Ce ILs ILa grac meai emeena Step 3 Press the VocAlign soft key The VocAlign popup will appear Page 136 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING January 22 2013 W VocALign Project Oj x File Edit View Options Play Help SE x Ba OB Noma Fenin eho m r rir S a Render FL_ 7D4J2K8BQD Ready WY Step 4 Adjust VocAlign parameters or use defaults see the VocAlign manual for details When you are ready press the Align button or the align soft key A new clip will be created on the Dream II timeline and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Removin
214. ies if you have purchased it Any number of tracks on the Edit Screen can be made into MIDI tracks by default they are all audio tracks The software can e Create MIDI Tracks e Record MIDI events in realtime e Load MIDI song files e Cut and paste MIDI clips e Edit the contents of MIDI clips Setup A registry entry is required for MIDI commands to be visible Your Fairlight distributor should set this up for you when your licence is purchased The registry entry is as follows HKEY_ CURRENT_USER Software FairlightAU Dream II Global Setup midiTracksEnabled Its value must be 1 You will need a MIDI controller keyboard or other and at least one MIDI instrument to play out These must be installed before starting Dream II software File Compatibility IMPORTANT Project files containing MIDI tracks CANNOT BE LOADED by earlier software Project files created by v3 1 software that do not contain MIDI tracks can be loaded by earlier software If all MIDI tracks are converted back to audio tracks losing all MIDI data the project can be saved and then loaded into earlier software NOTE v3 0 software has a prototype version of MIDI tracks using the Add MIDI Track command in the Track Menu This is incompatible with the MIDI implementation in v3 1 and you are advised NOT TO USE IT Convert Tracks to MIDI Each non video track in the system is either audio or MIDI By default all tracks are audio You can convert from aud
215. ieved by Stem Assignment to the Boom element only of the destination Bus See Stem Assign on page Error Bookmark not defined If you are using a link group to control a premixed stem which is delivered in a different channel order it may be necessary to edit the track order on the disk recorder or to change the input patching of the feeds if the stem is played in off an external device Link Group Features Linking feeds in link groups has the following effects e Selecting one member selects the entire link group e There is only one fader for the group When the group is created the group master fader adopts the level of the first fader in the group When the fader is adjusted the member s fader levels are offset by the amount the master fader is moved in dBs e When a group is created the master pan control is centred The Spread and Rotate controls become active when the link group master is called to the Master Fader These pan parameters offer unique and flexible panning controls to multichannel link groups See The Spread Control below e When the group is created the In Line Panel and Channel Panel controls adopt the position of the first feed in the group When a rotary control is adjusted the controls of the members are offset by the amount the master control is moved Switch controlled parameters display the current setting of the first member in the group Pressing a switch with a toggled value e g Mute On Off will
216. if mostly zero values and will only get bigger when automation files are saved When the first FUF file reaches 4 GB another one is automatically created Stuffing FUFs Xstream allows external files to be dragged and dropped onto the timeline Since these files are not recorded into the Xstream MT Project they are not automatically added to the FUF files associated with the MT Project If you want to transfer the MT project and all external audio files to QDC or to another Xstream or DREAM II system select Process gt Stuff Fufs All Clips Or Process gt Stuff Fufs Selected Clips This will copy all external media into the Project s Fuf files Please note that this process can take some time depending on the quantity and size of external files that need to be stuffed Stuffing Fufs is a background task so you can keep working while Dream II is processing However you cannot save your project until Fuf Stuffing is complete When dragging and dropping files onto the Dream II timeline you may notice some files are Fuf Stuffed automatically Dream II performs Fuf Stuffing automatically when it is required for QDC compatibility for example if you drag a file larger than 4 GB onto the timeline Dream II users can also copy clips from one MT project to another In doing so the user creates a relationship between Fuf files belonging to one project and Fuf files belonging to another Using Save As with an MT file
217. ime there is an alternate fader function To activate the alternate fader function Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the Xstream surface by holding down Mode and press Mixer Step 2 Press and release the Faders To button It lights up to show the the alternate function is active To select the alternate function for the faders Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the Xstream surface by holding down Mode and press Mixer Step 2 Hold down the Faders To button After a couple of seconds a layout appears showing all the possibilities for alternate fader function Step 3 Choose one of the alternate options then release the Faders To button Faders to Aux While BLUE Faders To is active any of the Aux bus selection keys may be selected and the Aux key will be illuminated All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Auxiliary bus Bus Master faders are excluded The mMutTE key now controls the aux send ON OFF control The Panpot controls the Aux pan function if the Aux bus has larger than mono format The alternative controls may be automated and will record data for the aux bus send level pan and ON OFF parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see BLAH Faders to Reduction Bus While the Faders To layout is active Sub buses which are configured for bus reduction may be selected All channel faders now
218. increase your speed and productivity Page 17 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 bs wee Ses tT 3 RS g ANS A i g 4 A tr 4 i A INR i 4 y M d 3 y ie 5 i a i ye J Ai d 7 gt ap as Sino i ie a lt m n d g lt CAF S _ yp s 7 EnS F 7 hae wi ii EE Aans MA NEAN A Blue a Mode shows a Enter Zoom Controls Mon displays GoTo used modifier and large selection completes many how many tracks monitoring for transport layout key panel command are seen on the options location sequences Edit Screen Page 18 Mode CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Mode is the key to accessing all the system functions It works only in momentary mode Hold it down and the following layout appears Press one of its buttons as described below Gain 75 Freg Copy Quick Edit Blue Megamodes Dark green keys each one loads a complete layout of functions See page 23 for details Note that many of the important menu keys also appear in the Megamode layouts Format Audio Base Track Nudge Menu Clip Level mode Eater Edit menus Brown keys each one loads a set of soft keys that perform edit related functions m f m a _ Insert Contig Wark Setup Wi File I mpo rt MeEnL Mix menus Orange keys each one loads a set of soft keys t
219. ing format Get Ready Press the green Mon button Press the Format Setup button Choose Format Select any of the formats shown on the soft keys The system immediately switches to that format Note choosing a format wider than your current Speaker Set has no effect You cannot fold up to a higher format Choose any other mode to leave the Format Setup menu Page 246 MONITORS January 22 2013 Note Stereo and Mono compatibility are immediately available as toggles on the Stereo Comp and Mono Comp switches unless the current speaker set already has this format Configure Monitor Sources Overview The standard source for monitoring is the MAIN system bus You can choose many other sources including other system buses or External Source Sets which are used for your CD player video machine etc The system remembers the last non standard source you chose and calls it the Alternative Source This can be toggled using ALT SOURCE in the Mon layout press Mon then ALT SOURCE This guide shows you how to choose an alternative monitor source and configure External Sources Get Ready Press the green Mon button Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Choose Source System buses can be chosen for immediate listening on the picture keys To access and configure External Sources press the Source Setup button Choose any defined External Source using the Soft keys Source Config To define or change an
220. ing the session where the recording was made Once you close that project the references are gone To see a list of the media that was recorded in the current session and is now unreferenced use the mouse View gt Orphaned Media fe Orphaned Media File FL_ Reccord Test 6_al GLTOSDLYDLO D waw Record Track Record Time 1 000S a06 Duration 00 00 02 18 Path D Fairlight Au FL_ Reccord Test 5_a5 GLTOSDLXODO_C wav 5 00 05 27 26 00 00 01 2939 2 FairlightAlt FL_ Reccord Test 4 a4 GLTO9DLYDO0 Bway 4 OO 05 27 26 00 00 01 29 D 1Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 3 a3 GLTOSDLYDDO 9 wav 3 00 05 27 2726 00 00 01 2293 Ce Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 2_a GLTOSDLYDOO S way 2 OO 05 27 26 OO 00 p1 29 D 1Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 1_al GLTOSDLYOOO_ wav 1 OO 05 27 26 00 00701 29 D 1Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test _a2 GLTO9DLYDLO_F Nay 2 00 05 30 26 OO 00802 18 Ce Fairlight Alt FL_ Reccord Test 9_a4 GLTOSDLYDLO_H way 4 00 05 30 26 OO 00 02 16 D 1Fairlight Al FL_ Reccord Test amp 43 GLTO9SDLYDLO G wa 3 00 05 30 26 00 00 02 16 D 1Fairlight AL FL_ Reccord Test 10 a5 GLTO9SDLYDLO Jiway 5 00 05 30 2726 OO Om 02 18 Ce Fairlight Alt Click to sort the list by this parameter Drag headings left or right to re order the display Type a text string here to only files whose names contain that string Page 299 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 NN e xl Type Guid
221. ing the Glide Out time this is set on the utils menu Setup Megamode Programmed Automation The entire automation system can be punched into record at which time all enabled mix items will start to write automation data This can be done manually or automatically The Punch Menu All the commands described in this section can be found on the Punch Menu This is a new menu in Version 3 1 software found in the Mixer Megamode Page 208 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Manual Punch In The In and Out keys can be used to enter and leave automation record The keys can be pressed while the transport is in STOP or PLAY to manually drop in or out of Write or Trim if selected on the enabled mix items Automatic Punch In Summary You can punch in and out of automation record at pre defined In and Out points The basic steps are Step 1 Set the In and Out points Step 2 Make them active Step 3 Perform the punch explicitly using Punch or implicitly by playing over the active points Details To set In and Out points Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode and press the Mix On button to turn on automation Step 2 Move the transport to the required In point and press the From key to capture the In point The In point timecode location is displayed in the Pad when the Mix Menu is active Step 3 Move the transport to the required Out point and press the To key to capture the Out point The Out point is displayed below the In point in the Pad when t
222. io to MIDI or vice versa by selecting tracks in the Editor and issuing the command MIDI Convert to or From Midi Tracks If you select some audio and some MIDI tracks before issuing the command all the selected tracks will end up the same majority rules The audio and MIDI tracks are distinguished visually by a new pair of icons in the bar at the left Page 2 5 MIDI TRACKS January 22 2013 MIDI Audio Patching to MIDI Tracks To patch MIDI inputs to tracks and their outputs to instruments use Setup Instruments on the Edit Screen Instrument Setup l l x MIDI Track USE Audio Device Church Organ 2nd USB Audio Device OMNI Track 2 Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned OMNI Unassigned Unassigned Patching is done in three steps 1 Load an instrument and patch a controller to it 2 Patch the instrument s audio outputs to tracks or lives so you can hear it 3 Patch a controller to be recorded on a track and patch the track s output to an instrument to play it Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 On the input left side load an instrument using the Add command Choose any of your installed instruments from the dropdown menu that is displayed The GUI for that instrument will appear on the screen Now assign a MIDI controller MIDI Device In and choose the MIDI channel or OMNI that the instrument will play it will not respond to other MIDI channels from the controller The MIDI
223. ion Dream II RT Thread GUI Thread driven by CC 1 96 Channel Audio Bridge from Fairlight CC 1 Client Application Ableton RT Thread Using ReWire Devices in Xstream re qe gt id a w D A eel eo ee ell kde e e r 4 m e z Sa 5 i i a l s l _ A 7 AA n ee aM Setup and installation Step 1 Install your software as outlined by your the manufacturer Step 2 Run the software at least once in standalone mode Step 3 The software should now appear in the list of available ReWire devices Page 241 GUI Thread PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Launching a Rewire Application In order to patch a Rewire device a Rewire application must be installed first e g Reason Ableton Live Step 1 Click on Setup in the Dream II toolbar Step 2 Select Setup Instruments to launch the dialogue box Your Rewire application should appear in this list Step 3 Click on the name of the desired Rewire application so it is highlighted Instrument MIDI Device MIDI Channel Ableton Live Reason Adapted Highlight rewire application Click Edit to launch Step 4 Click on Edit at the bottom of the dialogue box Note Some programs eg Reason will launch automatically Others eg Ableton Live need to be launched manually Step 5 Open or create a project within your Rewire application demo projects that accompany the
224. ion click the button press to process your settings All pink areas in the clip will be removed retaining the grey areas Page 116 EDITING January 22 2013 NOTE After gating with the audio broken up into multiple clips As with many other editing functions in Dream II the original audio is not affected by clip gating only the clips that reference it Any audio removed by gating can be recovered using the Trim function see Trim Function under the chapter on Editing You have the choice to use the profile or the audio to calculate the levels used by the gate function Using the audio is absolutely accurate but takes a little longer to scan Replacing Audio Media As mentioned elsewhere in this manual a clip is a reference to a piece of media on disk Editing the clips is non destructive to the media it simply changes the portion of the media being played by the clip Sometimes it is also valuable to change the media played by a clip This can be done in two ways Step 1 Step 2 Replace the media of the selected clips Replace the media of all project clips using a particular piece of media at the moment Select one or more clips by the usual methods You can use All Layers to affect the clips on all layers and you can use a Range to select multiple clips horizontally in this case only clips lying entirely inside the range will be affected Issue the command Process Change Media Selected
225. is pressed and exit when the Out button is pressed e They can be used in Auto Punch operations e Their Curve displays on the Editing screen are set up when you use the Auto Curve soft key or the Curve button in the ILP Item Status Mix items can be in one of five states Read Write Trim Isolate and Preview The current state of each parameter is displayed by coloured illumination of fader knobs rotary encoders and switches plus parameter values in the ILP The five parameter states are described below Read When mix items are in Read the automation system takes control of their values and the physical position of their controls Controls are illuminated EMES A mix item can be in Read whenever any automation data has been recorded for it anywhere in the project Write Trim Mix items must be explicitly placed in Write or Trim The Write Trim key is toggled to the Write or Trim position for the whole console WRITE automation is armed for record and absolute values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated red Page 204 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 TRIM automation is armed for record and relative values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated amber In trim mode moving a control applies an offset to the values already recorded for that mix item For example in trim mode increasing a fader level by 10dB will add 10dB to the previously recorded fader levels retai
226. isplayed Sample Rate This value can only be set when creating a new project Frame Rate Can be changed at any time Normally it is best to choose the frame rate of the Master video device in your system or of the timecode being chased if any Record Bit Depth Can be changed at any time All subsequent recordings will have this depth Video Resolution This is the format of the external video reference applied to the SX 12V or SX 20 It must be set to match the incoming video signal for correct sync Pull Up Down Allows setting of Pull Up and Pull Down often used in NTSC video setups Detailed explanation below Sync Source The system sample rate is synchronised to its clock source There are many choices but normally you will use the SX20 as a sync source and lock it to whichever sync signal your studio is running Synchronization Indicators True Rate True Sample Rate shows the speed at which Xstream is running It also shows the real frame rate after adjusting for Pull Up Down setting Video Detect The Video Clock Detected indicator is green when a valid Video Clock reference is detected and red when Video Clock is missing or invalid Seeking Lock The Seeking Lock indicator is green when seeking lock and red when not in use Page 318 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Sync The Sync indicator is green when a valid Clock Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Clock Sync Source is
227. it functions It combines a number of the most used commands into one layout to reduce the number of keystrokes needed To use the Quick Edit Layout do the following Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Quick Edit Release Mode Mute Name Clip Clip Mudge Clip Head Val RS Menu keys ai Sync Tail keys Nudge Commands Trim Trim HEAD TAIL ips One touch commands Page 110 EDITING January 22 2013 Nudge Commands Mudge Sync The 1 fr and 1 fr buttons move selected clips earlier or later by one frame The var and var buttons move the selected clips by a smaller Variable amount Press the var button to cycle through the values for Variable nudging in subframes Use the Nudge sync button to toggle between nudging whole clips or nudging the audio inside the clips Trim Head Tail Trim Trim HEAD TAIL These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Trim function To use the Trim Head button Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose head you wish to trim Step 2 Press and hold the Trim Head button This will cause the head of the selected clip to extend fully Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to trim the head Step 4 Release the Trim Head button to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be trimmed at the same time Fade Head Fade Tail These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Fade function To use the Fade Hea
228. it is muted as shown below Page 220 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 04 TRA Mute When writing automation the graph is shown in red Existing automation data is shown in green allowing you to target punch out points easily D4_TRACK IN 4_TRACK IN TO DI 16 bit Note that in this case the red line continues past the cursor This shows accurately what will happen when Write is exited because the system On Stop setting is EVENT meaning the current value will be held until the next change in automation value Here is how it looks when On Stop is set to HOLD 4 TRACK IN 4 TRACK IN TODI 16 bit 0 Page 221 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 In this case the red line continues at the same value to the end of the screen because this value will be written to the end of the project Editing Automation Curves Automation data can be edited graphically using the mouse To do this click the Edit button There are two ways to edit Events and Draw Events To edit Events click on the Events button Events are shown as red squares Note that each event is a value of the parameter After an event the value stays constant until just before the next event when it ramps up or down to the next value When events are close together as shown above they are joined by a smooth line reflecting this ramp Otherwise the values are held constant and shown with a horizontal line While Events are displayed you may do an
229. ith the project audio In addition to the channel parameters bus assignments inserts and direct outs may also be recorded The Xstream automation system is designed to allow the operator to record all the static and dynamic parameter changes involved in balancing the mix of tracks played back from the disk recorder and live feeds from external sources Mix moves may be recorded on one or more parameters or channels ata time More moves may be added with each pass resulting in complex and detailed mixes that can be played back identically every time the project and mix are loaded This chapter does not cover basic operation of the mixer Refer to the chapters on Patching and Routing Faders On Screen Mixing and The InLine Panel for a complete overview of mixer operation Automation Basics below provides an intro to the fundamentals of the automation system Example procedures are detailed later in the chapter Automation Basics Write Trim and Read In Automation we use the terms Write Trim and Read e Write means to record absolute values of parameters e Trim means to record changes to stored values of parameters e Read means to play back the parameter values that have been written The word record is used in this chapter to mean Write or Trim The Mix Item A mix item is one parameter for one signal path Examples are Track 47 Main Bus Fader Level Live 11 EQ Band 1 Q factor Sub Bu
230. kbox is selected and choose the desired monitor using the Monitor Index drop list The monitor can be the same as your Editing Screen but this can be inconvenient Be very careful not to choose the screen used by the Xstream Center Section this is awkward to reverse Use the Identify button to show the monitor numbers on the physical screens These may not be the Same numbers shown in the Windows Screen Resolution dialog Now you may restart Dream II If you choose EVO Mixer Screen it will appear on the nominated monitor EVO Mixer Screen was originally designed to work on a 1600 x 900 monitor displaying 40 faders If your monitor is taller than 900 pixels the faders will be taller but everything else will look the same If it is narrower or wider than 1600 pixels it will display fewer or more faders Page 166 MIXING January 22 2013 The EVO Mixer Screen 00 41 17 15 Automation l l l section Bus Faders and meters Sub 5 SUD 3 Sub 5 Channel Scroll Bar The EVO Mixer Screen shows only those Live Feeds which have inputs patched plus one more ready to patch Similarly VCA Group faders are shown only for groups with members Scrolling Scrolling of the mixer screen can be done by e Dragging the Scroll Bar with the mouse e Holding down ctrl and pressing the Xynergi Bank buttons In addition the screen can be made to autmatically scroll to show the current channel To set this up do the following Step 1
231. ks Step 1 Select the tracks where the automation is to be displayed Step 2 Click the Display button or press the Display soft key in the Auto Curves menu Page 219 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Step 3 Select the parameter to be displayed use either the pull down menu or a preset The pull down menu can also be accessed using the Target soft key in the Auto Curves menu Note that each track may show its own selected parameter The Display button is also used to turn the curves off To remove the display of automation curves Step 1 Select the tracks where the automation is to be displayed Step 2 Click the Clear button or press the Clear soft key in the Auto Curves menu Presets Presets are used to quickly access a particular parameter The first six buttons are provided with factory presets but you can replace them with your own To apply a preset simply click on it when the Display button is selected To create a preset Step 1 Turn Display on if necessary Step 2 Select a parameter to be displayed using either the pull down menu Step 3 Click the Save button Step 4 Click a preset button Step 5 The system will request a name for the preset You may use the suggested name or choose your own The Curve Display Fader Level Automation data is shown as a green line with the name of the parameter to the right of the cursor For switched parameters like Mutes the line is shown high when the channel is on and low when
232. l their possible values then start again Multi Rel MULTI allows you to change mixing parameters on many paths at the same time When Multi is Off the Pad controls only the most recently selected path which is called the Current Module Pressing MULTI changes its display to MULTI REL relative All changes made with the Pad now apply to all selected signal paths Changes made with rotary knobs are applied relatively i e values amongst the signal paths remain different but rise and fall together But values are clamped when they reach the upper or lower limit Changes made with switches are applied absolutely even if values amongst the selected signal paths are different at the start Page 165 MIXING January 22 2013 Take care with Multi It s very powerful but also quite dangerous It s a good idea to switch it off as soon as you ve finished using it Screen Mix Controls Introduction In V3 0 software Fairlight software gained a new mixer screen By default it is displayed in preference to the old one but you have a choice The old screen is called FMC and the new one is called EVO Mixer Screen Choosing Your Mixer Screen V4 0 software enables this new mixer screen by default however it can be specifically enabled or disabled from within the Themes setup dialog in Setup gt General Preferences Themes EVO Miker Screen W Monitor Index 2 To enable the Evo Mixer Screen ensure that its chec
233. l may be automated and will record data for the boom level parameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Faders To under Automation While Faders To is active the parameters controlled by the individual control elements Fader Panpot Mute Switch are recorded into the automation as usual The Enable buttons associated with those controls are used to enable the currently controlled parameters not the normaly controlled ones The Library Introduction The Library provides storage for Equaliser Dynamics Plugins whole Channel presets or complete Xstream snap shots Up to 100 of each type of preset can be stored These presets can be recalled and applied to any signal path in any project To access the Library menu press the Lib button in the Mixer Megamode The Mixer Screen also provides a Library page where presets can be selected and applied to channels Page 196 MIXING January 22 2013 Dynamics Plug in The Library page is shown above with EQ selected The EQ presets are shown in the upper left section of the window Presets Equaliser A library of 100 equaliser settings is provided Each equaliser preset stores all the parameter settings of the equaliser section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the EQ soft key in the Library menu to select equaliser presets Dynamics A library of 100 dynamics settings is provided Each dynamics pre
234. larm car disarm car a fro T117 Alarm car disarm car afro T217 2 6 fl j l j j 3 Alarm car set car alar from T1 16 r Slarm car set car alar from T2 16 askd4car from track 1 in 5a askd car askd4car from track 2 in 5A askd4car Auto 91 old cutlass from T150 Auto 91 old cutlass from T151 4uto 91 old cutlass from T152 Auto 91 old cutlass From T153 Auto 91 old cutlass From T1 54 Auto 91 old cutlass From T155 Auto 91 old cutlass From T1 56 Auto 91 old cutlass from T1 57 4uto 91 old cutlass from T158 Auto 91 old cutlass from T159 Auto 91 old cutlass From T1 60 Auto 91 old cutlass from T1 61 Auto 91 old cutlass From T250 4uto 91 old cutlass from T251 Auto 91 old cutlass From T252 Auto 91 old cutlass From T253 Auto 91 old cutlass From T254 Auto 91 old cutlass from T255 Spam Suto 91 old cutlass from T256 agga Auto 91 old cutlass from T257 Auto 91 old cutlass From T258 Auto 91 old cutlass from T259 tem2 R i 1i M4BS f miTk3_N Auto 91 old cutlass from T260 Auto 91 old cutlass from T261 4uto crash car approac fr T183 Auto crash car approac fr T283 Auto crash car off ram fro T1 86 Auto crash car off ram fro T286 4uto crash car skid an fro T1 169 uto crash car skid an fro T1 170 4uto crash car skid an fro T2169 nn Miser O aia Wee e L ne al z z
235. le Dream II does not include a MIDI sequencer VST Instruments can still be played live through the system This can be useful for e Foley using a VSTi sampler e Live musical performance e Tuning vocals with a VSTisampler and MIDI controller with pitch wheel e Live effects triggering with a VSTi sampler VSTi s can easily be recorded to tracks or inserted on Lives depending on your needs ReWire About ReWire ReWire is a software protocol jointly developed by Propellerhead and Steinberg It enables remote control and data transfer among digital audio editing and related software Originally appearing in the ReBirth software synthesizer in 1998 the protocol has since Xstreamlved into an industry standard The ReWire Mixer The ReWire protocol is designed to allow a number of ReWire Clients to communicate with a single ReWire Mixer Only one ReWire mixer can be active at a time Dream II is always the ReWire Mixer The ReWire Mixer can accept up to 256 inputs from each of the connected ReWire clients Dream II currently supports 96 of these ReWire inputs When a ReWire Mixer and ReWire Client are connected together transport controls and position information are automatically transmitted in both directions between the Mixer and Client s Page 240 PLUG INS AND REWIRE Diagram of a running ReWire session ReWire DLL GUI Thread Engine January 22 2013 Client Application Reason RT Thread Mixer Applicat
236. letes profiles if they have not been used for a certain number of days To control how many days use the command Setup gt General Preferences Projects Page 292 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Scrallers Audio Plugins Autosave M Load Last Project on Startup D Profiles Delete Profilde after fao The default is set at 90 days but you may change that to any time you like Revealing the Project File To display a Windows Explorer Window containing the currently loaded project use the command File gt Reveal Project File Backup Files Each time a DR2 file is saved an optional backup of the previous saved version can be made This will only happen if your system is set up correctly To enable backup saving issue the command Setup General Preferences and go to the Projects tab General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Aubosave Load Last Project on Startup D Set the number of backups you would like to keep The system default is 5 which means the 5 most recent saved versions of your file will be retained Automatic File Saving Automatic File Saving allows you to save your project automatically at regular time intervals To set this up issue the command Setup gt General Preferences and go to the Projects tab
237. line This can be used for location either by jumping or by locating to Marks They can also be named To see a list of Marks rename or locate to them click view gt Marks Jump to Mark Moves the transport to the next or previous timecode Mark Jump to Point Moves the transport to the next or previous head or tail of clips on selected tracks Display Layering When clips are placed on top of each other only the uppermost is heard or at most a crossfade between the top and second layers The software allows you to see all the layers by selecting Display Layering from the View menu or by double pressing the takes button in the Editor Megamode Display Layering Locators Tracks p Video Track Clip Search Statistics Performance Background Tasks The layers of clips are shown on all tracks with the clips becoming thinner as needed to fit the available Space Page 130 EDITING January 22 2013 MRIG ATL ATT OOS 00 00 j ee IMG_0419 IMG O41 IMG 0419 The mouse can be used to change the order of clips To do this simply click and drag a clip from one level to a higher or lower level Changing levels in this way can be combined with dragging a clip to a different track or timecode Note that there is always a space at the top of each track equal to the width of one clip This is to allow room for you to drag a clip into the top position To prevent a clip from changing its s
238. lip Head or Tail as opposed to quickly pressing and releasing them opens a layout displaying the group of commands that can act on a Clip a Head or a Tail respectively When a Range is present the Clip button displays commands that can act on a Range For example holding down Clip displays the commands that can be executed on a clip Mute Mame CLIP CLIP Holding down the Clip 4 button displays most of CLIP the things that can be done to a clip Copy Level Split CLIP CLIP Track Up Down This is a quick way of moving the track selection up and down To use it press the Track Up Down button then type a number on the Numpad or use the Jog Wheel When you release the Track Up Down button the reselection is complete Range On Off The range is a selected timecode region which may be targeted by edit commands This key toggles the range off and on When toggled on the Range uses the In and Out points that were present when it was toggled off Ranges are made with the From and To buttons next to the Range button or with the mouse Quick Editor This layout provides one button access to the most commonly used edit commands Page 24 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Mute REE Clip lip Nudge SYAC Jog pE Range Level On Trim Trim Split HEAD TAIL Clips Common Edit commands Track Range Up Down On Off Add Mark This layout provides one button access to the most commonly used edit commands
239. lip like object Only mouse editing is available in this window Note NO AUDIO OR VIDEO PLAYBACK OCCURS WHILE THE MIDI NOTE EDITOR IS OPEN Page 278 MIDI TRACKS January 22 2013 The Edit Events button toggles the Edit Screen between the MIDI Note Editor and the normal Track Display MIDI Events Play head Current length of MIDI clip being edited The Play Head is set to Unlocked when you enter the MIDI Note Editor This is to allow easy editing of MIDI events while in Play The lighter background shows the current length of the MIDI clip Notes can be outside this area if you have trimmed the original MIDI clip or copied its tail etc You can edit notes inside and outside the area The notes outside the area cannot be heard in the MIDI Note Editor or the normal Track Display Notes can be dragged horizontally in time or vertically in pitch Ranges of notes can also be selected with a mouse lasso marquee and dragged horizontally or vertically Notes dragged outside the limits of the MIDI clip will not be heard after editing but they are not erased The Note Editor Smart Pane seee se jam oan van ma mava a a aa Commands in the Note Editor Smart Pane are issued by clicking on the buttons Notes can be selected by moving the transport over them like audio clips In addition you can select a range of notes in time and in pitch with the mouse lasso The commands are described in detail below Page 279 Edit Events MID
240. low 3D formats In this case you would set speaker positions including a Down Up parameter for the third dimension and the system will display and enable a set of Down Up pan controls Bus Element one output from a Bus e g Left or Center Buses may have any number of elements up to 24 Note the Xstream Monitoring system has eight channels so buses with more than eight elements must be monitored using special control setups The system provides a fixed number of elements e g 54 or 72 depending on your operating licence These elements are consumed by the buses according to their format e g a Stereo bus uses two elements while a 5 1 bus uses 6 Bus Types Xstream supports four types of buses MAIN The main mixing destination for the system often used to create the final product of a project Cannot be turned off Page 156 MIXING January 22 2013 Sub Buses 1 to 8 Sub Buses are extra buses to which channels can be assigned In turn they can be assigned to feed into the Main bus Fader send the same levels to all Subs and Main at the same time When preparing mixes in multiple formats simultaneously e g Stereo and 5 1 Sub Buses can be configured as Reduction Buses which allow different levels and panning to different formats For details see Setting Bus Format later in this chapter Auxes 1 to 12 Aux buses are typically used to create independent mixes for effect sends and for headphone mixes The sends to
241. lowing illustration clip layering has been turned on double press the takes button or View Display Layering Page 98 EDITING January 22 2013 Induced crossfade note lower curve No induced fade lower fade overlaps XFade New Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Xfade method creates the trim overlap at the same time as the crossfade The resulting crossfade is centred around the cursor This work is done in the Xfade dialog To open it e Press the Make Xfade soft key or e Issue the command Fades gt Xfade The Xfade dialog allows you to specify a Duration X Point expressed as a and X Level in dB Clicking the xfade button or pressing Enter completes the operation Page 99 EDITING January 22 2013 Simple Example a butt edit 00 00 1008 02 00 O00 Oe 1 m eS 1 3 6 10 15 20 0 When the Xfade dialog is opened it shows the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap As you increase the Duration the yellow area widens After you press the crossfade is built around the cursor position Second clip Note the crossfade is not symmetrical about the cursor because X point was greater than 50 Page 100 EDITING January 22 2013 A Few Rules Xfade can work on multiple tracks It will try to create crossfades of equal length on all selected
242. m II 10 D Fairlight4U Projects New Project9 Media ChannelTest48 Plugin builder DR2 XXXXX xxx File Ds FairlightAU Projects Plugin builder DR2 NjA SoftwareException DR2 Dream II 10 New Project9 MT MT Project NjA very large MT MT MT Project NjA D Fairlight4U Projects Media Floyd 96kHz D FairlightAU Projects BusTest Frank 06 D FairlightAU Projects BusTest Media Frank MixO1 D Fairlightau Projects BusTest Frank Mix04 D Fairlightau Projects BusTest Media Frank Mix05 D FairlightAU Projects PluginPhaseTest48 Me Hubble Briefcase D FairlightAU Projects PluginPhaseTest48 B Javanese b Nii Fairlinhhal hPrpierkei Ph ininRercTect4e Tj jLazy Days 4 Localise test v Stop Scanning Reveal Folder List Media Discard Unused Media J view Backup Projects While this pane is open click on one of the devices shown above and its folders will be displayed Now you can select folders and click Stop scanning selected folders Page 297 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Clicking Reveal folder will open a Windows Explorer window showing the selected folder and its contents Double clicking a folder in the list of Scanned Folders will display its subfolders if any in the Subfolders window and the projects if any contained inside it in the Projects window Select a project in the right hand list then click List Media in Project to display a new window containing all media in the M
243. marked with an R will not be recorded even if they are selected Each time the system performs a recording the events that successfully record are automatically marked this way You may also click in the checkbox for any event to mark or unmark it manually Capture Settings Page 308 A F1 DLC O O OOOO Eee ee DURU L Hd Al SP oh D0 16 5524 00 16 55 02 es 45 34000 18 7 7 18 28 167 34 CLOSE 00 48 20 ze 1 00 48 26 rh A E me en 3 D A 34 1 CLOSE 00 46 1 14 OO 348 37 4 C A1 BL 00 00 00 00 O0 00 00 C D Al F SSEP33 00 14 38 1272 00 16 55 1 5 C A 34 CLOSE 00 4724 12 00 48 2601 C Al SSEP33 00 16 55 75 00216 552 D Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Handles you can capture more audio than indicated by the EDL event This can be very useful for adding fades or capturing ambience around the event for use in smoothing Preroll sets the time that the source machine will run up to the recording Set this value to suit the type of source machine being used Typically tape based machines require at least 3 seconds to lock properly Postroll sets the time that the source machine will keep running after the recording Set up Patching Connect the source machine outputs to some of your DREAM II inputs and use the Patch I O page to patch them through to the recording tracks The Patch I O page is discussed in detail in Patching Signal Paths on Page Error
244. mation graphs All channels are displayed on the Mixer Screen They are fixed in width and can be scrolled from side to side Number of Tracks on Edit Screen Using Buttons Select the number of tracks to display by pressing or holding down the Bank button Page 30 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Then select from the view buttons that appear Wt l Ei M j Ei w j Ei M j Eyy 1 tk 2 tks 4 tks it j Eiri fi l Erir W l Eir 16 tks 4 Tks 49 ts it j Eyy W j Eyy M l Ey 96 tks 192 tk All tes Using Jog Wheel Hold down the BLUE key and turn the Jog Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Using Mouse Wheel Hold down the ctri key and turn the Mouse Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Centered Track Display A further option for track display automatically places the current track most recently selected in the vertical center of the Edit screen with the chosen number of tracks distributed above and below To adopt this option select the checkbox at Setup gt General Preferences Display Centers on current track Automatic View of Selected Tracks Edit Set Choosing Edit Set causes the Edit Screen to display only selected tracks and this updates dynamically as you select and deselect them To turn on Edit Set Hold down the BLUE key and press the Edit Set button To exit Edit Set do the same again The track display reverts to its previous fixed number of tracks
245. mation from Another Project on page 217 Force Solo During Import You can force the audio to be audible only on selected tracks of your Library project as follows Step 1 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Step 2 Hold down the solo button Step 3 Press the Follow Lib soft key until the label goes to ON Step 4 Release the Solo button Step 5 Press exit Gating Clips The Gate Clips function is a rough but quick and useful way to remove unwanted silence or near silence from clips Using the Gate Clips Function First you will need to select the track s using the track feed keys and select the clip s either by selecting a range or by parking the playback head over the desired clips You are now ready to perform the Gate Clips function To do this Step 1 Hold Mode and select Basic Edit Page 115 EDITING January 22 2013 Step 2 Press the button The gate preview window is displayed automatically Step 3 Move any of the Or select the Or soft keys and turn the See below The threshold controls the level below which audio will be removed The grey areas show that will be erased by the gate The Tail Handle adds extra audio of the length you choose AFTER the level has dropped below threshold The head handle adds extra audio of the length you choose BEFORE the level drops below threshold Step 4 When you are happy with the amount retained versus the amount removed from the graphic representat
246. mecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording MTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that Xstream will chase MIDI Time Code entering the MIDI In port on the SX 20 The settings are identical to those for LTC Chase Machine Control Indicators Name Name of the 9 Pin Device Servo LEDs The left Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has servo lock The right Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has sync lock For correct operation with 9 Pin devices both LEDs should be green Timecode Displays the current timecode position of the external device Status Displays the device status Offset Displays the device offset Asm Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Assembly Edit Mode Inh Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Record Inhibit mode Ref Indicates the 9 Pin device is receiving a valid external sync reference Timecode Generator The LTC and MTC generators are independent of the machines controlled from the Smart Panel The checkboxes shown below are used to turn these on and off Page 316 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 LTCJMTC 00 00 00 00 The timecode generators have their own offset field shown above When the In Stop checkbox is ticked a repeated timecode frame is generated when the transport is Stationary Otherwise timecode is generated only in Play MIDI Timecode is always output from the MI
247. meter the ALT button must be engaged It can operate in momentary or latched modes Gain Band 1 00 In Freq Shape HI 5H Pange HF Normal Mode ALT Mode As shown above the Pad changes its lettering to show which parameters are active Use Touch for ALT Parameters Most ALT parameters are switches while most normal parameters are continuous controls For continuous controls turn the encoder clockwise to increase the value or anti clockwise to decrease it For switched parameters touch or tap the encoder lightly but firmly to change the switch state Some switches have only two values like OFF or ON but others have many values such as the Shape parameter shown above With these parameters tapping the encoder causes them to cycle around all their possible values then start again Bank The Bank button is used to page through groups of tracks and other paths in the Pad There are several ways to use it 1 Press and release Bank to advance the track numbers by 24 or sometimes 12 2 Hold down Blue and press Bank to access the first Bank i e the one containing Track 1 Page 15 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 i I Mute Cleave f B F Ovlap Paste Split Fill ear Spec Clip Blue Key Bank Key 3 Hold down Bank to display a layout containing many choices Bank ank Bank Bank 2 3 4 5 Half Bank n Mode Enter Choose Number of Control Video Track Half
248. meters for automation Examining this line CID_SW_MACKIE_ STOP CID_SW_STOP we see that the first part is the HUI stop key and the second part is the Dream II soft key This will cause the HUI stop key to work on Dream II There are some HUI keys not mentioned in this remap file They are listed below CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_SHIFT CID_SW_MACKIE_CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 CID_SW_MACKIE_F3 CID_SW_MACKIE_F4 CID_SW_MACKIE_F5 CID_SW_MACKIE_F6 CID_SW_MACKIE_F7 CID_SW_MACKIE_F8 CID_SW_MACKIE_MIDI_T RACKS Page 324 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_TRACKS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_INSTRUMENT CID_SW_MACKIE_AUX CID_SW_MACKIE_BUSSES CID_SW_MACKIE_OUTPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_USER CID_SW_MACKIE_OPTION CID_SW_MACKIE_SAVE CID_SW_MACKIE_UNDO CID_SW_MACKIE_CANCEL CID_SW_MACKIE_SOLO CID_SW_MACKIE_DROP CID_SW_MACKIE_CYCLE CID_SW_MACKIE_DISPLAY_SMPTE You may add any of these to your remap file and assign them to any Dream II key For help with Dream II key assignment please consult your Fairlight customer support organization Remap to Macros One easy way to get more power from HUI keys is to map them to your macros An example of a mapping line that does this CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_M_1i CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_BANK_1 Using macro and bank assignments you can
249. missing or invalid Progressive Detect SX 20 supports both Progressive and Interlaced clocks If the Progressive Clock Detect indicator is green a Progressive Clock reference has been detected and is being used as the primary sync reference Clock In Range The Clock In Range indicator is green when the Clock reference is in range and red when the clock reference is out of range Position Sync When synchronising with an external machine such as a video machine audio recorder or digital audio workstation a positional source allows the machines to tell each other where they are The Position Sync Source indicator is green when a valid Position Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Position Sync Source is missing or invalid Synchronization Details Xstream can track the position and motion of external transports such as a video tape recorder timecode striped audio tape or a timecode generator The disk recorder will play in time with the Master Timecode source so that sound and picture coincide Position This is an absolute location reference to a sequence of pictures or audio It is used to determine whether the disk recorder is playing the right part of its Project For video position reference is usually provided by 9 pin Sony protocol from an RS 422 port For audio tapes LTC is normally used though 9 pin is also a possibility Motion The motion of an external machine is a measure of its speed and the
250. n In the channel listens to its Insert Return otherwise the Channel listens to the straight through path The Insert Send on the other hand is always active though it must be patched somewhere before it can be heard Note Insert sends and returns are only heard if patched to physical outputs inputs or to other paths Sends can be sent to the input of any path in the system and returns can come from the output or send of any path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Page 176 MIXING January 22 2013 Panning Dream II supported surround formats are Stereo LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 Panning IN OUT Boom send ON OFF While operating the pan controls the Pad gives a visual representation of the pan position and divergence A complex example is shown below Panning of 6 way Link Group showing Rotation and Divergence Basic Panning Use the L R and F B controls for basic panning If the Main Bus format does not have surround channels the F B control will still be shown but will do nothing Spread Only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix Diverge Spreads the signal of an individual feed across more of the adjacent loudspeakers making the perceived size of the sound source larger Rotate Rotate controls the left right and front back pan control to rotate the surround mix around the centre of the room
251. n held down Turning the control also works Toggles can be labelled to show the two values of the parameters they affect e g On Off In Out Pre Post etc With many plug ins these values have been preset at the factory To change these or set your own values see Plug in Editor below Multi Switch Many parameters have multiple specific values For example the release for a compressor may be given as fast medium slow instead of having a value in milliseconds In this case the appropriate control is a 3 switch A Multi Switch is defined as having a number of positions from a 3 switch to a 10 switch With normal Multi Switch controls turning the pot advances the parameter through the possible switch values showing a corresponding number in the Pad These numbers can be changed to text values by editing see below With ALT Multi Switch controls switch positions can be advanced just by touching the control with the ALT button held down Turning the control also works Page 233 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Control Pages Many plug ins have too many controls to fit in the Pad To handle this multiple pages of controls can be built To switch between pages press the soft keys below the Pad pages 1 to 3 and above the Pad pages 4 to 6 To select which controls go on which page use the Plug in Editor see below Graphical Display To display Plug in graphics in the Pad area press the Plug in button a second time
252. n selected tracks Using a Range If a range is present the fade head command applies the Head Duration field value and the fade tail command applies the Tail Duration field value to all red clips those wholly inside the range on selected tracks Using Soft Keys Advanced fade editing can easily be performed using the soft keys Del Head Removes zeroes the fade at the head of the selected clip s Del Tail Removes zeroes the fade at the tail of the selected clip s Capt Head Copies the Duration X Level and X Point from the head of the selected clip into the Smart Pane to use with other clips Capt Tail Copies the Duration X Level and X Point from the tail of the selected clip into the Smart Pane to use with other clips Dur Head Moves focus into the Head Duration field in the Smart Panel From there you can Jog the value before pressing Enter to apply it to the selected clip s Dur Tail Moves focus into the Tail Duration field in the Smart Panel From there you can Jog the value before pressing Enter to apply it to the selected clip s Range Head The idea is to take a range full of edited clips and make a single Fade In across all of them This works by first rendering the range into a single clip then applying the Fade Head values shown in the Smart Pane Range Tail As for Range Head but with the Tail of the rendered range Make Xfade Opens the Make Xfade dialog described below at page 99 Presets Preset
253. nal path panner The display always shows a 5 1 sound field as the panning information for any path can be applied to any format bus to which it is assigned The red circle indicates the current pan position If a link group has been called the pan display shows a red circle for the pan position of each member and a yellow circle for the position of the virtual link group master When diverge is applied a white circle represents the perceived image size e When a bus is called the output box displays the output patching showing each bus element and the user and system names of the physical outputs to which they are connected Additional Mixer Screens Mouse Control Every switch and control in the Mixer Screen may be changed using mouse clicks For switches this is simply a case of clicking on them to toggle their values For faders the knob must be clicked and dragged up or down While you are doing this the current value is displayed For rotary knobs as in the EQ Zoom panel shown below first click and hold near the center then drag the mouse in a ring around the knob A tooltip shows you the current value Click the up down buttons for fine change Click here Then drag the mouse around the knob Box shows the current value Hover over any knob and use the mouse wheel to change its setting Double clicking on any fader gain or aux send knob sets its value to 0 GB Mouse Wheel Control The mouse wheel can
254. nction To use Jog Level Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose level you wish to trim Step 2 Press and hold the Jog Level button Step 3 Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the level trim displayed in the dialog box At the same time the clip waveform will change amplitude Step 4 When ready release the Jog Level button to apply the level change Note Clips on multiple tracks can be level adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected copy copy Copy Head Tail These keys copy the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for copy tail is listed below Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to copy and paste Step 2 Press and hold the copy tail button This will cause the tail of the selected clip to display a ghost Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to paste the tail If desired select another track to be the paste target but keep holding the copy tail button down Step 4 Release the copy tail button to make the edit Page 113 EDITING January 22 2013 Note Clips on multiple tracks can be copied and pasted at the same time Cut Head Tail These keys cut the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for cut tail is listed below Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wish to cut and paste Step 2 Press
255. nctions Press the Handle soft key then change the displayed number of frames by typing on the Numeric Keypad or pressing the and buttons Press the Handle soft key again to accept the currently displayed value The maximum value is 30 frames if you type a number larger than 30 the system will truncate it back to the most recent digit You can also change the Handle size by selecting Setup Record Settings and changing the number in the Handle group Note if the transport has not been rolling for as long as the handle before you issue the record command the system will create a shorter handle Auto Name Clips Overview Every clip is given an automatic name when you record it This name consists of a seedname and a number The seedname is applied first then a number is appended incrementing by one for each new clip Each Track has its own seedname You can change the seedname for each track and also set the starting number at any time Press the name menu button in the Edit Basic Megamode or in the Mode display to display naming soft keys Select the track s whose seednames you want to change Page 58 RECORDING January 22 2013 Press the seedname soft key to display the seed name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then Tab or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it Using the Mouse The Seed Name dialog can also be accessed at any time by selecting Tracks Set Record
256. nd double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Press and release trim head The head of the clip is trimmed back to the cursor location Jog backwards a bit and press Enter The head is extended to the new position You can do this as many times as you like This time press and hold trim head The system exposes the whole head of the original recording While holding down trim head Jog over the exposed audio and choose where to trim it Release trim head when ready The clip is trimmed to your current position Editing on Multiple Tracks Overview Most editing operations work on multiple tracks at the same time All the red clips or parts of clips are affected This guide will show you how to select tracks Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Operation The Pad displays 24 or 12 tracks depending on circumstances Press a Track button to toggle it in and out of the Track Selection Use Bank to access blocks of tracks To select just one track double press its button To select a range of Tracks hold one Track button down and double press another Page 74 EDITING January 22 2013 To slide the current track selection up and down hold the Track Up Down button and turn the Jog Wheel To move the current track selection to a specific starting track hold the Track Up Down button and type a number on the Numpad then release Track Up Down
257. nd tail commands plus the Slip Clip command work as expected In addition the clips can be mouse dragged individually or in ranges and edited with QWERTY shortcuts in the same way as audio clips Each copy of an original MIDI recording is independent so if MIDI Note Editing see below is used on one of them the other one will not change MIDI clips cannot be pasted on to audio tracks or the video track nor vice versa Names can be added to the MIDI clips then changed if desired using either the Name Clip command from the Xstream Editor Megamode or the Rename command in the screen Edit menu MIDI Note Editing The system will only note edit MIDI clips containing a single MIDI channel If you have recorded or imported notes from multiple MIDI channels into one clip you can separate them using the command MIDI Separate MIDI Notes by Channel The system creates one clip for each channel and places them on the tracks below the selected one For this to work there must be sufficient MIDI tracks to take all the clips MIDI clips can be edited in detail using MIDI Edit MIDI Notes Another way to do this is view gt Smart Pane MIDI Events then click the Edit Events button Either way one MIDI clip at a time can be edited the one on the current track blue name and blue tab at left under the cursor the clip must be red MIDI Note Editing opens a piano roll editor where each MIDI event note ON note OFF is shown as a c
258. ndividual Sound Files Sound files of various types can be imported directly into your Dream II project These include the following MP2 MP3 WAV BWAV AAC and more To import one use Windows Explorer or My Computer to locate the file then drag and drop it on to the Dream II Edit Screen The file will be placed at the cursor position or in the range on the track where you drag it unless you use the options below Found at Setup gt General Preferences Options Place Files at Embedded Timecode Place Files on Embedded Track T BWA MF I BWA Mpeg Quicktime Place Files at Embedded Timecode Some audio files carry a timecode with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes itto be placed at that timecode no matter where you drag it with the mouse Place Files on Embedded Track Some audio files carry a track number with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes itto be placed on that track no matter where you drag it with the mouse Importing Multiple Sound Files If you select multiple files in the Windows Explorer or My Computer dialog you can drag and drop them all to the timeline By default the files will be placed head to tail along the track where you drag them If you hold down the ctri key while dragging the files they will be placed on successive tracks at the same timecode point Individual Localisation Individual clips can be localised as follows St
259. never you touch controls around the Xstream Pad To enable automatic display Step 1 Select the Utils menu in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the zoom soft key until its label reads ON Step 3 Select your Zoom hold time using the Hold soft key The Pad controls determine which Zoom control is displayed Touching one of them will display the Zoom panel for the length of time set in the Hold soft key The Equalizer Panel Library Page 182 MIXING January 22 2013 The Dynamics Panel DYNAMICS Library The Pan Panel Track 19 Library Use the mouse to move the red dot around the pan field Page 183 MIXING January 22 2013 The 3D Panner There is also a 3D display for pan as shown below Track 14 The yellow ball is used when a Link Group is displayed It can be moved with the mouse The third dimension controls D U and Distance have no effect on the audio in this version of software To enable the 3D panner open the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type ctrl Shift U The System Variables dialog box is displayed Meters Permanent Peak hold mode Main VU Follows 5 0 Peak display limit dB 20 0 WO reference level dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload 0 0 WU Trim left dB Clear Peakon Record Play 0 0 VU Trim right dB I All Meters use same meter point M Digital VU meters lw Stereo on screen meters Requires restart Cimon ae ees Launch on screen meters at Bootup
260. ng Plug ins on Screen Each Plug in comes with a graphical user interface GUI designed by its manufacturer To display the GUI do one of the following e Press the Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode This will display the current plug in for the current channel e Double click a Plug in in the Xstream Mixer Screen Channel Double click Click to bypass all plug ins Plug in GUI controls Each plug in GUI is contained in a window including a close box and several icons ro Track 1 Insert 1 FLOORFISH init i Close Button FLOORFiSH expander noise gate_ Lock f listen v detect freq Insert Bypass Plug in Order expansion Plug in Name Www digitalfishphones com Close Channel Name Clicking the Close button makes the Plug in window disappear but does not unload it Page 231 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 You will continue to hear its effect After closing the plug in window it can be restored to the screen by pressing another Pad Mode button Path EQ Dyn or Aux and then pressing the Plug in button again or by double clicking that plug in name in the Xstream Mixer Screen screen Lock Clicking the Lock icon prevents that window from disappearing it will continue to display that Plug in for that channel regardless of other selections you make until you unlock it then close or delete it Insert Bypass By default Plug ins are inserted in the channel where you instantiat
261. ng allows you to superimpose a graphic design with partial transparency over your video file either on capture or while playing If you capture the file with the watermark it is permanently written into the video file Controls for watermarking are found in Setup General Preferences on the Watermark tab This tab is present if a Decklink video card is present and active See your Fairlight distributor for information about video cards Choose the bitmap you wish to superimpose by typing its name in the Bitmap field or by pressing the Browse buton Selecting the movement checkbox causes the watermark bitmap to periodically move on the video output The direction of the movement is specified with the pulldown with choices L gt R R gt L Top gt Bottom Bottom gt Top Selecting the dynamic checkbox causes the watermark bitmap to periodically turn on and off The time for each cycle is specified Page 270 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Editing the Video Track Selection To select the video track e Click on the v symbol at the left of the video track double clicking makes it the only selection 01 38 57 16 Length Click Here Video track is shown selected oO Oo Be MIE a a Ei q OR Press the sEL button then toggle video Track on the Picture keys it s at the lower left where ctrl is normally placed Track Track Track Track 7c m ol zD Track Track Editing with Xstream Buttons E
262. ng less events data in the global mix The feature operates transparently If desired this functionality needs to be turned on Instructions Page 223 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Step 1 Quit the Dream II software by clicking the Close Box in the upper right of the Edit screen Step 2 Navigate in Windows to Fairlight FMC Data and open the file System_Variables TXT Step 3 There is a line in that file MIX_THINNING_ENABLED 0O Set the 0 to a 1 and save the file Restart the system and Mix Thinning will be operating Using the Pad to write Automation data Tutorial Checklist For writing automation data with the Pad e Mix On must be lit in the Mixer Megamode e Select path s the last one is shown in the Pad e Enable at least one mix parameter fader mute EQ etc e Select Write not Trim e Select your On Stop setting e Put the path into Write using the Auto Button see Touch later e Data is written while the transport is in play or record e Stop writing by stopping the transport or pressing Auto This guide takes you through this process Get Ready Press the green Mixer button Press the mix oN button so that it is illuminated We will use Faders and Pans to illustrate writing automation data Press the path button to access them Enable Parameter s Press the Enable Params button In the enable layout you choose parameters for writing automation data When a path enters Write or Trim only enabled parame
263. ng the current map at any time by pressing the Map Faders button again or by selecting any other system mode You can fill the remaining faders in the set by holding down ctri and pressing or clicking a path button This will use the path you pressed and the following ones until the set is filled It will take Link Groups into account using one fader for each group Step 5 When you have mapped the whole fader set the mapping layout in Xstream will exit Mapping Link Groups If a member of a link group is selected to map to a fader only the link group master is assigned If a link group is included in a range the group takes up only one fader Short Cut for Mapping a Sequence You can map a sequence of channels as follows Step 1 Press the Map key Step 2 Hold down the ctrl button and click the first Track Live or Bus button that you want to map on the Channel Select Window Alternatively press the corresponding Path button in the Xstream Pad The system automatically maps the following sequence of channels to your entire current fader set Any Link Groups that it finds are mapped as single items Inserting and Deleting Faders While mapping a menu is displayed Press the Insert key to insert a path at the current fader position Press the Delete key to delete the current path from the fader set Press the Blank key to leave the current fader un mapped Mixer Set Mixer Set is an option that takes over some of your fad
264. ng timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Record Tracking As with Play Tracking but recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox is ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the timecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording Locate Method Cue Only Lace Window 00 00 29 29 Tracking Algorithm joa Power 25 Tracking Algorithm play chase As for TC Master but there is an individual choice of tracking algorithm for Play and Jog Page 314 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Remote Slave Mode When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that Xstream emulates a 9 pin machine and will obey commands sent to it It is the master for timecode At the same time its transport controls are active Select 9 pin ID Allows you to choose the type of machine being emulated by Xstream This allows for slight variations in the 9 pin protocol Status Sense Play Tally Controls an aspect of 9 pin performance This parameter controls the value of bitO 0 Byte 1 in the Sony Protocol command
265. nges you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this press the 0ld New soft key below For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can press the EQ In Out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off Clip EC Mame EQ In Out Copy Mudge p Old New Level wa Wes old Et Me Wy When all parameters are set press Enter If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings press Edit EQ again Clip EQ is explored in much more detail later in this chapter Razor Cuts Overview Normal non razor editing targets red clips but does not affect other clips This works well for video based editing where the sound is synchronised to fixed picture frames When working on radio spots interviews and music pieces we sometimes need to cut time as well as audio This is just like people used to do on tape The razor mode causes time to be manipulated as well as audio When you razor cut audio the time it occupied is removed from the track and everything afterwards moves earlier When you razor paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and everything afterwards moves later Razor editing always uses a range Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button to access the Cut menu Page 81 EDITING January 22 2013 Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least on
266. ning all the relative changes in the previously recorded data In Trim mode the control continues to move as it follows the previously recorded data As soon as the control is touched it becomes stationary and any changes made to the control s position are written as offsets to the underlying data If the control is touched but not moved no changes are made If the control is moved then released when not in Touch Snap the system continues to playback the original moves at the offset or trimmed level If the system is in Touch Snap the system drops back into Read Isolate When mix items are Isolated the user can manually control them and the automation system does not affect them The controls have no illumination All mix items are effectively isolated until data is written for them When you turn Mix On to the off position all mix items are isolated To isolate Signal paths Step 1 Press the Isol button Step 2 Choose signal paths for isolation Note that all parameters on the isolated signal paths become isolated There is no way to pick specific parameters for isolation Preview Preview is a combination of isolation and enablement The mix items that are in preview are not controlled by the automation system so they respond manually to their controls But when the console enters automation record they all go into Write or Trim Typically preview is used to audition new mix settings for one section of the project while o
267. nly be present if your Main bus has stereo format The Loudness metering has stereo LEQ meters and a mono LU meter The blue and white numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 standard known as LKFS They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right number gives a rolling average over 10 seconds and the left number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you started playing The long term average level ignores anything below 18 dB so it won t go down when the system is in Stop You can reset the long term average by clicking the left number Note that readings amongst different brands of meters commonly differ because there are no agreed standards for some metering characteristics In particular the integration time of a meter which represents the length of time signal needs to be at a particular level before the meter reaches that level and the decay time when the level drops are not defined as standards For this reason the Fairlight meters may not match the levels shown by other meters Page 256 METERS January 22 2013 Parameter Setup General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects _Scrollers Metes Themes Watermark Audio Plugins Compound Meter Source Control Room Bar Graph Loudness Enabled v RMS Window 400 ms Scale Peak Target Reference 23 LKFS Short Window 3 SEC
268. nnel which is the target for mixing parameter changes and special editing commands Using the Mouse Clicking Screen Track buttons additive selection Press a dark onscreen track selection key to add that track to the selection Press a lit onscreen track selection to remove that track from the selection Click and drag your mouse in the onscreen track selection pane to select deselect multiple tracks Page 37 CHANNELS January 22 2013 fe Click here to select track 8 for editing Click here to deselect Track 14 Click any track here to select the Link Group starting at track 19 To select a single track double click its number All other tracks will be deselected Clicking in a Track exclusive selection Clicking in the body of a track will make it the only selected track All other tracks will be deselected Clicking and dragging vertically will select a range of tracks but NOT if there is a clip under the original click then it will drag the clip instead Ctrl clicking in the body of a track will add it to the existing selection this is useful for working with non contiguous ranges of tracks Solo Mute and Arm On Tactile Controller Press the Solo button to enter the Solo state You can now Solo any channel by pressing its Pad button Double Press the Solo button to toggle all Solos off and on again Press the Mute button to enter the Solo state You can now Solo any channel by pressing its Pad butt
269. nto targets for editing They are fully described in the chapter Editing Methods There are two editing methods commands and mouse dragging Commands are further divided into tactile edits button pressing and Jog Wheel turning and mouse edits menu items and toolbar button clicking This chapter describes tactile editing while the next one describes mouse dragging and mouse edits Editing Tutorial This section takes you through some common editing procedures Cut and Paste Overview In this menu we cut audio to the clipboard then paste it using the Enter key The cutting action is performed by the cut head cut tail and cut clip Or cut range buttons Note copy and paste is performed exactly the same way as cut and paste except that you start by pressing the copy mode button instead of the cut mode button Note erase is similar to cut without the paste except that the clipboard is not used To use this tutorial item you need to load a Project containing clips The system comes with a demo project To load it consult the following Xplain item How to Files Load Demo Get Ready Hold down Mode and press the green Edit Basic Megamode button Press the cut erase button so that Cut is highlighted Press the range key to turn it OFF Page 72 EDITING January 22 2013 Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and
270. nuary 22 2013 The audio in the range is moved to the clipboard We see the ghost Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost moves to the new track Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clipboard former range is pasted The range persists after the edit Notes about Cut and Paste Cut Tail Works the same way aS cut head but cuts the later part of the clip Range and Head When a range is active pressing the cut head key cuts the audio from the start of the range to the cursor This will not work if the cursor is not in the range Range and cut tail work similarly together Multiple Clips and Tracks When there is no range the target for editing is all the clips on selected tracks that are touching the cursor It s easy to tell which because they are always red Page 87 EDITING January 22 2013 When there is a range the target is all the clips and parts of clips on selected tracks that are inside the range Again the target clips are always red An exception with a range you can use the mouse to deselect a clip To do this hold down the ctrl key and click with the mouse The clip will turn blue showing that it is no longer selected You can also extend the selection using Ctrl mouse click on a clip This will cause the range to expand so that it includes the newly selected clip and it will preserve the existing selection as well Pasting Pas
271. ny format Link Group Format When a link group is created you have the option to apply default pans If you do this the number of members determines the format of the link group If default pans are selected each member of the group is panned to one element of the system bus that has the same number of elements Normally the factory bus formats are used and this works out as follows If 2 Feeds are linked they are panned LR If 3 Feeds are linked they are panned LC R If 4 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RS If 5 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS If 6 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS B If 7 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS CS RS B If 8 Feeds are linked they are panned LLC CRC RLS RSB Page 145 GROUPING January 22 2013 It can happen however that more than one Bus Format has the same number of elements A common example is Dolby 5 1 and SMPTE 5 1 which are both useful in different contexts In this case a soft key in the Pad will allow you to make the choice See Creating a Link Group below for details Normally each member is panned hard to one Bus Element position spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero This fixed pan configuration is optionally chosen when the Link Group is created and cannot be changed afterwards If fixed panning is chosen and the link group format contains a Boom channel the assignment of the corresponding member is ach
272. o OLR 16bit Recorded Audio 1R 16bit Recorded Audio 2 R 16 bit 56 6 T a a YD UN Mma He KB ar Ca Sa SE E s ae e r e BMW Bw e DM E 43 O B ees ts Sa Recird rT isha 6 The plug in popup will now appear on the Editor display where the mouse can be used to change its parameters It will also appear on the Xstream Pad controls or Faders see Controlling Plug ins on the Surface page 233 Method 2 via the Xstream Mixer Screen screen Step 1 Right click an empty slot in the Plug in area of an Xstream Mixer Screen channel Right click Step 2 Continue from Step 5 above Method 3 via the Insert Config menu Step 1 Select the track Step 2 Press the Insert Config button in the Setup or Mixer Megamode Step3 Press the Add Plugin soft key The LCD screen between the soft keys will now display the first of a list of plug ins that you have installed Page 230 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Step 4 Using the jog wheel scroll through the list of plug ins Step 5 When the desired plug in is displayed press the Add soft key The plug in popup will now appear on the Editor display where the mouse can be used to change its parameters Step 6 Press the Plug ins button to toggle the plug in popup and fleximap on off Step 7 To remove the plug in press the Remove Plugin soft key on the LCD screen Automation of Plug ins Enabling Plug in parameters for automation is described on page 204 Controlli
273. o be scrolled using their scroll bar at the right If the Play Head is unlocked you can locate the transport just by right clicking anywhere in the track area or the timeline above it Note Unlocked Play Head means that the clips are stationary while the Play Head moves left to right To unlock the Play Head click Setup gt Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Mouse Jogging When the Jog button is toggled on you may move the transport as usual with the Jog Wheel or right click and drag it with the mouse in order to hear audio Zooming To Zoom the tracks horizontally turn the Mouse Wheel To Zoom the tracks vertically hold the ctrl button down and turn the Mouse Wheel Track Selection There are two ways to select tracks with the mouse e Click anywhere in a track This will select that track and deselect all others e Click any track number to toggle its selection This does not affect the selection of other tracks Double click a track number to make it the sole selection There are also short cuts for selecting multiple tracks e Click empty space ina track not on a clip and drag upwards or downwards Every track you touch will be selected and all others will be deselected If you drag sideways as well you will make a range e Hold the ctrl key and click empty space on any number of tracks Each track you click is added to the selection e Click a track number and drag upwards or downwards Each track number
274. o change the vertical scale hold down Zoom and Blue and turn the Jog Wheel This will affect how many tracks are visible on the Edit Screen Other ways to change the vertical scale e Hold down the Bank button and press one of the View buttons e Hold down the Blue key or the CTRL key on an external keyboard and turn the Mouse Wheel e Turn on Edit Set in the Blue layout and select any tracks Only the selected ones appear on the Edit Screen Page 20 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Mon The Mon key opens the Monitor Megamode It works latched and momentary Monitor Controls Monitor Sources Music E SFX l ms TS Mus B mec E mec Mus D a Ji Sub Z Sub 3 IL P 1 e E Sub amp Sub 7 7 i ONS ue Dial 2 INTER m OFF A 15 Studia Carr Fixed 50 Main FO Mix Minus FD Music FE p Bi S nc FL Interviews Wil Archive Mus SFe FO SPH Ea tl B 2 B 3 B tA Ex 5 B t5 B 7 Ey 4B B 49 E t10 E t11 Ey it12 Mon Setup Ea MLTE DIM Monitor Monitor Talk back Speaker Mutes Speaker sets Mute and Dim setup Source destination menu setup menu menu Mono and stereo comp Monitor Menus Monitor Setup allows you to create speaker sets and set their names formats and physical outputs Monitor Source Setup allows you to create External monitor sources and set their names and physical input sources Talkback Destination this is where you choose which buses your talkback addresse
275. o the Live Feed using the method described above Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Plug in to the output of the Live Feed Assign the Live Feed to the Bus where the Plug in output is required Controlling Plug ins on the Pad When the Plug in button is pressed the Pad rotary controls are focused on the current Plug in Each rotary control has two functions one normal function and one ALT function which is executed by holding down the ALT button and operating the rotary control The graphical control for the plug in can be placed in the Pad area by pressing the Plug in button a second time Specific parts can be enlarged by making a marquee with the mouse hold down Zoom and click and drag a rectangle over the graphic display in the Edit Window See Graphical Display below for details Control Types Both normal and ALT controls have three types Linear Turning the pot increases the value of the parameter being controlled Normal controls display a line which gives an idea of the parameter value ALT controls do not display this line To see the current value of the parameter look at the graphic display of the plug in Toggle A Toggle is a switch with two positions Normal toggle controls are rotated to switch between the two positions The gearing is set high so that only a small rotation is required ALT toggle controls can be switched by simply touching them with the ALT butto
276. ofessional audio environment This manual is designed to familiarize sound editors and engineers with the facilities provided by Xstream The terminology and concepts used in this manual assume a reasonable knowledge of audio principles and studio procedures Finding the Information You Need Read through the chapters in the order presented to learn all the features of the system or use the Table of Contents or Index to quickly find the specific information you require What Else You Need to Know Installation If you need to install or re install the system please read the manual Xstream Quickstart Guide pdf This manual is installed on your hard disk For Windows XP systems it is usually in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Docs For Windows 7 systems it is in C Program Files x86 Fairlight Dream II Docs First Startup Even if someone else has installed the system for you there are some things you need to do the first time you start the system The Quickstart manual mentioned in the previous paragraph includes a chapter on this subject called Launching Xstream for the First Time Please read this before using Xstream or at least have it standing by in case things get confusing Momentary and Latching What Sorry but this is one of the keys to speed Many operations can be done two ways Momentary means Hold down a key to open a mode do one thing in that mode then let go the key to exit the mode and go back to
277. olding down the Enab button in the ILP2 and touching the control that you wish to enable You can disable it the same way Using Screen Enables There are enable buttons on the ILP screen and the Mixer Screen Clicking on these toggles a parameter enable group on and off Page 203 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Enabling Plug ins Press the plug in button in the Param Enable layout described immediately above This enables all plug in parameters When you are ready to record data for a particular parameter use Touch Write to access it described below Enable Signal Paths Enabling signal paths for automation allows you to control the paths on which automation may be recorded To enable Signal paths you select them from a mixing menu as detailed below Step 1 In the Mixer Megamode press the Mix Or Pad Lock button Step 2 Select paths on the Xstream path keys either using the 12 track display or pressing the SEL Mix button to access more channels This includes Track Feeds Live Feeds Main Bus Sub Buses Aux Buses Multi Track Buses or Groups This selection of enabled signal paths is also referred to as the mix mask Press the ALL CHANS key inthe Param Enable layout to quickly enable all signal paths This feature should be used with caution Enabled paths do the following e They enter Write Trim Preview when a control is touched if Touch is set to Latch or Snap e They enter write when the In button
278. om page Pan Single click toggles Pan on off Double click opens Pan Zoom page Arm Single click toggles Arm Mute Single click toggles Mute Fader Level Fader Set level with mouse Double click to set 0 dB Colour indicates automation status Channel Meter Link Group metering is shown MIXING January 22 2013 Pan Clicking on the Pan display toggles Pan Defeat in and out When Pan Defeat is on the red and yellow indicators disappear The column at the left represents Boom level It is brighter when on and darker when off Double clicking on the Pan graph brings the Pan Zoom display to the screen Clicking on the EQ display toggles EQ in and out When EQ is out the graph line goes dull grey Double clicking on the EQ graph brings the EQ Zoom display to the screen Dyn The blue lines on the Dynamics display indicate Limiter at the top Compressor in the middle and Gate Expander It is possible to have all of them on Double clicking on the Dyn graph brings the Dyn Zoom display to the screen Aux The Aux graph shows only sends for Aux buses with non zero format The bars represent the amount of level being sent to the active aux buses Where the send is muted the bar is dark as shown at left Double clicking on the Aux graph brings the Aux Zoom display to the screen Page 170 MIXING January 22 2013 The FMC Old Mixer Screen ne nyse may af ee TA Pay ieee OA Ere a oo ae Wr eae ee a Aan
279. om the Preset drop list It can then be applied immediately to the currently selected clip or range of clips A saved EQ setting can be deleted by first selecting it from the drop list then clicking the Delete button A special preset can be created called default Whenever the Clip EQ display is opened for a clip with no EQ this preset will automatically be loaded into the display Editing on Multiple Layers Clips in Dream II form layers on each track with the most recently pasted or recorded clips sitting on top of the others During playback and record only the top layer is heard or a crossfade between the top and second layers Page 107 EDITING January 22 2013 In the above example the sections that are played are indicated in red and orange this is just indicative not part of the user interface The orange sections form a crossfade between the top and second clip in the stack This layered view can be toggled on and off by double pressing the Takes button or by the command View Display Layering Many editing functions target only the top layer and some can target all the layers To perform an edit on all layers toggle the All Layers button on To access a particular clip below the top layer we use the Takes Menu Takes menu To display the Takes menu Hold down Mode and press Takes The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track For the configuration s
280. ome available when you load some sounds Previewing and Loading Sounds into SDS When the Preview soft key is ON the MIDI keyboard ignores samples that are already loaded and only previews new ones There are two sources of sound for SDS e From clips that are already on a track e From Audiobase Working with a Track Select a Track with clips on it Position the transport so that one of the clips is touching the cursor The clip can be previewed or loaded into SDS Preview To preview the clip Step 1 Make sure Preview is on If not press the Preview Soft key in the Pad Step 2 Play notes on your MIDI keyboard The clip under the cursor will play as you press the notes changing pitch as you move up and down the keyboard As you move the transport to highlight a new clip it immediately becomes the target of your MIDI keyboard Preview will play the clip at its original pitch on the keyboard s Preview Root note To set this do the following Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences Step 2 Click the sps tab General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Serollers Meters SDS Themes Keyboard Left Rigt C6 Preview Root C3 lt lt lt lt _ _ _ _ _ _ Auto Assign Assign Root C2 w Page 282 SAMPLING January 22 2013 Step 3 Set the Pr
281. ommand will cut all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Copy Selected Cut is the same as Cut except that the clips are not removed from their original position They are copied to the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s If there is no range this command will copy all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will copy all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Paste Clipboard This command pastes the clipboard at the current timecode position starting from the lowest numbered selected track Page 127 EDITING January 22 2013 Note the clipboard includes a reference to the position of the playhead at the time of cutting or copying When pasting the system places that reference position in the clipboard at the current timecode This is illustrated below Clocktfa ce After the cut copy A ghost appears showing the clipboard contents Note that the sync reference is indicated by the position of the clips and the Play Head We select tracks 25 and 26 The ghost shows where the clipboard would go if pasted Page 128 EDITING January 22 2013 Maid with the Flaxen Hair kalimba After pastin
282. on Double Press the Mute button to toggle all Solos off and on again Page 38 CHANNELS Solo Mute and Arm On Screen January 22 2013 The buttons at the left of the Edit Screen can be used to set arming Mute Solo and more Link Groups The first track is master Clicking its Solo or Mute button affects the whole group Individual tracks within the group can be soloed or muted Arming any linked track will arm all of them as long as they have a patched Input Click to cycle through automation display parameters Fader Mute or Pan TRACKS Click to put track into automation record Click to arm track for recording must have audio input Click and drag for fader a LO0L level and pan position Link Groups Click to select Video Track Double click here to collapse the Link Group to one track width Uncollapsed Stereo Link Group Click the number to select a single track or Link Group MIDI Track indication only Indicates Audio Track ollapsed 5 1 Link Group For arming the Link Group always behaves as a single entity so arming any member of the group arms all For mute and solo selecting the first member the Master soloes or mutes all members but the other members can be soloed or muted individually when the group is expanded Double clicking near the left edge of the tracks expands or contracts a Link Group Automation The Auto button pu
283. onitors The Monitor system provides summing and switching to handle speaker formats of up to 8 channels It offers the flexibility of multiple speaker sets of any format selectable sources amongst any system bus and up to 16 external sources and fold up fold down facilities to manage any combination of the above Toggle Main and ALT Speakers Overview The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a Main set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like The system remembers the last non Main one you chose and calls it the Alternative ALT Speaker Set Toggle Main and ALT Speakers Press the Control Room Dim and MUTE buttons together This will toggle between the MAIN and alternative monitor speakers The Mon Megamode button indicates when any alternative monitor function ALT Speakers ALT Format ALT Source is being used You can still use the MUTE and DIM buttons for their normal functions Choose Speakers Overview The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide shows you how to select any defined speaker set This will become the Alternative ALT Speaker Set Get Ready Press the green Mon button Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Choose Speakers Choo
284. ote of any pitch at any position Deleting notes is done by selecting the Delete tool then clicking on individual notes Page 280 SAMPLING January 22 2013 Sampling Sound Design Sampler SDS Overview The Sound Design Sampler SDS integrates sample based playback of timeline and AudioBase clips into the Xstream environment It is a cost option to the system so the following only applies to systems where this licence has been purchased The Sampler is always active whether the SDS layout is visible or not Creating a New Project also creates an empty Sampler engine SDS works in mono and stereo A stereo sound can be either a multichannel clip or two mono clips on adjacent selected tracks that have the same start position and length All sounds will be automatically routed to the SDS Stereo output The SDS architecture consists of a Patch and Samples A Sample consists of a single sound either mono or stereo and its tone generator parameters A Patch is made up of one or more Samples Each of the Samples has a key map which determines which MIDI notes play it and which permits splitting or layering of the keyboard A Patch also has its own parameters for global control of all its Samples When a Project is saved the SDS Patch and Samples are saved in the Project as well setup Setting up SDS requires the following steps Connect and configure MIDI keyboard Patch the Sampler output so it can be heard and recorded
285. otherwise nothing will happen To stop looping press any other transport button Special Transport Commands Holding down the BLUE key creates more transport options BLUE Record Key causes the range to be recorded BLUE Play key causes Play Again the last Play command to be repeated BLUE Stop key locates to the timecode where Play was last started BLUE REW key causes a 4 second Review i e the transport jumps back 4 seconds and starts to play Double pressing the Stop key also initiates Play Again Jumping Overview The Jump keys locate the transport instantly to your choice of Jump Targets such as clip heads and tails fades and marks Pressing and releasing a Jump Key locates the transport to the next clip on any selected track Page 46 CHANNELS January 22 2013 Holding down a Jump Key displays a new layout offering multiple targets 1min emin amin 10min Proj vVlark Range 30min ihour 2hour Jump Jump Range gt locates to the IN point of the range if the Jump Left button is used otherwise to the OUT point Jump Project gt locates the start of the project if Jump Left is used otherwise to the end of the project Jump Mark gt Jumps the next or previous Mark see Add Mark for more details about Marks Jump times gt allows you to move the transport by a time interval Using Marks Overview Xstream allows you to create up to 100 timecode Marks which are stored in the Project file Marks can be edited
286. point to be then click the To button or keyboard shortcut t Click the Range button to toggle the range on and off or keyboard shortcut r Selecting Clips not Clips cannot be selected as such with the mouse They can be edited using their 7 points as described below included in a range with other clips or dragged to different places But selection is always and only determined by clips touching the playhead At this time they are shown in red and are targeted by commands from menus and from the keyboard e Right click in Timescale locate transport to that time and center that time on the screen e Double right click anywhere start playing from clicked position Moving Clips Clips can be dragged horizontally and vertically with the mouse This changes the clip timecode and track respectively When there is no range simply click and drag any single clip to another time or track When there is a range click on any selected red clip or part of a clip and drag it all other red clips will also be dragged along with the one you clicked Page 123 EDITING January 22 2013 To constrain movement to only vertical or only horizontal press the Shift button after clicking with the mouse but before moving the clips 7 Point Editing Each clip can display 7 points that can be moved with the mouse The points are displayed when the mouse hovers over the clip Fade In Fade Out point point Fade Out Fade In
287. pressing Play Menu twice without having to first disable automation To perform another automation pass the In and Out points must be made active again by pressing Active In and or Active Out Link Audio and Mix Recording with PRIME The PRIME function links the automation to the audio recording controls This means that whenever you enter normal recording on the transport controls the automation system also enters recording This is particularly useful if your working method is to record your mix progressively as you go through a project because you will automatically be recording the automation moves at the same time It s also useful if you gain some facility with the recording controls including the ADR menu which offers some very sophisticated rehearsal and automatic recording features To use the PRIME function press the Prime key While it is on Press the PLAY and REC transport keys to drop in to record Note that the enabled Mix Items enter Write and armed tracks enter record Press STOP or PLAY to drop out of record The enabled tracks return to Read NOTE It is not necessary to have any tracks armed for recording in order to use PRIME It also allows you to use Record Again and other automated record functions as triggers for Automation Record Saving and Loading Mixes Up to 256 complete mixes may be saved in each project and recalled later MIXES MUST BE SAVED BEFORE CLOSING A PROJECT or any unsaved mix data will b
288. punch individual tracks in and out without affecting others Using the track arming keys you can have individual control of which tracks are in record The methods for arming and disarming tracks are described earlier in this chapter on page 54 Auto Recording Overview Xstream allows you to record sections of track automatically with the transport doing the pre roll punch in and punch out This is done by making a range using the From and To keys then using the Record Range command on the Record menu HN Patch inputs to one or more tracks and arm them Auto Rec uses a Pre Roll The Pre Roll time can be set in the ADR menu press the green Record Megamode button then ADR then use the on screen dialog Page 60 RECORDING January 22 2013 Auto Rec Operation Make a range as follows Locate to the desired in point and press the From key Locate to the desired out point and press the To key Hold down the Record button to display recording options on soft keys Press the rec range soft key to do an automatic recording of the range Recording and Editing Multiple Takes Introduction In many situations we need to record multiple takes of the same audio in sync to picture or existing audio Examples are Post Sync dialog ADR Foley and music recording Dream II software allows you to record multiple takes ona single track then easily audition and edit them into shape Recording Multiple Takes When recording a sec
289. rames eightieths of a frame Press this button repeatedly as it cycles through the possible values Nudge Sync Normally clips are nudged as objects but it s also possible the nudge the sync of the audio within the clip without moving the edges To do this press the Nudge Sync button MAGE Mudge Suh Svc Note there is a limit to how far the Sync can be nudged eventually the end of the playable media is reached Track Up Down See previous section Range On Off See previous section Mixer This layout is where you access the common Mix commands not including Automation Page 26 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Mix On Toggle Oscillator Setup Soft Keys Target copy paste a wir ite auto faba a F i jain atch a Big n Audio mix mix recall Curves menu Scroll Mixer control SUT Pat A mis Order Mix Auto toggle Common Mix Modes Fader Set Mix On The Mix On button activates the automation system When it is off all channels are under manual control but when on channels with automation data will play back that data unless isolated The Mix Auto toggle is only available when Mix On is toggled on Common Mix Menus The Menus accessed here are commonly used for mix setup The exception is the Mix Menu which is largely concerned with automation Scroll Mixer Button The Scroll Mixer button is used to select which channels are visible on the Mixer Screen Hold it down and use
290. rarily suspended while you work on one of the member tracks Step 1 Hold down the BLUE button Step 2 Press a track button that is inside a Link Group The Link Group is suspended and the track you pressed becomes the Current Path Reinstating a Suspended Link Group Suspended groups can be reinstated at any time until the project is closed or until one of the members is used in another Link Group Step 1 Hold down the BLUE button Step 2 Press a track button that was inside a Link Group before it was suspended The Link Group is reinstated and becomes the Current Path Panning Link Groups When a Link Group is the Current Path the pan controls act on each Link Group member at the same time The system maintains a Spread Box for each Link Group which affects panning behaviour Page 149 GROUPING January 22 2013 miee eal PAN bzvxbx 3k3 In Link Group with default panning Spread box is set to maximum size so Link Group members are panned as wide as possible 100F Library bzvxbx 3k3 Spread box is set to 70 so members are brought inwards Now the whole Spread box can be moved LR and FB Library The Spread Control The spread control is only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix The spread control range is from 0 to 100 At 0 the display reads POINT meaning point source At 100 the display reads FULL meaning f
291. rce path into a clipboard then pasting the desired parts into a destination path To use Path Copy Step 1 Hold down the Mode button Step 2 Press the Path Copy button Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press the copy soft key Step 5 Select the destination path Press one of the Paste soft keys Inserts Overview There are two types of inserts available in the NAME software The first is a physical insert where a signal exits a channel undergoes some external treatment then comes back into the same channel The second is a Plug in where the same thing happens but using software running within the original channel Toggling Inserts Both types of inserts can be switched on and off as follows Touch the encoder for the Insert button in the Pad second page of the Path display Use the mouse to click on the Insert button in the EVO Mixer screen Use the Insert Config menu which has an Insert toggle button see below Page 187 MIXING January 22 2013 It is available by holding down Mode and pressing Insert Config Setting Physical Inputs and Outputs The Insert points in any channel are available in the general patching system You can reach the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch button in the Mixer Megamode by clicking on the Patch icon in the Edit Toolbar and several other ways Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal Paths page BLAH The following describes a quicker way of patching
292. re performed at the same time The audio for each line in the EDL is captured and immediately conformed Before starting we must set some parameters Step 1 Set up Track Mapping Page 307 Step 2 Step 3 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Al 1 3 As 9 17 9 16 All Audio Tracks 5 a F pec Tracks S Cs Track mapping chooses the tracks where you will record in your currently open project DREAM II lists each type of edit that it finds in the EDL e g A12 A 3 etc and allows you to choose which audio tracks to record for each type Often it will be the same set of tracks for all edit types Click in the Record Trks column for each type of edit and choose from the drop down list in in Ln Ln I The Rec Tracks drop down list provides a convenient way to quickly fill in the track mapping for a specific number of tracks per EDL track Presets allow you to save a track mapping for reuse Type a name into the field and click Save To load a preset simply select it from the drop down list Select Edits to Capture Fm J Ekin 2 0o sj sj lt The system will ean only the highlighted events in 1 the EDL display Use the mouse to highlight the required events You can select a range of events by selecting the first then holding down SHIFT and selecting the last in the range You can add or subtract an event from the selection by holding down ctrl and clicking it Events that are
293. release Mode The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR ADR List Character Character There are no tems to show in this view Sawn all gt Cue When it is first opened the list is empty of cues Import Cue List froma Text File You may import an entire script through the use of the Import button in the ADR List This can import a Short script that has been written in a word processor Each line of text in the file is treated as a separate line of ADR cue text Each line of text can optionally have one or more timecode numbers at the start of the line 00 00 00 00 This line has one timecode number Page 63 ADR January 22 2013 or 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 12This line has two timecode numbers The first timecode number becomes the cue in point and the second if present the cue out point Timecodes must contain 4 individual numbers separated by colons 01 00 23 12 or semicolons if the timecode is drop frame based 01 01 00 02 Here is an example of a text file in the correct syntax with timecode numbers at the start of each line 00 02 19 19 Her eyes shined bright and true 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now but 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Haven t I seen you before Importfrom CSV File Xstream can also open ADR lists in comma separated variable CSV format In this case the Character should be included The format is as follows 2 columns of timecode Then next column is the character defaul
294. rers just send a value like 0 or 1 or nothing at all It s worth a try Renaming a Control By default a control is given the name on the tile used to select it These names are supplied by the plug in manufacturer To rename a control click the Rename button then type your desired name and click OK Erasing a Control There is no explicit command to erase a control but you can do it by assigning a parameter then moving it somewhere else This leaves the first control unassigned Setting a Zoom Window Each page of the plug in layout may contain two built in zoom settings one for normal controls and one for ALT controls To create the built in zoom windows create a zoom window for normal and or one for ALT controls as described in the Plug in Zoom section above while the Plug in Editor is active When the Plug Editor is exited and saved these zoom windows are saved with it The built in zoom windows are accessed whenever you toggle from non Zoom to Zoom using the upper 5th soft key They can be overridden at any time by the normal process of making a marquee but will re appear whenever Zoom is toggled on Saving the Fleximap The Fleximap is saved when you exit the editor using the same upper 4th soft key that you pressed to enter it Fleximap Files Fleximap files contain all the information about mapping of parameters to controls including the displayed names and control types There are some useful things yo
295. ress the end soft key to leave the Config Monitors screen Page 245 MONITORS January 22 2013 Choose Monitor Speaker Outputs Overview The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide will show you how to choose outputs for any of your speaker sets Get Ready Press the green Mon button Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Set Outputs Press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen Choose a Speaker set at the lower left Select all or one of its Elements at the top left Click Analog Or Digital Outputs at lower right Choose the right number of free outputs to match the number of selected elements Click Patch Repeat as needed Press the end soft key to leave the Config Monitors screen Change Monitor Listening Format Overview You can tell the system to play into a narrower format than your current speaker set This is called folding down For example you can listen to your 5 1 mix in stereo without changing speaker sets by changing the Listening format The system remembers the last non standard listening format you used and calls it the Alternative Format This can be heard at any time by pressing the ALT Format button in the Mon Megamode press mon then ALT Format This guide will show you how to choose a listen
296. ress the fade button if not already on Step 3 Click the Head button in the screen display it s near the upper right Step 4 Adjust the shape of the Head fade described below Step 5 Click the Apply button The fade described in the shape is applied to the head of the clip Note that the fade duration is set by the cursor position as when using the picture keys Length and Shape The Length and Shape tickboxes allow you to choose what to apply You can untick the Length tickbox if you only want to apply the shape and vice versa Fade Shape Using the mouse and screen method allows you to set the fade shape before applying it The shape includes the following parameters Percentage X Point this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point Page 96 EDITING January 22 2013 Attenuation X Level controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level NOTE The fade shape can be changed directly with the mouse by dragging on the red buttons in the graphs Fade Tail Same as Fade H
297. rm Tracks Solo Tracks Mute Tracks Safe Tracks Select All iewed Tracks Page 258 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Once created the Video track appears at the top of the Edit Screen Adding a Second Pyxis Track Note This feature will be brought into the software early 2011 and will be licensed if you wish to purchase a licence please contact your Fairlight distributor It is possible to add a second Pyxis Track using the same command Tracks Add Pyxis Track Adding a second track puts more demand on system resources particularly memory and CPU bandwidth If you plan to use a second video track particularly with HD formats we recommend upgrading your host PC to Windows 7 64 bit and bringing the amount of RAM up to 6 GBytes The second video track can be used to play out 2 video streams when used in conjunction with Black Magic Design 3D Extreme HD card This enables Dream II to play 3D footage NOTE BMD 7 8 drivers rc27 or later required Capturing importing and editing the second video track is done the same way as for the first see sections below To select one or both video tracks for these activities use the mouse to click the V1 or V2 button at the left of the tracks Startup with Dual Tracks To use the second video track the system must be started with the 3D option To do this edit the shortcut used to start the system If you are using a desktop icon to start the system add the phrase 3D to the
298. rojects Scrollers Ascove Load Last Project on Startup C Profiles Delete Profiles after 14 Ando Redo Options Playhead follows Undo Nack selection follows Undo Zoom Level follows Undo Trak display follows Undo Marks are undoable Number of Backups 2 Restore Previous View on Project Load Audio Record Format WAV MT Options Default Fut extension fut Stuff Futs Bit Depth 16 or 24 Multiple Workspaces Maintain Project Sample Rate and Frame Rate 6 Switch Sample Rate and Frame Rate Media Scan E Scan Media in background required restart In addition you can toggle the Follow Playhead option using the PlayheadFollows softkey in the Undo Menu Notes When recording multiple punch ins and outs in a single pass will produce multiple undoable events When you undo a recording the media you created is not destroyed by undo only the clips that reference the newly created media In fact you can access the media again using view gt Orphaned Media See how on page 299 Page 120 EDITING January 22 2013 Undo Automation and Audio Automation changes can be undone with the same Undo button as Edit changes It is also possible to perform audio and automation changes simultaneously To set this up Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Mixer the Mixer Megamode Step 2 Mix On must be ON if not toggle it on Step 3 Select the Mix menu Step 4 Toggle the Target soft key so that it reads BOTH When you perform an a
299. rollers and a Video Scroll button appears at the lower left of the picture keys button to toggle the Video Scroller on and off screen im ade nud Qe S ip Hold these down macro viden Scroll oom and click here Another way is to click Setup gt General Preferences Scrollers Page 268 up and use allow you to Use this PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 General Preferences Video Track 1 Track 2 a LIN Hi F Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track Track 6 Track 9 Select the Video checkbox Note Audio Scrollers are discussed on page 42 While the Video Scroller is active you can e Click on any part of any frame to locate the transport to that position e Drag the scroller left or right to move the transport Note there is no zoom control on the video scroller Page 269 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Watermarking x Uptions Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Scrollers Themes watermark Audio Flugins watermark Enabled During Capture M Enabled During Play Bitmap E Vorope testpattern O00 brop Use Alpha Channel Transparency TUZ Invert Alpha Channel amp Coordinate fo Y Coordinate a M Movement Dynamic IL gt F On Time seconds i 0 OFF Time seconds g Info The watermark bitmap should be no larger than 300 s 300 pisels It will play but place undue stress on the system OF Cancel Apply Watermarki
300. rom the plug in These may be pre arranged at the Fairlight factory or by you or a colleague or if not they are shown by default in the order presented by the manufacturer normal first then ALT Several pages may be filled if there are more than 16 plug in parameters If the Pad controls do not display anything there may be an error in the Fleximap This requires the fleximap file to be deleted See Fleximap Files below Step 3 Hold down the Blue key and press the upper 4th soft key This is labeled Layout if visible but this won t be the case when a graphic is shown in the Pad The system displays a page containing plug in parameters and commands Note the picture below has been trimmed to save space the real display is larger Page 234 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 C CD Pee eee ee ee ME ome eee emer ouey pe p po m m a al _IEE __ po Using the Plug in Editor Overview choose a parameter then touch the Pad control where you want it assigned Choosing a Parameter You may choose a parameter by clicking its tile with the mouse Alternatively you may wiggle any control or switch on the plug in s graphic display and it will be chosen by the software For a switch it is enough to toggle it For a continuous control the value must be changed Choosing the Pad Control For a normal control just touch it For an ALT control hold down the ALT button and touch the rotary control
301. rom trac File Nan AL ie A eee ee h on i i f 1 i i26 AAS B r e Entering text in the Search For field causes the software to look in all the relevant fields Entering text in the more specific fields at the right like Clip Name and Description confines the search to the fields you have specified The Search For field takes precedence if you have entered text in both places e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e Wildcards can be used to aid searches These include the following o Stands for one or more characters e g dog means anything starting with dog o Stands for one character e g dog means starts with dog and contains one more character vn o amp means AND e g dog amp cat means contains dog and also contains cat vn o means OR e g dog cat means contains dog or contains cat Clip Search Clip Search is useful for handling clips in your current project your attached library project your project Bin and any ClipStores you can access It does not require any database setup or software Clip Search incorporates the following capabilities e Search for clips by name within the current project and attached libraries e Search within Clip Bins and ClipStores e Preview or audition found clips Page 140 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTO
302. rt No port selected Note You can have only one Master machine at a time but you can have as many slave machines as you like limited only by available ports Master and Slave machines can be used concurrently Press M1 and or M2 keys or use the Online checkbox or click the M1 M2 M3 screen buttons to place machines online Enter an Offset if desired Use the red Video Analog and Digital LEDs to arm tracks on your remote device as required Note The master Video Arm Enabled box must be checked and each video Arm En box must also be checked on the desired device before the Video arm LED can be used to arm the video track Click the Eject button to eject tape from the desired device Note that controls will only appear if they are relevant to the selected device type Config Click the Config button to set transport ballistics for the different machine types TC Master When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that Xstream will control the transport of a 9 pin machine but will chase the position of that machine in all transport modes In this case the Config Window looks like this Page 312 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 DW AS00 P 0000 30 00 Tracring E A EPA E EETA ee 12 5 0 Standard amp tracks On 10 minutes Locate Method Select between Cue Only operates only in Cue mode or Unlace unlaces a tape machine and puts it in Fast For
303. s Page 21 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 GoTo Go To allows location to timecodes marks or audio clips Goto Goto Grab Mark Clip Time Goto Absolute Timecode Press GoTo type a timecode and press GO or press Play to go there and start playing Go to Relative Timecode Press GoTo press or then type a timecode and press GO or press Play to go there and start playing The transport locates to the time first shown plus or minus the timecode you typed You can capture the current timecode before using or by pressing the Grab Time soft key Go to Mark Press GoTo then press the GoTo Mark soft key Then use the Jog Wheel or mouse to select the mark you want and press Go to go there or Play to go there and start playing Go to Clip Press GoTo then press the GoTo Clip soft key You will see a list of the clip names in the project This will be covered in more detail later Page 22 CENTRAL TACTILE CONTROL January 22 2013 Megamodes Edit Basic Megamode This is designed to access all the Editing functions Soft key Clip Split af Ovrlap Paste Split Mute EQ Marne Range 2f Special clip Clip Bounce Ghost Mudge Clip 1 Penge Trim lore a am Common Editing Menus HEAD Track Range Clip Head Tail Keys Up Down On pe Add Mark Editing Menu Keys Each Menu provides a group of related functions displayed on the Soft Keys and the Clip Head Tail keys The common editing Menus
304. s 2 E Mute There are literally thousands of mix items in the Xstream system The automation system can write the changing values or states of every mix item over the duration of your project and read it starting at any position These written values and states are called mix automation data Mix ON When the Mix oN key is OFF all mixing and routing functions are manually operated and the mixer will not write or read automation When the Mix oN key is ON all mix items for which automation data is written will read that data and the user has no manual control of them Mix items with no written automation data can be manually controlled by the user Page 199 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Mix Duration The automation data for a project starts at a timecode location one frame after timecode midnight and finishes one frame before midnight However the system requires a minimum preroll of at least one second and it is advisable to start projects at a location of at least one minute after midnight to provide adequate preroll Static Snapshots Project Snapshot Every project contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the project was last closed When a project is opened the mixer state is updated and all parameters are recalled Mix Snapshot Every saved mix contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the mix was saved When a mix is loaded the mixer state is updated and all mix items are recalled So it is not necessar
305. s TXT Call Follow state and Xstream brightness Automation with Link Groups Link groups are useful for dealing with groups of feeds carrying audio in a multi channel format such as stereo or 5 1 See Grouping on page 145 for an overview of link groups Link groups should be established before any automation is written If members are added to a group when automation data is present on either the master or the members the data on the members is erased If the link group is destroyed or unlinked after automation is recorded for the group the au tomation data remains on the group master but not the slaves Only the parameters on the link group master can be automated the slave member s parameters follow the master Mix Editing Mix Copy Mix Copy allows a selection of automated mix parameters to be copied from one time location and channel selection to another Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press the mix oN key to enable mix automation Select the mix items you wish to copy by selecting parameters and signal paths in the usual Way Use the From and To keys to select the range from which you want to copy The In and out points are displayed on the LCD Press the Copy Mix soft key in the Mix menu Page 216 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Step 5 Locate the cursor to the destination where you want to paste the mix automation data Step 6 Press the Paste Mix soft key to complete the operation The rules are de
306. s are used to save fade shapes only not lengths The system provides a number of Fade Presets and you can also save your own Custom presets To recall a system preset Step 1 Press the Preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets Step 2 To apply the recalled shape to a clip click the Length check box in the Smart Pane to deselect it then press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key depending which part s you wish Page 95 EDITING January 22 2013 to apply To recall a custom preset Step 1 Click the triangle in the Preset drop menu select one from the the list of custom presets To save the current shape to a new custom preset Step 1 Click in the Preset name field Step 2 Type a name for the new custom preset then press the Enter key To change the shape stored in a custom preset Step 1 Recall the custom preset as described above Step 2 Adjust the shape at the head or tail of the clip or capture new ones from a Clip Step 3 Click in the Preset name field Step 4 Now immediately press the Enter key to save the current values over the selected preset This will overwrite the preset and the software will give no warning Using the Mouse and Screen While the Fade mode is active the screen displays shapes and controls for creating and editing fades Presets E Fade Presets Fade Head Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 P
307. s generally useful when the Project sample rate is 48 kHz but you may set this according to your own taste Creating Smooth Level Changes By pasting a copy of a section of a clip onto itself you are able to change the level of the copy to create a level change If the copy is cross faded with the original a smooth level transition results When using the copy and paste functions be sure to be in stop otherwise a slight movement of the jogger wheel may result in phasing during the fades The same technique can be used to fade one clip EQ setting to another within the same piece of audio E In the above illustration the top layer plays the same audio as the bottom layer but may have different level or EQ settings During the fade in and fade out the settings will effectively crossfade Clip Level Each clip has a volume level that you can set This is a quick and easy alternative to fader automation for many situations To trim the level of a clip Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the clip level button if not already on Step 3 Press and hold the Jog Level soft key Step 4 Turn the Jog Wheel or type a number on the Numpad this will trim the clip level up or down Alternatively press the 2 dB or 2 aB buttons a number of times to trim the clip level Note Clips on multiple tracks can be amplitude adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will
308. s other signal paths using the Name Path function see page Error Bookmark not defined Multi Trim Multi Trim is a mouse driven operation in the old FMC screen where many channels can be changed at the same time To set up the group click on tile numbers in the Mixer Screen a a aa ae Te I ox npn airy Eln MultiTrim group E members rar Track 7 ea s m 6 la 7 J aii Multi Trim is a mouse driven operation where many channels can be changed at the same time To set up the group click on the numbers of tiles in the Mixer Screen Mouse operations with a MultiTrim group include the following e Click and drag any member s fader to move all the group s faders relatively in proportion to their current value Page 154 GROUPING January 22 2013 e Ctrl Click and drag any member s fader to move all the group s faders absolutely they are all set to the same value e Click any toggle switch on any member s tile Mute Solo EQ In Out Insert In Out to toggle all members switches e Ctrl Click any toggle switch on any member s tile Mute Solo EQ In Out Insert In Out to set the value of that toggle to be the same for all members Link Groups can be included in the MultiTrim group When any of the MultiTrim members faders are moved the whole Link Group adopts the fader value of the first member removing any offsets between them that might have existed earlier To cle
309. se one of the speaker sets named on the Soft keys MAIN refers to the main speakers and the others can be called SpkrSeti 2 etc or may have been given names You can only choose speaker sets that have been defined i e given physical outputs These sets have a dim light in their soft keys To define more speaker sets press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen For details about this see How to gt Monitors gt Config Speakers Page 244 MONITORS January 22 2013 Configure Monitor Speaker Sets Overview The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide will show you how to set up the formats outputs and names of your speaker sets Get Ready Press the green Mon button Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Configure To configure speaker sets press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen 0 0d6 0 0dB 0 0d6 0 0dB Studio Monitor 1 Choose a Speaker set at the lower left Click the Increase Format button until you see the desired format for this speaker set Select all its Elements Left Center Right etc at the top left Click Analog or Digital outputs at lower right Choose the right number of free outputs to match the number of speakers Click Patch Click Name if you want to name the Speaker set P
310. secseatenseseneens 272 MIDI TRACKG ccscsessesessssenneeensenenes 275 TIVE OCUCH Olas assuitsseresean a 275 File Compatibility IMPORTANT 000008 275 Convert Tracks to MIDI csceceeseeeeeeeeees 275 Patching to MIDI Tracks cccceeeeeeeeeee ees 276 MEUFONO MIC airn dvi a at nndcuntanae nt 2 6 Recording MIDI ClipS ccscecseseeseeeeeneeaees 277 EditNO MIDE CMDS rrarena 278 MIDI Note Editing cccccecseeeseeeeeteneeneneees 278 SAMPLING cccscccssesennseeensseenenenseeennees 281 Sound Design Sampler SDS Overview 281 SEUD se toat stave tance A wansaanannioas eateanan san 281 ICCCSSING D5 seios aanre Ra 282 Previewing and Loading Sounds into SDS 282 Keyboard Mapping cscsecscseeeseceeetensenenenas 284 AHDSR and MOdulation ccscecsecseereeeeneees 284 SAVING S DS rinon ean aaeaies 286 Media Considerations cscececseceeeeeeeeseeaees 286 PROJECT AND FILE MAN AGEMENT 287 TATFOGUCH ON ae a wettest 287 Project Formats avez stissadutincssscsetdaniaseaaadas 287 MM PrOJECTS nigana a 288 DRZ Projects nantan enn a toatwanes 290 Waveform Profiles scscecsesseseersenseneerareens 292 Revealing the Project File cccccseeeeeeeees 293 BACKUP FICS urana E AEN 293 Automatic File Saving ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 293 WINGO FIGS srca a a 294 Vdeo FIGS eaae 295 Typical Xstream Drive Configuration 295 Designating Media Device cecse
311. sert fill insert b f fill overlap insert space The filled audio is inserted into the track not layered over the original audio in the range The backwards forwards filled audio is inserted into the track not written over the original audio in the range Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the i11 command Silence will be inserted from the start of a Range for the duration of the Range Page 90 EDITING January 22 2013 Paste Special Instead of pasting the clipboard contents at the cursor position it is possible to paste characteristics of a clip into other clips Step 1 Copy some clips to the clipboard using the Copy menu the mouse or the keyboard shortcut ctrl c Step 2 Select the destination clips for the paste They can be on multiple tracks and may use a range You may select All Layers or only the top layer Step 3 On the Cut Menu Copy Menu or Erase Menu press the Paste Special Soft key Now choose from the alternatives shown on the other soft keys Pressing one of these executes the Paste immediately Step 3a Alternatively click and hold the screen command Edit Paste Special The system displays this dialog Paste Special Source Media Erase Delete Gain Erase Head Eq Erase Tail Name Restore Head Fades Restore Tail Now choose which characteristic to paste Notes e The clip whose characteristics are copied is the earliest in timecode on the lowest number
312. set stores all the parameter settings of the dynamics section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the DYN soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Plug In A library of 100 Plug in settings is provided Each preset stores all the parameter settings of the Plug in section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the Plug In soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Page 197 MIXING January 22 2013 Channel A library of 100 channel settings is provided Each channel preset stores all the parameter settings on the signal path currently called to the Master fader excluding I O patching ALL Console A library of 100 Console settings is provided Each Console preset stores all mixer parameters for all feeds and buses All patching routing and name settings are also stored Default Console Template A special Console library file named default is used to store the default setup of the Xstream on power up You may overwrite this file with any setup that suits your requirements Saving a Preset Follow these steps to save a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 6 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Click the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Or all console screen button to select the type of preset you wish to save Press the Save screen button and type a new name for the library preset The previously entered name is displa
313. signed to any other bus The Bus Assign screen is designed to assign multiple paths to one bus If you wish to do it the other way around one path to multiple buses use the Path layout in the Pad This is visible in the Editor and Mixer Megamodes This guide will show you how to assign paths to Buses using the Bus Assign screen Step 1 Hold down Mode and press the Bus Assign button Page 161 MIXING January 22 2013 The Bus Assign Screen iM l ASLONGA TRACKG M i i M M ra M 13 The 14th Track 15 a l h R FX stereo FX Stereo All Tracks M NM iM NM i i Mi M Mi Track 16 Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 EE J z 4 J 4 M M M M M M M M M M M M All Lives Track 25 Track 26 Track 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 Track 33 Track 34 Track 35 Track 36 mm an an an an an aa mn am mm ma an Track TE Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Track 42 Track 43 Track 44 Track 45 Track 46 Track 47 Track 48 Deassign All TracksO maksi MM trackso MM trackss MM rakse E trackss E rakse E tracks E raks E raks ff trackoo Track 62 Track 63 Track 64 Track 65 Track 66 Track 67 Track 68 Track 69 Track 70 Track 71 Track 72 ck 76 Track ba Track 78 Track 79 Track 80 Track 81 Track 82 Track 83 Track 84 Tra E Tra E SFX 09 SFX 09 ATO oO wo AT oO oO Tra J Tra oO 8 Tra Tra o Tra Sm Tra PJ Tra wo 3 Tra
314. stallation Step 1 Install your plug ins as outlined by your plug in manufacturer The plug in will generate a file with extension DLL in the folder that your plug in has been installed most commonly located in C Program Files VSTPlug ins Step 2 Copy the DLL file and paste into C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Effects VSTs Step 3 Restart the Dream II PC Block Size You can control the size of blocks sent to your plug ins over the AudioBridge The AudioBridge connects the real time CC 1 audio environment to the block based audio environment in the PC where plug ins are performed Larger block size means more reliable operation but longer latency Fairlight recommends using 1024 samples To set block size click Setup General Preferences and click the Audio Plugins tab General Preferences X Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Latency 21 Jom Scan on each Startup Rescan Cancel Scan Use the slider to set the Block Size Latency for each block size is shown NOTE Latency is also affected by the processing delay of the VST plug in itself i e the time it takes for the CPU to execute Block size makes no difference to this Page 227 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Scanning on Startup If you check the Scan on Startup button in the General Preferences dialog shown above the system will scan all your plug ins each time it starts If you have a large num
315. t A VST host is a software application or hardware device that allows VST plug ins to be used in a logical context interacting with digital audio and MIDI elements Dream II is a VST host enabling VST plug ins to interact with the Dream II mix environment As of this writing Dream II uses version 2 4 of the VST SDK Software Development Kit VST Effects versus VST Instruments VSTi A VST effect is a type of VST plug in that is used to process audio A VST effect might be a Reverb Compressor Flanger or EQ A VST Instrument is typically used to synthesize sound or play back sampled audio VSTi s have rapidly replaced hardware synthesizers and dedicated samplers due to their flexibility repeatability and low cost Using VST Effects on Fairlight systems Some typical scenarios include e Insert a VST Compressor or EQ plugin directly on a track or live input busses and Auxes e Patch an Aux Output to a Live Input then insert an VST Reverb or Flanger on the Live input Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Effect Page 226 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Please note that Fairlight supports VST effects from Mono to 5 1 and beyond These can be inserted on mono channels or on Link Groups If a stereo VST Effect is inserted on a LCR LCRS or 5 1 Link Group the left and right channels will be allocated to left and right Link Group channels automatically Using VST Effects in Xstream Setup and in
316. t plus the automation from all signal paths and all parameters whether enabled or not You can also use this command to copy a project segment from an import project and paste it into the main workspace Import Automation from Another Project The Import Menu can be used to bring audio clips in from another project This is described in the section Importing Clips from Other Projects on page 114 It can also be used to import mix automation The procedure is as follows Step 1 Open the Import menu using Import in the Edit Megamode Step 2 Press the open soft key choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens the Import File i e the one from which you will import Page 217 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Press the Mix soft key This will cause a new menu to be displayed in the Pad Press the Select Mix soft key This will cause the names of the available Mix files to be displayed in the Pad Spin the Jog Wheel until the mix you want is displayed in the Pad Press Enter to load the displayed mix Select the tracks and the range that will be the source of your Mix copy Press the Copy Mix soft key The system will now return to your original project Select the tracks where you want to paste the imported mix data Press the Paste Mix soft key The mix data will be pasted on your selected tracks at the current timecode If you want to p
317. t is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t I seen you before 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Commas occuring in the text field will confuse the software unless the field is surrounded by quotation marks e g 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are cool really cool Adding Cues Manually Step 0 Optionally create a range covering the cue you want to add This is probably the quickest way to set the In and Out times for your cue If there is no range the cue will be created with the transport position as its In time and 5 seconds duration Step 1 Click Add or press the add cue soft key A dialog appears for writing the text of your cue Enter the text for the ADR Step 2 Enter the text and click OK Page 64 ADR January 22 2013 Step 3 If necessary set the In Point of the cue locate the transport to that point and click From Your current position will be shown in a dialog You may accept this by clicking OK OR Click From type the timecode you want and click OK Step 4 If necessary set the Out Point of the ADR cue in the same way The cue is shown as below From To Dialogue Character 00 00 09 25 OO 00 11 14 hope you don t mind Andrew 0000 10 11 0000 15 11 Sunrise and sunset Peter 00 00 11 15 00 00 13 06 It s always been this way Peter John 00 00 13 0111 00 00 15 25 The long and the short
318. t key or simply double press the takes button Hint if you want to see all the layers hold down the Mode button and double press the takes button Razor Sometimes it is useful to cut the time out of a track not just the audio This is similar to cutting tape To cut time as well as audio turn on razor by holding down the BLUE key and pressing Razor This will automatically turn on range and all layers When you cut audio the time it occupied is removed from the track and everything afterwards moves earlier When you paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and everything afterwards moves later This is true even if razor was not ON when the clips were cut to the clipboard cut and paste are really independent commands each responsive to the razor setting Page 88 EDITING January 22 2013 Track Up down Button Judge Track Up Down button A handy device for moving between tracks is the track up down button If you hold it down and turn the Jog Wheel the whole track selection will move up or down You can also use the or keys and the Numpad with the track up down button Two Handed Editing Using two hands for cut and paste can save a lot of time The key is to hold down the action key cut head trim tail copy clip erase range etc then select the destination timecode and tracks then release the action key to paste the clipboard Example 1 Press down the cut clip key
319. t the source track for swapping Create a range in which you want to swap the audio with another track using the From and To buttons Press the swap soft key Choose the destination track for swapping Page 108 EDITING January 22 2013 The audio in the range all layers is swapped between the source track and the destination track you selected in Step 4 Numbers This command swaps the positions of two tracks including their names and all audio It does not swap the automation data Step 1 Step 3 Step 4 Move Select the first track Press the numbers soft key Select the second track This command uses a range exclusively It moves all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Copy Select the source track Create a range in which you want to move the audio to the destination track using the From and To buttons Press the move soft key Choose the destination track The audio in the range is moved from the source track leaving it blank within the range and placed on the destination track replacing the audio that was there This command uses a range exclusively It copies all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select the source track Create a range in which you want to copy the audio to the destination
320. t value for any parameter is determined in the following order 1 The parameter is set to the TO value of the most recent previous event or the current event if the transport is right on top of a data change 2 If no previous event exists the parameter is set to the FROM value of the next future event 3 If no future or previous event exists the parameter is set to the value recorded in the mix Snapshot Touch Write Touch write is a super fast way to automate your mix When properly set up you can simply grab the controls you want to change and write the changes straight into the automation For a parameter to go into write when you touch it the following must be true The parameter must be enabled Use the Param Enable layout in the Mixer Megamode the Enab button on the ILP2 or an enable button on the ILP or Mixer screen The channel must be selected OR Touch Auto Enable must be on Channels can be selected using the channel buttons in the XCS panel when a Mixer menu is current e g mix menu Or pad lock The Touch Auto Enable button is found in the Mixer Megamode Parameters available for touch write are shown in the XCS Pad with a red triangle and the same on the ILP screen Latch and Snap Latch means that once you touch the control it stays in Write or Trim until the system goes back into Read Snap means that the parameter enters Write or Trim when you touch it and returns to Read when you release it us
321. tailed above in the section about the Mix Menu Automation follows Clip Editing In addition to the Mix Copy functions it is also possible to edit automation data whilst editing the audio For Clips or Ranges of Clips their corresponding mix data can be Copied or Cut to another position if Data is included on the Edit Target key Step 1 Press the Mix Menu button Step 2 Press the Target soft key until both is selected Step 2 Edit audio in the usual ways and all enabled automation data for the sections of track you are editing will also be edited Note When a range is selected automation data is cut copied and pasted for the entire range whether or not clips are present Undoing the audio edit will also undo the automation change Copy Project Segment This command in the Edit Menu copies all audio and automation data on all channels in the system from a range to the cursor position To do this Step 1 Make a range around the segment you want to copy Step 2 Click Edit gt Copy Project Segment Step 3 Locate to the timecode where you want to paste Step 4 Paste the clipboard using any of the following Click Edit Paste Press Enter on the Xynergi Type ctrl v on a qwerty keyboard the first copies the clips and all automation in a range into the clipboard which can then be manually pasted at the playhead The copy is still selection independent The audio from all tracks will be copied whether selected or no
322. te the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of a clip Make its track the only selected one If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Hold down Track and press cut clip head tail Keep holding while turning the Jogger Wheel to move to another track Release both keys to drop the cut clip on to the target track Press and hold cut clip Jog forward and release cut clip to drop the cut clip You can do the same with copy and trim These moves may feel awkward at first but remember your first mouse click and drag With practice you ll become a virtuoso editor Page 82 EDITING January 22 2013 Tactile Editing Detailed Description This section goes into more detail about editing Edit Modes Xstream editing uses five main modes selected in the Edit Megamode Copy copies the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Cut cuts the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Erase erases the selection Trim retracts or extends the heads or tails of clips Fade fades or cross fades the selection Once a mode is selected it remains current until another mode is selected The Cursor Most edits are performed at the Play Head or Cursor This is the vertical line in the center of the Edit Screen ome hue A me Ke be ee e aj O e t b OOO memke BE HBC aA DH 9 EES sE DH efie m m i SH EE
323. tems Inc has contractually obligated Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers to make this disclaimer e No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation e SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Obtaining Technical Support Users requiring technical support should contact their local distributor Information can also be found on the world wide web at http www fairlightau com Manual Errors and Omission To help ensure that Fairlight provides the most accurate and comprehensive documentation please report
324. tems is not required The older formats are MT and MT MFX3 The MT format was introduced in the DREAM I product series also Known as QDC systems and is maintained with full backward compatibility by Xstream The MT MFX3 format is for much older systems you ll know if you need to use it Choosing Format At the time of creating a project file the system offers the choice of project formats in the New Project dialog Dream 2 There is no way to change project format after creation but you can save a copy of the current project in the other format using the File Save As command Page 287 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 a Select the new path and name OO 7 di t Computer Data D FairlightAU Projects Jestream video Organize New folder jz 7 7 Name Date modified Type Size jE Computer i di Media 8 01 2013 8 18 AM File folder So System C ieee oe _ Jestrearn video DR2 6 12 2012 2 37 PM DR2 File 34 090 KE ca Data Ds a aetna ene _ Shutdown DR2 9 08 2012 5 47 PM DR2 File 34 087 KE Se system SUPERNOVA P E RandD fs04 R G This Year fs05 T Sw JDs Audiobase V G fairlightau wsdev web website w ga Storage A Se cS gandalf Y G fairlightau wsdev web website wr _ SoftwareException DOR2 30 10 2012 6 42 PM DR2 File 34 087 KE ps W My Web Sites on MSN Ci Network jE AB3 SERVER Ji cc2 4600 jE HERCUL
325. tep 2 Step 3 Step 6 Step 7 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 The Record Tracks correspond with the source tracks from the existing Source Project Select Edits to Reconform as for Capture Link Reels Each reel can come from a different project if required Use the Reel Linking dialog to choose the project for each reel select a reel then click the Project button and browse to the correct Project to be linked Reel Linking Reel Project CTH G lFairlightALiProjects DR_AMBIGIDR AMBIG DR2 03000 a Fairlight AUi FrojectsiMT_Foreigni MT Foreign MT LIB 2 34000 a Fairlight AU Projects 96 Tracks 96 Tracks DRZ LIB 3 32000 a FairlightoU Projects ImportRobotsTest ImportRobotsTest DR LIB 4 10000 a Fairlight AUi Projects New Project O New Project o BR2 LIB 5 35000 a Fairlight AUi Projects Wew Projecti44 New Projecti44 DRe2 LIB 6 16001 a FairlightoU Projects New Projectl44Wew Projectl44 0R2 LIB 6 PREREAD a Fairlight AUi Projects New Projecti2 New Projectl BR LIB 1 MAINRECO a Fairlight AUi Projects New Projectl2 New Projectl BR LIB 1 31000 a FairlightoU Projects New Projecti2iWew Projectl DRZ LIB 1 36000 a FairlightoU Projects New Projectl2iWew Projectl DRZ LIB 1 03003 a FairlightaU Projects New Projecti 2 New Projectl BR LIB 1 37000 a Fairlight AUi Projects New Projecti 2 New Project1z2 DR2 LIB 1 Ug a FairlightoU Projects New Projectl2iWew Projectl DRZ
326. ters will have their values stored You can choose them individually like EQ In in groups like EQ ALL or choose everything with All Params A second press of All Params will turn everything off For this How To enable only Fader and Pan If you are making a baseline pass for all paths press All Chans but not for this How To Press Exit to return to the Mix menu for the next item Note that the Fader and Pan controls have blue triangles next to them showing that they are enabled for automation Page 224 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 On Stop Setting The on stop soft key controls what happens to automation values after you stop writing e g when you press STOP during an automation pass Press the soft key repeatedly to cycle through the options Return gt the last value you wrote is ramped to the previous value of the parameter using the Glide Out Time see Utils menu Hold gt the last value you wrote is held until the end of the Project erasing all following changes Event gt the last value is held until the next event i e change in value that you wrote previously using the Glide Out Time see Utils menu Set the value you want Working With the Pad Select signal path s Turn MULTI on if you want to change values on all the selected paths simultaneously Press the Write Trim button until Write is selected Press Play and then auto or vice versa The Level and Pan backgrounds go red and begin writing valu
327. that you selected all the bus elements and the same number of consecutive meters and clicked Patch Resizable means that if you change the bus format it will grab as many meters as it needs pushing the next signals to the right when it expands potentially off the end and pulling them to the left when it contracts Page 254 METERS January 22 2013 If you leave blanks to the right of a resizable bus it will consume the blanks before starting to push other channels to the right Using the Meters Menu Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the assign meters Soft key This displays the Patch I O page Step 3 Use the Patch I O page as described in the previous section Peaks The numeric peak levels displayed on the mixer display bus meters have a variable threshold The level at which these values are displayed can be set in the C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data System_Variables txt file Edit the following line in the file PEAK_DISPLAY_LIMIT 950 The value is from 0 to 1000 in 0 1dB steps where 1000 full scale level In the example above the value of 950 will cause the numeric display to first be shown when the signal level reaches 5dB below full scale 970 will set the threshold to 3dB 990 will set the threshold to 1dB and so on Clear Peak Signal levels in excess of OdB full scale are indicated by a fixed orange peak hold display To reset the peak hold display Step 1 Press the
328. the Render Plugin soft key Use the Jog Wheel to search for a desired plug in to be used on this clip Press the Edit soft key to display the plug in controls Park the timeline on the clip that you would like to process and press the Preview softkey The clip will automatically start looping and you can now adjust all parameters in real time Page 238 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Le ILs lmi 2 Le lis iim 3 Lelis ilm is Lels ilm l d E A 10 01 10 02 C Opin Master 5X20 Internal ETAN B PAFI Top Layers D 178 18 56 Step 5 When the clip sounds the way you want press the render softkey This will directly render your plug in processing to the clip the original clip is still there on an underneath layer so that you can quickly go back to the original recording if required m ms a ellisini S2 ms 193 4 al i PS is FI LETER j TERNIR shay fi b i 1 A T TAR lici PIIA RT REMER MI a Ah hl Hy ll tie it ate 3 E3 IN VAE I fe e Ra ma IN i ie DI 2 l Bass Pre_04 24bit E er EE 23 46 40 14 Si Qpin Master 5X20 Internal PSPC CETE Top Layers D 178 15 17 o 23 52 43 10 Page 239 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Note DREAM II systems provide full native processing on every channel including EQ Filters Dynamics and surround panning This means plug ins can be reserved for special applications Using VST Instruments in Xstream Whi
329. the key plus M2 key or click view gt Smart Pane gt Machine Control Step 2 The following Smart Pane is displayed H Type Config Name Online Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Arm Y Analog Digital Asm inh Ref LTC MTC Mi NE O M2 BAME Remote sln MMCRem 0 0 00 05 49 13 00 00 00 00 Sto C Generato E 00 05 49 19 00 00 00 00 Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Arm 00 00 0000 NE FETIME OUTEF 00 05 49 19 Stopped 00 05 49 19 Online Status Arm Y Analog Digital Asm inh Ref LTCMTC FETIME OUT Y Ej 00 00 00 00 Stopped E LTO Generator E In Stop E MT Generator I Wideo Arming Online Step 3 Use the type soft key or Type list box to select one of the following machine types e TC Master the selected machine is the 9 Pin timecode master e Chase slave the selected machine is in 9 Pin chase mode e Remote slave Xstream will respond to 9 Pin remote commands like a virtual VTR e LTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external Longitudinal Time Code e MTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external MIDI Time Code e MMC Remote Slave when this is selected Xstream responds to MIDI Machine Control commands Page 311 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 e Pyxis selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines See Editing with Machine Control on page 317 to see how this works e No Po
330. the last edit Redoes the last edit that was undone Shows a list of the edits that can be undone Shows a list of the edits that can be redone Cuts the selected clip or range to the clipboard Cuts the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Cuts the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copies the selected clip or range to the clipboard Copies the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copies the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Pastes a copy of the clipboard at the current position Allows characteristics of the first clip on the clipboard to be pasted Erases the selected clip or range Erases the head of the clip at the cursor position Erases the tail of the clip at the cursor position Extends the clip head to use all the recorded audio Extends the clip tail to use all the recorded audio Splits the selected clips into two at the cursor Heals split in audio clips must be positioned together Unlinks linked clips Relinks previously linked clips For stereo clips swaps the left and right channels Opens a menu of Broadcast Wave commands Cycles clip layers sending top layer to bottom Reverse cycles clip layers bringing bottom to top Allows the selected clips to be renamed Syncs the selected clips to their record timecode Reverses the audio in the clips Opens a palette of colours for applying to clips Allows the level of selected clips to be set
331. ther sections already have automation data It prevents the automation system from moving the controls that the user is trying to balance for the new section As soon as the user is happy with the new balance it can be written to the new section Preview state is engaged on enabled mix items by first pressing the Preview key and then enabling mix items using Touch Latch for individual parameters or the auto key next to a fader to enable the mix items for all parameters on the selected feed When enabled in Preview mix items are illuminated in flashing red Once in preview mode the mix items can be placed into Write or Trim by dropping in manually with the In key or automatically using the Active In and Out points see Programmed Automation Once enabled for Preview mix items remain in that state regardless of transport starts and stops This is different from putting mix items into automation record which must be done again after each transport stop Preview is described in more detail below Safe When mix items are in Safe mode they cannot enter automation record They are always in READ or ISOLATE To put Signal paths into Safe mode Page 205 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Step 1 Press the Auto Safe button Step 2 Use the XCS controller to set signal paths Safe Safety Zone In addition the Safe menu defines an Active Zone outside of which no automation data can be written for ANY signal path To set the Safety Zone
332. this text will appear in the Title Bar of the Edit screen whenever the project is loaded Give your project a name and select the appropriate options You are ready to begin Page 296 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Backup Project to Folder Both MT files and DR2 files can be backed up using File Backup Project to Folder option This feature copies the project file and all the associated media files audio and video to the designated folders Backup Project to Folder places all files associated with a project in a single place making it easy to restore them later Many facilities use inexpensive USB drives for backup Restoring files is simply a matter of dragging and dropping files from the backup folder to the appropriate Audio and Video Media Devices Media Scanning Normally the system scans all available media to ensure that it is up to date with available files This takes some system bandwidth and memory in particular If you do not need this function i e if your storage contents are not being changed by other computers you may turn off background scanning in Setup gt General Preferences Projects If you open a project whose media is not online and then you bring the media online it will not be found if background scanning is switched off You can however force the system to find the relevant media for the current project using Process Relink Media Detailed Media Management To work on media an
333. ting the clipboard use the Enter key means putting a copy of it at the current position on whatever tracks are selected You can paste the clipboard contents at any time not just after a cut operation and as often as you like If there are already clips at the place where you paste the clipboard is placed on top of the existing clips Only the top layer is heard unless there is a crossfade between layers more about that later The shape of the clipboard s track selection is preserved when pasting regardless of track selection at that time For example if you copy clips on tracks 1 and 3 then select only track 8 and press Enter the clipboard will be pasted on tracks 8 and 10 The first track on the clipboard is always pasted on the lowest numbered track in the selection Variations There are a few extra keys which change the functions of Cut and Paste All Layers Sometimes clips are stacked in layers Of course we only hear the top layer or crossfades between the top and second layers more about crossfades later You have the choice of cutting only the top layer or all the layers The all layers key controls this choice When it is on you will cut all the layers and they ll be placed on the clipboard ready to be pasted When it is off you will cut only the top layer Note that all layers only works with a range Hint if you want to see all the layers hold down the takes button and select the on off sof
334. tion of audio in sync with picture you can punch in and out on the fly or use a range to set the start and end point of the recording To do this use the Auto Recording methods described on page 60 To record more takes of the same audio the easiest way is to use the Record Again function To do this use the method described on page 60 Viewing Takes To see all the layers of audio on your tracks turn on Display Layering This can be done in an number of ways as follows e Hold Mode then double press the Takes button e Click the Layering button in the Toolbar Layering button e Select view Display Layering from the Menu Bar The Takes Menu The Takes menu allows you to bring different takes to the top of the stack for auditioning and editing e To display the Takes menu hold Mode then press the Takes button The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track For the configuration shown above the Takes display looks like this when the cursor runs through the middle of all the clips Page 61 RECORDING January 22 2013 Clip Color Track Layer Start Time End Time Duration Recorded Audio 5 Track 2 4 00 00 12 02 00 00 15 05 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio z Track 2 3 00 00 12 20 00 00 15 11 00 00 02 20 Recorded Audio 4 Track 2 2 00 00 10 29 00 00 14 02 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio 3 Track 2 l 00 00 12 02 00 00 14 11 00 00 02 09 As the transport moves
335. tly any recordings made since the last save will not appear in the project next time it is opened These recordings can be recovered and resynced as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Open the DR2 Project Open the folder in Windows Explorer that contains this project Open its Media folder Identify the WAVs that are missing from the project These will normally be the most recent ones i e the ones with the latest modification date Drag the missing WAV files from their folder to the DREAM II track display and drop them there For each WAV file that you have dropped select it and notice the track number embedded in its name Place it on that track For each WAV file select it by moving the transport until it is underneath the play head then issue the command Edit Resync to Record Time This will place the clip at the time where it was originally recorded Waveform Profiles Dream II stores waveform profiles for all the media in your projects allowing it to display full screen waveforms at any zoom range The waveform profiles are extracted and stored in the background during and after any recording or import function or whenever a piece of media does not have a profile If a number of clips have no profiles selected ones are given preference during calculation and display After some time the number of profiles can get quite large and use a lot of space on your computer The system automatically de
336. to access a previous version of the edit list take the following steps Step 1 Open the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Undo 2C Program Files Fairlight Oream IT Unda 0 Mame Size Type Date Modified a UndoFile 00 2 IS KB File 11 03 2008 2 33 PM Only these two UndoFile 00 1 Bt Fite i files are from E UndoFile_00 4 i3KB 4File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM the most recent UndoFile 00 3 1S KB 3 File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM project UndoFile 00 8 iSKB 8 File 11 03 2008 1 46 PM Linda Fila On 7 iC re 7 Fil 1ifnsafenne 1 43 a 4 H Disk free space 14 1 GB 74 6 ME d My Computer F Step 2 Choose the undo file you want to open Rename this file so that it has an extension dr2 upper or lower case it doesn t matter Step 3 Move this file to a Media Device The simplest is to move it to the folder on your audio drive where the original project is stored Step 4 Open this file by issuing the File gt Open command or using the Project Menu open soft key Page 294 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT January 22 2013 Video Files Xstream supports drag and drop import of a variety of video file formats as well as direct video recording to the Xstream timeline For correct operation video files must be played from and recorded to a separate hard disk than the audio data WARNING If you attempt to play video and audio data from the same hard disk you will experience SEVERE performance problems The disk band
337. to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes display updates at regular intervals to show the current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downwards using the Jog Wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top On Off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the Takes menu commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed Background Recording The system can run a background recording that is independent of all other activities and transport modes This is described in detail in in its own chapter ADR Automation Dialog Replacement is described in its own chapter on Page 63 Page 62 ADR January 22 2013 ADR Introduction Xstream provides the ability to automate recording using a list of In and Out points with a simple interface The ADR menu includes functions for setting pre and post roll and features for automatic dialogue replacement The ADR List The ADR List allows you to set up a list of recordings cues that you want to take Each one has a controlled In and Out point and text that can be displayed on the screen To open the ADR List Hold down Mode and press ADR Then
338. toggle the master s value and set all other members to that value For Switches which cycle through a number of values pressing the switch will set all members to the next value of the Group Master e Holding down BLUE while touching controls for faders and aux sends sets them to 0 dB It also sets all group members to 0 dB removing any differences between their values e The MUTE and SOLO keys on the Master Fader section indicate the mute and solo status of all the members e When the group is created the channel Soft Pot is set to the position of the first feed in the group When it is adjusted the values of the Soft Pot parameters of all the members of the group are offset The channel Soft Key displays the setting of the Soft Key parameter of the first member of the group e The AUTO key on the Master Fader section enables automation recording for the link group master which will control all the members Only the Link Group master actually records automation data and any existing data for the other group members is erased when the master enters automation WRITE e When selected a link group is displayed in the Fat Channel display at the bottom of the Mixer Screen The display shows input patching and destinations for the entire group Page 146 GROUPING January 22 2013 Creating a Link Group Step 1 Press the Setup Megamode button Step 2 Press the Link Gp button The feeds that currently belong to link groups are shown in yello
339. toggle the oscillator Tone and Noise channels on and off Frequency Sets the frequency for the Tone channel as follows Step 1 Press the Freq button The number pad will appear Step 2 Type the number of the frequency you require The numbers will append to the existing number until it exceeds 10 000 and then it starts again at 20 Step 2A The and buttons can be used to increment or decrement the displayed number Step 3 When you have the desired number displayed press the Freq button again Level Sets the volume level for the Tone and Noise channels as follows Step 1 Press the Level button The number pad will appear Step 2 Type the number of the level you require This is always negative but there is no need to use the minus key The numbers will append to the existing number until it goes below 99 and then it starts again with the most recently typed digit Step 2A The and buttons can be used to increment or decrement the displayed number Step 3 When you have the desired number displayed press the Level button again Patch Osc Sets the destination signal paths for the oscillator channels Step 1 Press Patch Osc to access the Patch I O page Page 189 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 MIXING January 22 2013 Select the Osc button at lower left then the desired channel at upper left Use the Category buttons at lower right to select a type of destination channel Select one of the channels in the chosen
340. ton Step 3 Press an F Set button from 1 to 11 Step 3 Release the Fader Set button The same thing can be done in latched mode Shortcut Step 1 Hold down BLUE Step 2 Press the F Set Up Or F Set Down button Holding Faders To temporarily retain a selection of channels in their current fader positions when recalling a new fader set simply touch and hold the faders while pressing a fader set key The existing channels will temporarily replace those in the new fader set Press the fader set key without holding a fader to resume the normal fader set Page 192 MIXING January 22 2013 Mapping Fader Sets Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode press the Fader set button choose a Fader Set and press the Map F Set button Or hold down Mode and select the Map Faders button This immediately starts mapping the current fader set Step 2 Select a fader set to map or continue with the currently selected one Step 3 The caL key on the first fader will flash to indicate that it is ready to be defined The Channel Select window will appear on the screen Use the mouse to select any feed for your first fader Step 4 The next fader is automatically selected and the path assigned to it flashes Continue to assign faders in order or select a fader out of sequence by pressing its cALL key and making a selec tion on the selection panel Use the buttons at the bottom of the window to select more tracks lives and buses You can stop changi
341. ton The system replaces the media in the selected clips To replace the media of clips using that media file do the same as above but use the command Process gt Change Media All Related Clips Undo and Redo Step 1 Dream II has a powerful undo system that allows you to go back over your work in multiple steps Every time you record audio perform an edit or make a change to the automation data in your project the system captures an Undo File This is a file representing the project as it was before you changed it These files are written to disk and can be accessed at any time while the project remains open With some clever manipulation you can even access them later for information about this please see Undo Files on page 294 Undo The simplest way to undo a change is to press the unpo button located to the right of the Jog Wheel Redo Reversing an undo can be done with the REDO button To access this Hold down the ctrl button and press the unpo button How many steps are available ALL of them since you opened the project The Undo Menu and List You can see which edits are available to undo and redo by inspecting the Undo Menu and List To do this do ONE of the following Page 118 EDITING Step 1 Hold down the unpo button for a couple of seconds PlayHead Time Automation Pass 0000 57 15 13 13 54 Paste OO 00 47 02 loaz Automation Pass 0000 4a 0I 13 12 38 Automation Pass 0000 aS lz 13
342. track using the From and To buttons Press the copy soft key Choose the destination track The audio in the range is copied from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there The Move Menu Xstream has a new menu designed to quickly move clips between tracks To use the Move menu the system must be in the Edit Basic Megamode or the Quick Edit layout To access one of these hold down Mode and press Edit Basic Of Quick Edit To select the Move Menu Step 1 Hold down Mode and press Move Menu Release Mode To move a clip to another track Page 109 EDITING January 22 2013 i i i i Step 2 Hold down move CLIP Step 3 Type the destination track number on the Numpad Step 4 Release move CLIP The selected clip is moved but the track selection stays where it was Notes about Move e move HEAD and move TAIL work exactly the same way aS move CLIP e The system remembers your last destination track To keep using it simply press and release move CLIP HEAD TAIL Options Multiple Tracks Move commands can use multiple tracks Clips on the lowest numbered selected track will be moved to the destination track Clips on higher numbered tracks will be sent to corresponding higher numbered destinations Range Move commands can use a range All clips and parts of clips within the range are affected Xstream s Quick Edit Layout The Quick Edit Layout provides a faster way to perform basic ed
343. ts a track in and out of Automation Record This is only available if Automation is Switched on use the Mix On screen button or surface button Page 39 CHANNELS January 22 2013 The Mix On screen button The Graph button allows you to choose an Automation curve for each track out of Fader Mute and Pan Other choices are available in the Automation software see Automation chapter Fader automation chosen for graph display Mute automation chosen for graph display Pan automation chosen for graph display Zooming The track display represents a 24 hour continuous loop The timescale can be zoomed from a few Samples across the screen to eight hours The Zoom number and screen width are shown at the bottom left of the screen To change zoom range Step 1 Hold down the Zoom button Step 2 Turn the jogger wheel to zoom in and out Alternatively Step 1 Hold down a Zoom button Step 2 Press a Number key on the Numeric Keypad Alternatively Step 1 Hold down the Zoom button Step 2 Press the or key The Mouse wheel can also be used to zoom the display click on the Edit Screen first to put it in focus Float the mouse over the track display while turning the wheel Track display selection and zooming is possible while playing and recording Timescale display Timecode positions can be displayed in whole frames frames with subframes frames with subframes and samples feet and frames in either film format
344. u can do by editing with fleximap files directly e Delete a file containing errors so that the Plug in Editor can work You will see that a Fleximap file contains errors when the Plug in shows no parameter names in the Pad e Correct a file containing errors so that the Plug in Editor can work This requires some experience Most of the errors in Fleximap files are misnamed parameters See details below e Rename parameters en masse e Provide names for Multi Switch values Finding a Fleximap All Fleximap files are stored in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data FlexiMaps Page 236 PLUG INS AND REWIRE January 22 2013 Those addressing the Xstream pad arein a subfolder called Xstream while those addressing Fader strips are in the root of the Fleximaps folder A Fleximap file is a text file with an extension fsm or FSM Fleximap Format Fleximaps contain a number of sections Part of a Fleximap from an imaginary plug in called ANYPLUG_01_ is shown below VERSION 1 BEGIN_Xstream FADERSET CONTROL XP_MAIN 3 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 saturation saturation CONTROL XP_MAIN 5 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 lo cut freq lo cut freq CONTROL XP_MAIN 6 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 sat emph freq sat emph fre CONTROL XP_MAIN 7 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_O1 opto memory opto memory CONTROL XP_MAIN 8 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_0O1 output output CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 1 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 bypass Bypass
345. u can use the F Set up and down buttons to exit Mixer Set while BLUE is held down Call button For each fader the Call button puts that channel into the Pad It does not select the channel for editing or mass channel mixing operations Its action is NOT equivalent to pressing the channel s selection button on the Xstream surface because e The selection button selects the channel as well as calling it e The selection button can TOGGLE the channel on and off The CALL button makes the channel the current Pad channel and only asserts does not toggle Auto button The Auto button changes the automation state of the channel that owns the fader strip If Preview is on the channel is toggled in and out of preview Otherwise if Write is selected the channel is toggled into and out of Write or if Trim is selected it is toggled into and out of Trim PanPot Function The Panpot default function is to control the Left Right Pan position of each channel Page 194 MIXING January 22 2013 It may adopt other functions to match choices for Fader function For example if Faders are set to control Aux send level the Panpot will be set to control Aux pan For details of Fader function see Faders To below Fader Function The standard fader function is to control the send level of the channel to its assigned buses i e Main Bus and sub busses Faders To Faders can also control a number of other parameters At any t
346. u can view the tracks as stationary clips with a moving Play Head To do this click Setup Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Page 125 EDITING January 22 2013 The Edit Toolbar Audiobase Meters Patch Redo Cut selected Paste Smart Smart I O reverse clips or clipboard Pane Pane page last undo range Display Clip EQ Clip Undo Erase Copy layering Smart Search last edit selected selected Pane Window clips or clips or range range Fade Trim Tail Head FaN n A Fade Split Trim Head Clip Tail Nudge Name Not Jump to Jump to 1 frame Clip active previous mark previous point l ro Uf a Nudge Mute Clip Add Jump to Jump to 1 frame Clip Level Mark next mark next point Display Layering Toggles the display of clip layers on tracks This is explained on page 130 AudioBase Smart Pane Opens the AudioBase Smart Pane where you can search for sound effects audition them and paste them into your project This is explained starting at page 138 Clip EQ Smart Pane Opens the Clip EQ Smart Pane where you can add a four band equaliser to any clip This is explained starting at page 104 Page 126 EDITING January 22 2013 Meters Smart Pane Opens the Meters Smart Pane This is the default display at the top of the Edit Screen It shows a meter for every track in the project Clip Search Window Opens a window showing every clip in the project plus ClipStore projects From here you can audition locate or paste
347. uary 22 2013 recommended that the audio interface boxes remain powered up unless you are dismantling the installation Graphic Themes Xstream allows a choice of colour schemes which are called themes Three themes are provided The most common choice is the Solo theme which will be preset on your system It has the latest features particularly for mouse editing To choose a theme do the following Step 1 Click the Setup menu item above the Edit Screen Step 2 Click General Preferences gt Options gt Themes Step 3 Choose one of the themes from the list The Solo and Evo themes are dark grey while the Classic theme is light grey blue and white It is possible to build your own theme If you wish to do this contact Fairlight in Australia Page 9 SELECTION AND CALLING January 22 2013 Selection and Calling selection Types There are three kinds of selection in the Dream system Selection One or more signal paths When a path is selected it responds to mixing automation commands like IN and OUT and is available for Touch Write If it is a track it also becomes a target for editing commands like cut clip and fade head Called Channel One path i e Track Live Bus Group or Monitors Also known as the Current Channel The Current Channel is the target of all signal processing commands like changes in panning and EQ It appears in the Xstream Pad Current Track One track only the l
348. udio edit with the Target set to Both an audio edit and an automation edit occur at the same time In the Undo List this will be seen as a single audio edit and will be undone ina single step Mouse Based Editing The mouse can be used to move the transport select and zoom tracks make ranges and edit clips This can be done irrespective of which editing or mixing mode is selected Transport Transport buttons are provided in the Solo theme To select this click Setup General Preferences gt Options gt Themes Then select Solo from the drop down menu With this theme active you may click on the transport buttons at the top of the screen Clicking REW and FF multiple times will increase the speed of movement each time Clicking the Loop button when a range is present will cause the transport to loop the range if any is present The spacebar on your qwerty keyboard can also be used to toggle between Play and Stop Dragging and Scrolling the Transport Very fast locating is possible using right click and drag horizontally anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen To scroll the tracks up and down right click and drag vertically anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen Page 121 EDITING January 22 2013 Heep ie Right click and drag kalimba vertically to scroll the Kalimba tracks Em Right click and drag horizontally to move the transport The tracks can als
349. ull surround At FULL spread the Page 150 GROUPING January 22 2013 LR and FB pan controls have no effect as each member of the link group is hard panned to their respective bus elements As the spread is reduced the panning of each link group member is made to converge with the location of the link group master pan control With the spread control less than full the pan control enables the sound field to be moved to favour the location of the pan target As the spread control approaches POINT the panning of each member becomes closer to the pan location of the link group master This has the effect of mixing the signals of each link group member so that they all emerge from the same loudspeakers as determined by the link group master pan When a link group is created with default pans spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero The spread control can be used to great effect when it is desired to collapse the surround sound field to a point source This may occur for instance where the camera moves continuously from an interior shot to an exterior or visa versa The surround field can be established for the interior and then as the camera moves through the door or window the surround field collapses and pans and fades down to the location of the window As this is occurring a pre mixed surround field for the exterior can be growing from the rear speakers and spread out to the entire speaker system as the
350. view the mix item ramps to the newly recorded value prior to the drop in point over the Glide In time set in the utils menu For all other methods of entering automation record the mix item value is always the current Read value so there is no transition Automation Playback The DREAM II automation system ensures that your mix will always play back exactly as recorded There are two main forms of automation data recorded in a project The first is the static snapshot of all parameters which is recorded whenever a mix is saved The second type of data are the dynamic auto mation events that are recorded every time a parameter is modified while the system is writing or trimming automation Once a dynamic event has been recorded on a feed or bus that parameter will be in READ whenever Mix ON iS engaged and the transport is in PLAY Page 207 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 When the system detects that a parameter control has changed while in Write or Trim a dynamic event is recorded that stores the previous value and the new value FROM value and TO value of that specific parameter at a specific timecode location When Mix ON is engaged and the transport is located to any position on the time line the automation system looks back and forward in time to find any events previously recorded for the parameter If no dynamic events have been recorded for the parameter the parameter is set to the value recorded in the mix snapshot The curren
351. w or brown Feeds available for selection are shown in dark blue Step 3 Press the feed selection key of the first feed of the group Its key lights up and all other buttons disappear except the ones you can include in a link group with the first Step 3 Press one of the feed selection keys to make it the last feed of the group Link groups can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both Link groups can only include up to eight members which must have contiguous numbers e g 3 to 10 Step 3A If the number of feeds you have selected corresponds to more than one Bus type e g Dolby 5 1 and SMPTE 5 1 choose between them with the appropriate soft key Step 4 Select a menu item from the Apply Defaults soft key menu all defaults applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format All defaults also applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members Parameters modified are fader level pan EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct out state default pans applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format Default pans affects the pan parameter only feed params applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members excluding pan Parameters modified are fader level EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct outs
352. ward or Rewind when the locate distance more than the number in the Lace Window This allows for faster locates for video tape recorders Lace Window Causes the machine to unlace if it is given a locate command outside the range of this window Unlacing allows the machine to travel faster and reduces head wear Tracking Algorithm Determines how the machine performs when searching for timecode Each machine may perform better with either choice of algorithm Bi Directional Control When switched on allows either the Master or the Slave to instigate transport commands e g Play Stop etc Page 313 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL January 22 2013 Edit Delay frames Each VTR has a built in delay between receiving the Edit command equivalent to a pre programmed Record command and actually entering the Edit mode If you the Edit Delay to match the machine s behaviour Xstream will issue the Edit command early so that the VTR enters Edit at the right time Confidence Head Switches the video machine s Confidence Head on or off Stop Command Allows the option of keeping the VTR tape on the heads when the machine stops This will allow it to start playing much quicker but it does increase head wear Head Protect Specifies a time after which the tape is removed from the heads automatically to prevent wear Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incomi
353. which are uncompressed vmu dv25 dif mjpeg vmj lossless Huffman compression vmh MXF files require an MXF licence dongle IMX Mpeg requires an IMX Mpeg licence Dv50 dv100 require a DVCPro Licence dongle Page 262 PYXIS TRACK January 22 2013 Playing a QuickTime or AVI file requires that the latest available codec for that file type has been installed Fairlight recommends that automatic update be switched on to ensure that the version remains current In some cases a specific codec must be installed e g QuickTime files from Avid require the Avid codec to play them For a good indication of playability double click a file in Windows Explorer If the operating system plays the file immediately it will almost certainly play in Pyxis Track Capturing Video into Pyxis Track The following assumes your system is equipped with a Decklink Video capture card For the purposes of the example we will be operating in Standard Definition mode Pyxis Track allows an incoming video signal to be captured directly onto the timeline This requires correct configuration of both the Decklink card and Dream II Configuration of the Decklink card Configure the required settings for your Decklink card by navigating to START Setting gt Control Panel gt Decklink Blackmagic DeckLink 6 7 1 x Preference settings for your DeckLink HD Extreme 2 settings Processing video Levels Audio
354. width required for video is governed by the type of video you wish to play back Some types of compressed Standard Definition video may play back from a single 10 000 RPM SATA drive while uncompressed High Definition Video may require a large fast RAID array Please contact your Fairlight distributor to discuss your specific needs Typical Xstream Drive Configuration F F My Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack ed i r2 Search Folders Hab System Tasks s Local Disk C1 l S Audio iD View system See Video E information Zh Add or remove Shared Documents programs Dream s Documents g Change a setting Other Places a My Metwork Places G My Documents 9 Shared Documents Control Panel Designating Media Device When Xstream is first started it displays a dialogue box requesting that a default project device be selected Select the devices Audio and Video you wish to use from the list of available drives TO prepare the drive for use with Xstream select Setup Media and Project Management from the Xstream main menu Select the device from the devices list and click on Convert to Media device Please also set the Device Info accordingly in most cases this is set automatically and does not need to be changed Devices Media ee Space kb FairlightAU For Networked Perm Guid c c Dream II Both 15178720 Yes 2500 Local Yes oo00000 R R t Dream II Audio 212907624 Yes 5
355. without notice Fairlight AU reserves the right to change any part of this document without notice The warranties remedies and disclaimers above are exclusive and take precedence over all others oral or written express or implied to the extent permitted by law in the geographical area of the product s use No employee of Fairlight AU agent distributor or employee of an agent or distributor is authorized to offer any variation from this policy Copyright 2008 Fairlight AU Pty Ltd Unit 3 15 Rodborough Rd Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 AUSTRALIA Telephone 61 2 9975 1777 Fax 61 2 9975 1999 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT You have acquired a device DEVICE which includes software licensed by Fairlight AU from one or more software licensors Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers Such software products as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT Fairlight AU FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICEN
356. wo 4 wo un wo SFX O01 SFX 02 SFX 03 SFX 04 SFX 05 SFX 06 SFX 07 SFX O07 SFX 08 SFX 08 SFX 10 SFX 10 SEM LL SFX 11 SFX 12 SFX 12 SFX 13 SFX 13 SFX 14 SFX 14 SFX 15 SFX 15 SFX 16 SFX 16 SEX zZ SEX Lt SFX 18 SFX 19 SFX 20 SFX 21 SFX 22 SFX 23 SFX 24 SFX 24 Page Down SFX 25 SFX 25 SFX 26 SFX 26 SFX 27 SFX 27 SFX 28 SFX 28 SFX 29 SFX 29 SFX 30 SFX 30 om Ao ME es oo om Ao ME m o om Ao ME m om Ao N D om Ao ME es om Ao nO om Xo nO on ho oJ oo Oo no ho ATO mm no ho AT a oJ no ho ATI Select a destination bus at the bottom of the screen in the picture Sub 1 is selected Each path already assigned to that bus is highlighted tracks 88 to 90 are highlighted Each path shows the buses to which it is currently assigned all Aux Buses and Sub Buses can now be assigned to Main bus fe f f fu f SF 17 SFA 18 SAE oF 20 oFA 21 MBI MBI f fe f SEIE SPINE SARE SFA 20 SFA 25 Sub Sub Sub Sub 1 3 4 Click any path to toggle it on or off the destination bus To toggle multiple paths click and drag the mouse over them Page 162 MIXING January 22 2013 Use Page Up and Page Down to reach more paths Sub Buses are at the bottom of the second page They are grayed out unless Main is the selected destination Assigning Subs to Main this picture is distorted to save space Signal Processing Using the Pad Overview The Pad can be used to set signal processing parameters In this
357. y of the following e Move an individual event with the mouse You may change the event value move up or down or its timecode move left or right The timecode position is bounded by the next and previous events The timecode and current value of the event are shown in the Automation Edit group of the Smart Pane e Select one or more events by making a box marquee with the mouse Selected events may be e Dragged up and down or left and right Left and right movement is bounded by the next and previous events The value of the highest point is shown in the display above e Deleted using the Del key e Create a new event by clicking where there is currently no event e Combine moving and creating by clicking above or below the line If there is no point at the timecode where you clicked one will be created but if there is one within a quarter frame of where you clicked it will be raised or lowered to your mouse position Page 222 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Drawing Drawing allows you to create automation data using the mouse To begin drawing click the Draw button Now click and drag on any selected track to create or replace automation data Undo Automation changes made by editing or redrawing can be undone by pressing the undo button An unlimited number of undo steps is provided The Auto Curves Menu When you press the Auto Curves button a menu is displayed in the Pad Note selection in this menu is based on
358. y to write automation data for non critical items they will be reset to their correct static values when the mix is loaded Many complete mixes can be saved within a project How to Use Automation There are many styles for using automation Here is a summary of general methods Details will follow Using the XCS Auto Button Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Press the Auto button next to the Jog Wheel this puts the currently selected channel the one in the Pad into WRITE or TRIM see below Step 3 Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Step 4 Press Stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters signal paths Notes e You can press Auto before or after pressing Play e You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing Auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the all read button e See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record Using Auto Buttons Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Press Auto On one or more Faders this puts them into WRITE or TRIM see below Step 3 Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Step 4 Press Stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are t
359. yed by default To remove it press the DEL button Press Enter to save the preset or press the Cancel soft key to cancel the operation Loading a Preset Follow these steps to load a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Press the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Of all console soft key or click the corresponding screen button to select the type of preset you wish to load On the screen click the preset you wish to load Select the destination signal path s Click the Apply button If you choose an all console preset it doesn t matter which signal path is selected because the whole console will be loaded Deleting a Preset Unwanted library presets can be deleted by following these steps Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press the Lib key to display the library menu Press the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Of all console soft key to select the type of preset you wish to delete Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the list of available library presets for the selected type Press the Delete soft key then press the ves soft key to confirm the operation Page 198 AUTOMATION January 22 2013 Automation Introduction The Xstream automation system provides simple flexible and comprehensive facilities for recording and editing mix automation data All feed and bus mix parameters can be automated and played back in perfect synchronisation w
360. ync while dragging it to another layout hold down the key while dragging it Group Clips Xstream can create grouped clips that behave like individual clips To do this Step 1 Create a range containing the clips you want to group Step 2 Use the command gt A grouped clip appears in green when not selected If you have more than one track selected the group clip will look like a multi channel linked clip Editing of a grouped clip is the same as all other clips Double clicking a grouped clip shows it temporarily as separate clips allowing editing inside the group Double click again to restore the group Use gt to ungroup permanently Page 131 EDITING January 22 2013 Mouse Edit Menus The screen Edit Menus provide many commands that are available elsewhere in the system and some that are not The mouse can be used to access these commands Page 132 Undo Redo Undo List Redo List Cut Cut Head Cut Tail copy Copy Head Copy Tail Paste Paste Special Erase Erase Head Erase Tail Restore Head Restore Tail Split Clips Join Split Ctril 7 Ctrl Ctrl x Ctl c Ctrl y Delete Cleave Mult Channel Clips Restore Multi Channel LR Stereo Swap BWF Rotate Layers Reverse Rotate Layers Space Clips Evenly Group Clips UnGroup Clips Set Clip Colour Clip Level Phase Invert Clips Rename Resyne to record time Reverse Clips set Sync Point TY EDITING January 22 2013 Undoes
361. ynth has not been selected Page 323 HUI SLAVE MODE January 22 2013 Remap File If you want transport control or any other key events to work you must place a file called remap txt in the following folder C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data User username Where username is the log on name used on your computer The remap file takes keys coming in from the HUI device and routes them to keys on your Dream II system Here is the text in one remap file CID_SW_MACKIE_STOP CID_SW_STOP CID_SW_MACKIE_REWIND CID_SW_REW CID_SW_MACKIE_FAST_FWD CID_SW_FF CID_SW_MACKIE PLAY CID_SW_PLAY CID_SW_MACKIE_RECORD CID_SW_REC CID_SW_MACKIE_ALT CID_SW_BLUE_1 Blue key CID_SW_MACKIE_ENTER CID_SW_ENTER CID_SW_MACKIE_ZOOM CID_SW_ZOOM CID_SW_MACKIE_LEFT CID_SW_RNGE_JUMP_LEFT CID_SW_MACKIE_RIGHT CID_ SW_RNGE_JUMP_RIGHT CID_SW_MACKIE_MARKER CID_SW_GAP_FROM CID_SW_MACKIE_NUDGE CID_SW_GAP_TO CID_SW_MACKIE_SCRUB CID_SW_SHUT_JOG turns Jog on CID_JOG_MACKIE_WHEEL CID_JO_JOGGER this assigns the HUI jogger to the Dream II jogger CID_SW_MACKIE_READ CID_SW_EN_FADER_2 enables faders for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_WRITE CID_SW_EN_MUTE_2 enables mutess for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TOUCH CID_SW_EN_PAN_1 enables pan parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TRIM CID_SW_EN_EQ GROUP enables EQ parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_LATCH CID_SW_EN_DYN_GROUP enables dynamics parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_GROUP CID_SW_EN_AUX_GROUP enables aux send para
362. you reach will be added to the selection This does not affect selection of untouched tracks Page 122 EDITING January 22 2013 Mouse Based Ranges A range is a time interval bounded by an In Time and an Out Time It can be used to edit multiple clips and parts of clips The mouse can be used at any time to create a range Simply click an empty space one where there is no clip and drag an area on the Track display and a range will be created The tracks that you touch while dragging will be selected and all other tracks deselected If you need to make a range where clips are present hold down the ctrl and shift buttons while draggingr This will prevent clips being relocated To remove the current range click but don t drag empty space in the track area This will also make that track the sole selection You can also toggle the range using the keyboard shortcut r You can make or extend the range to exactly include a clip by holding down ctri and clicking the clip The Range Panel Sets the Range In point at the current timecode position Sets the Range Out point at the current timecode position Toggles the range on and off The Range panel in the upper left of the Edit Screen can be used to set precise range in and out points Move the transport to a time where you want the Range In point to be then click the From button or keyboard shortcut Move the transport to a time where you want the Range Out
363. ystem desperate measure but it works Transitions Using Glide When the automation system makes a transition from Write or Trim to Read Glide out data will be written to smooth the parameter transition as described below The Glide Out transition starts at the point where the system leaves record and finishes at the Out point plus the Glide Out time When a transition is made from Preview to Write Glide In data will be written The Glide In transition Starts before the point that the system entered record In point minus Glide In time and finishes at the point where the system entered record Glide times are set in the Utils menu On Stop Mix items currently in Write or Trim return to Read when the system leaves automation record using the Stop command The data that is written after the mix item returns to Read is determined by the on Stop menu item in the Mix Menu If On Stop Hold is selected all the following mix events are deleted so the last written value remains in force for the rest of the project If On Stop Return Is selected the parameter ramps to the previously recorded value at the end of the Glide Out time set in the utils menu Setup Megamode If On Stop Event Is selected the last written value remains in force until a previously recorded event is encountered At this point the parameter value ramps to the new value over the Glide Out time Read to Write Trim When a parameter is punched in to Write from Pre
364. z 7 7 d j z zi 2 z z z 2 zz 2 z z 2 z z a o E a E EIN Auto crash crash into fro T179 Auto crash crash into fro T181 Auto crash crash into fro T182 Auto crash crash into fro T279 Auto crash crash into fro T281 Auto crash crash into fro T282 E aii FAR kaai kaz J ena ops one z apes 5 4uto crash head on col fro T1 84 a Auto crash head on col fro T2 84 5 en OT a ceach brearl on col fen 17 AS x fs mm ee a E Step 1 After searching the database a list of matching clips is displayed Ensure the transport is in STOP then use the Jog Wheel or the and buttons to highlight the clip you want Holding down the shift button allows you to scroll faster Step 2 Press the Preview soft key or click the Preview button While Preview is lit the highlighted WAV file in the list will loop repeatedly emerging directly in the Monitor output not connected to any track or bus You can use the Jog wheel or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list Each time you highlight a new clip it starts to preview Press and hold the shift key while scrolling to go faster Step 3 Double Click the selected WAV file to paste it at the playhead on the active track or drag and drop a clip to any track at any point on the timeline An alternative method gives you more control of the clip s final position Step

XSTREAM User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents